Home

FM-1000 Integrated Display User Guide 9.25A

1. Data Field Description Format Notes Along Line Along Line distance from start of swath meters Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters Ant_Lat Antenna latitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Ant_Long Antenna longitude WGS 84 DD dddddddd Appln Wdth Application width meters As applied The actual rate applied by the rate control system when serial rate control TAC or the Field IQ system are used Auto Steer Auto Steer Flag 1 o0n O off On or off Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age seconds DOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision a measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry Field_Name Name of the field GPS Status GPS status value 1to 12 Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters Heading Direction of travel with respect to true North decimal degrees Height Mean sea level height of ground meters Local_Time Local time hh mmi ss s Logging On Coverage logging Flag 1 o0n O off On or off NDVI The NDVI values recorded when using the GreenSeeker plugin not currently implemented Num_ Stats Number of GPS satellites Offline Offline distance from swath center line meters Pitch The pitch Relative Height Height meters Roll The roll Speed GPS derived ground speed kph Status Text GPS status description Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 89 Data storage structure 4 Data management Data Field Description Format Notes Swath_Num Current
2. Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base station port number Mount Point Base station mount point User Name Assigned username Password Assigned password 4 If you are inside the USA tap OK The Configuration screen displays The Ag3000 modem is now configured 5 If you are outside the USA select the SIM Card Setup tab Enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider then tap OK DCM 300 Modem The DCM 300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need reliable communications for their farming operations This modem enables the FM 1000 integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a e Trimble VRS network e Third party RTK provider e Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 125 DCM 300 Modem 5 Connectivity settings The benefits of using the DCM 300 modem include e More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to the display e Easy interface and configuration with the display e Roof mounted high gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone signal related drop outs e On screen wireless status and diagnostics e Vehicle Sync e Office Sync The DCM 300 modem is available e With a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally e An EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in th
3. 2 20000 0 ccc cecceccceceeeeeeees 452 Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting ccccececcceeeees 453 Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting ceeecccccceeeccccccceeecccceees 454 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 19 20 Contents Planter Rate Control troubleshooting aa 455 Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting cece cecccccccccccececeeeeeeeeee 457 Sprayer Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting 220 222eeeeeeee 457 Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting 0 0 0 cece a 459 FieldLevel Il diagnostics valve test cc ccc ccc cece cece cece cc ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 460 GPS CAS foo he tare et ete ed a ec gee eee da ala E eae 460 GreenSeeker diagnostics 2 460 Incorrect data e cece cece ence cceccceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 461 Error conditions aaa 461 Row Guidance diagnostics aaa 461 Vehicle Sync diagnostics elle cece cece ccc cc cece cece cceeceeececeeeeeetteteteteetees 463 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 1 2 0 0 0 00 a 464 Status tab 2 2 2 cecesieee och ices ose elon bebe feel eee ee est 464 Yield Monitor error messages 2 22 2 aaa 465 Yield Monitor troubleshooting 2 22 2 aaa 467 Yield Monitoring warning messages 2 2 2 2 2 aaa 468 20 C fo 1 a Pa a ON oe era Ye Nt a OE 473
4. e Boom valves Used for 3 wire boom valves and 2 wire solenoid valves that require a 12v signal to open e LiquiBlock valves such as Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Used for Liquiblock valves that require inverted switching e Various section control devices 192 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Control setup 1 At the Field IQ Setup screen on the Section Control tab for a b Section Control Select On Section Control Module Location Tap Setup The Section Control Module Setup screen displays 2 Complete the settings for e Number of Modules The total number of modules that will be used on the current control location e Module Assign the serial numbers of the modules to their location on the current control location Note Sections start from left to right in their numbering This means that Section 1 is on the far left and numbers increase to the right e Number of Sections The number of sections physically wired into the selected module serial number If you have a row crop tap Section Grouping Otherwise tap Section Widths 4 Set up the section widths Note Both of these setups allow you to set the section widths Section Grouping does it by grouping rows together in a section and Sections Widths allows you to enter an actual measurement a For section grouping at the Section Grouping screen Complete each row from the left and to
5. 2 Go to the SerialComms tab This diagnostics screen shows each of the connectors ports on the display harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received 3 To view the raw data from a port tap View 4 To capture data tap Capture Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data 5 To close the screen tap OK Note Text shown in green is incoming data Text shown in red is outgoing data Autopilot diagnostics 1 Atthe Configuration screen select wl Autopilot 2 Tap Diagnostics The Vehicle Controller Setup Guidance screen displays From this screen you can access information on e Guidance e Steering e Details e Fault log e Warnings Controls The following buttons are available on every tab e Engage You can tap to engages or disengage the system The button also shows the current engage state When this button is red tap it to see the fault that is preventing the automatic mode e View Fault Log Tap to view faults e View Warning Tap to view warnings 434 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Autopilot diagnostics Guidance tab Section Explanation Offline distance graph A graph of offline distance over time Useful for diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and staying online GPS status Heading error Cur
6. 5 Boot Slope information The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD 600 6 Settings tab 7 Edit Line tab 8 Info tab 9 Distance The distance of the fixed point from the beginning of the line Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 417 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Item Explanation Clipping Distance The distance from the beginning of the line 10 Design information Elevation of the designed section at that location 11 Surface information Elevation of the surface at that location 12 Design Tool list Options Clip Start Clip End Fix Point 13 Add button Tap to add a fixed point to the design Clip button Tap to clip the designated portion of the section line 14 Delete All button Tap to delete all of the fixed points created 15 ok button Tap to save any changes to the design Info tab Item Explanation 1 Section The section you are currently designing 2 Rename button Tap to rename the section 3 Direction list The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the other way switch the option shown in the Direction list to the other option in the list 418 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water
7. FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 119 Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings Note This option works with straight AB and A lines For using remote output using distance based pulses see Distance based pulse operation page 375 c For When Within Area Feature enter the Lead Time Calibrate the Lead Time setting to match your implement See Calibrate implement lead time page 121 The pulse occurs only when Remote Output is enabled You must also enable Remote Output for each area feature individually in the Mapping setup See Field feature use page 322 d For WhenEngaged there are no options to set Remote output occurs when the system is engaged e For When Crossing a Line Feature enter Remote Output Connector Remote Output Type Lead Time How much lead time for the pulse to generate vs the implement to respond What connector is used for Remote Output Type of output When crossing a line Duration Within Distance Distance How accurately engaged on line before pulse generates How long does pulse last How much distance between pulses Design Trigger Color Manual Trigger Color What color are What color are automatic pulses on gt manual pulses on the screen the screen Setting Explanation Lead Time See Calibrate implement lead time page 121 Distance The distance in meters decimal feet
8. Not Ready to Engage red vehicle S N Automatic steering is not N A You cannot tap this button E A RS KB allowed due to howit has been Itis an indicator only set up Auto steering not allowed p red Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 317 Operation basics 18 Operations Coverage button for logging When you are applying material the coverage button displays on the Run screen The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying Indicator Button Explanation lt 0 Indicates coverage logging is off Tap to start logging Logging Off HA Indicates coverage logging is on Tap to stop logging Logging On See Coverage logging page 343 GNSS status CAUTION The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m 300 ft of any power line radar dish or cell phone tower Tap 5a to see status information on GNSS If the feature plugin you are using has a second GNSS receiver there will be a satellite icon for both receivers Tap the other to see status on the second GNSS receiver On screen lightbar for vehicle The on screen lightbar indicates where the vehicle is in relation to the guidance line e Green indicator lights in center 9900000000006 990000000000 e Red LEDs to the left or right The vehicle has moved off the guidance line 9090000000006 PANYO 0000000000000 On screen light
9. Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 117 Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup When remote output is activated the FM 1000 integrated display sends pulses to an external device For example you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter To set up Remote Output 1 Install Remote Output See Activate features plugins for use page 45 2 Set up Remote Output See Remote Output settings page 118 3 Calibrate the lead time See Calibrate implement lead time page 121 Remote Output settings To enable pulse remote output 1 Atthe Configuration screen select ay Remote Output and then tap Setup 2 The Remote Output screen displays Complete the settings and tap OK 3 For Remote Output Connector Select Connector B 4 For Remote Output Type choose the type a For Time Based Pulse enter Setting Explanation Time The pulse interval in seconds Duration The pulse duration in milliseconds b For Distance Based Pulse enter 118 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings Remote Output Connector Remote Output setup Remote Output Type Lead Time What connector is used for Remote 1 3 Output How much lead time for the pulse to tu generate vs the implement to respond Type of output Distance based Distance How much distance
10. 5 Determine which leveling model you want to use 396 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality e Point and Slope mode page 397 e Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes page 398 e Define a plane page 399 e Contour mode page 402 Leveling models You have different leveling options depending on the leveling mode that you selected e Point and Slope mode e Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS mode e Contour mode Point and Slope mode Slope is the percentage of vertical drop compared to horizontal travel A positive slope goes upward and a negative slope goes downward For example if the slope is set to 1 the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled When you drive in Point and Slope mode the Leveling panel displays the following controls Button Explanation Coarse Fine Coarse The blade will move by large increments Fine The blade will move by small increments Edit Tap to view or change the Slope Adjust increment This setting controls the amount the gradient changes each time you increase or decrease the design slope For example if the leveling gradient is set to 3 and the slope adjust is set to 2 when you decrease the design slope amount the leveling gradient decreases to 5 Tap to increase the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment per Tap to decrease the design slope b
11. At the Home screen tap as At the Configuration screen select EO Huai Terminal and tap Setup At the Virtual Terminal Dialog screen select the port the CAN bus is plugged into Tap ok to return to the Configuration screen Tap OK to return to the Home screen For operational information see Virtual Terminal operation page 374 Task Controller setup Make sure you have 222 Connected the CAN bus to the display Unlocked the ISOBUS Task Controller functionality Activated Task Controller On the Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays a vw At the Configuration screen select owe Task Controller and then tap Setup At the Task Control Setup screen in the Rates tab enter the settings FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 11 ISOBUS setup GPS output settings Setting Explanation Target Rate 1 The first target rate for the volume supplied by the implement Target Rate 2 The second target rate for the volume supplied by the implement Rate Increment When you increment decrement Rate 1 or Rate2 on the Run screen the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount Minimum Rate Minimum rate to be applied Maximum Rate Maximum rate to be applied 4 In the Boom tab enter the Valve On Latency and Valve Off Latency These values are the measured times that it takes the implement to start coverage after the command is given 5 Tap OK to
12. Basic system settings Status Item 3 Basic settings P Blade Height P Boot Depth P CMR Percent P Correction Age P Correction Type P Cut Fill P Design Height P Design Slope P Distance Traveled P East P GPS Status P H Error Explanation receiver Current height of the primary blade Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the primary blade GPS receiver Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary FieldLevel GPS receiver Correction type used by the primary blade receiver Difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the sec
13. Check that there is nothing mechanically wrong with the meter Lift switch won t calibrate 1 2 454 Check that the switch is plugged in Check that switch works Use a volt meter to check continuity on the switch One way it will be open the other way it will be a closed circuit FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Switch is functional 1 Jump the Aand B terminals at the module harness to bypass cabling If this works check all cabling If previous test didn t work set up a new implement May be a bad module Check that the OEM harness is not supplying constant power to signal wire Planter Rate Control troubleshooting Unable to turn motor 1 2 3 4 Check valve type in Rate control set up Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow Check that motor will pass a drive calibration PWM only Perform a hydraulics test Rawson If the motor will run in the calibration screen check the operation of the system in the Field IQ diagnostics screen 1 2 3 Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on Arm allsections at the bottom of the screen If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position If motor ran in diagnostics screen 1 2 Check color of sections in the run screen If sections are red there is an issue a Check that system is not outside a boundary
14. Stop Recording Stop recording the path you are driving Set A Set the A point of an AB line Set B Set the B point of an AB line Skip Skip a swath page 342 G Open the Swaths Management screen Swaths Use At Set the point of an A line 324 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Swaths Management screen Guidance pattern use From the Mapping Guidance panel you can access the Swaths Management screen by tapping ba The tabs on this screen are Tab On this tab you can Swaths Choose the type of pattern you want to create See Straight guidance pattern page 327 Curved pattern page 329 Headland pattern page 330 Pivot pattern page 332 Shift rename or export an existing pattern Rename a swath page 339 Shift a swath page 340 Import or delete an existing pattern Import AB Lines or boundaries page 337 Delete a swath page 340 Add an access path Access paths page 336 Line Features Alist of line features you have created and can load Set when the path is recorded and whether you want the U turn at the end of a path to be recorded Delete all line segments created in your FreeForm pattern FreeForm Field feature use page 322 FreeForm pattern page 334 Features A list of features you have created in the field Field feature use page 322 The buttons on the bottom of the Swaths Manageme
15. b If system still will not pass perform the calibration with no tips 2 Sprayers with a pump arming relay Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 457 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Check that the pump arming relay is working by checking that the relay clicks on when the pump is armed there will be 12 V at terminal 85 on the relay For Servo 1 Operate the valve in the drive settings screen 2 Check that there is manual control of the valve in manual rate control If there is no control check cabling 3 Ifvalve will work in manual it may need to be calibrated to work in auto See calibration procedure If the system ran in Diagnostics 1 Check color of sections in the run screen If sections are red there is an issue a Check that system is not outside a boundary open a new field to test b Check that system is not over a previously applied area c Check that system has a fixed GPS position 2 Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen Unable to reach target rate If unable to reach target 1 Check that system control components are sized properly 2 Check that nozzles are sized properly for sprayer 3 Seeif the valve will open any further when set to manual rate if not may be a pump issue If system is sized properly for rate 1 Check minimum and maximum flow settings 2 Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number
16. the guidance line to engage on it Ready to Engage yellow The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance guidance line line The vehicle is not ready to N A You cannot tap this button engage on the line because the It is an indicator only guidance line is too far from the Not Ready to Engage red vehicle S N Automatic steering is not N A You cannot tap this button E A a ae KB allowed duetohowithasbeen Itis an indicator only set Up Auto steering not allowed red 362 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations EZ Pilot system operation You can also Adjust EZ Pilot guidance page 364 settings during operations in the field Disengage EZ Pilot system The EZ Pilot system can be disengaged automatically and manually Automatic disengagement The EZ Pilot system disengages automatically when e The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the Engage tab See Engage settings for EZ Pilot system page 168 e Thesystem is paused e GPS positions are lost e The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions such as no corrections Manual disengagement To manually disengage the system you can e Tap green on the screen e Press the Engage button on the optional remote control e Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor When you turn the steering wheel
17. 2 3 4 An underground structure Intersecting a specific depth or existing tile line At the Design tab tap Design to open the Design screen Go to the Edit Line tab From the far left hand list at the bottom of the screen choose FixPoint Indicate where you want the fixed point by a Touching on the screen b Moving the slider c Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box Tap Add The screen will show the design elevation for the fixed point Enter the elevation that represents the target or obstacle The system redesigns the section line to account for the new fixed point If the slope approaching the point is now too steep you have the option to enter more fixed points ahead of the original fixed point to make the transition better from one slope to the next Define boot depth You can define the boot depth by either of the steps below 422 Option 1 Enter the relative depth above and below the surveyed surface Option 2 Enter a specific elevation in the Outlet Elevation box The system calculates the other box FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Install tab On the Install tab you perform installation Item Explanation 1 Survey tab page 411 2 Design tab page 414 3 Install tab 4 Mode 5 Type of pipe The type of pipe to install Options are Main Sub Main Lateral 6 Height Offset controls mm Decre
18. Create an implement 139 Select an implement 139 Import an implement 140 Edit implement settings 140 Delete an implement _ 142 Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Before you can begin operations you must select an implement that has been created and set up in the system FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 137 Implement setup 7 Implement setup Implement setup Settings for an implement vary depending on the implement type and the operation it will be performing Implement setup ensures the system can tell e Which type of implement is attached e How much area it covers e How far offset the implement is from the guidance line or pattern Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Close 138 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 7 Implement setup Create an implement Create an ee Configuration an pads Selection Vehicle j gt Switch Switch Implement C Configuration Implement A Configuration OK Configura nang Selection Sequence At the Home screen tap W At the Configuration Selection screen tap Switch next to the implement If necessary enter the administrative password See Pas
19. Farm Field Event Operator Material Date Open Time Open Date Close Time Close Duration Primary AB ABLine Cover Area Cover Distance Cover Time Engage Time Point features Attribute ID and latitude PointFeature shp longitude and height PointFeature dbf PointFeature shx Line features Line with attribute ID LineFeature shp LineFeature dbf LineFeature shx Area features Area polygons with attribute ID 578 AreaFeature shp AreaFeature dbf AreaFeature shx Event History file The EventHistory dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 85 Data storage structure 4 Data management Data Explanation ABLine Guidance line used Client Client name Cover area Area covered Cover distance Distance covered Cover time Total time to cover the covered area Date close Date the field was closed Date open Date the field was opened Duration Length of time that the field was open seconds Engage time Time engaged Event Event name Farm Farm name Field Field name Material Material name Operator Operator name PrimaryAB Number of the primary AB Line Time close Time the field was closed Time open Time the field was opened Version FM 1000 integrated display firmware version Data in features file One row of data is stored in the lt type gt dbf file for each
20. Height Altitude of GPS receiver GPS Quality Quality of GPS signal Cut Fill Cut or fill for water management operations Variety Different varieties being applied Applied Rate Rate at which material is being applied Speed Speed of the vehicle Average Cross Track Error XTE Position of the vehicle in relation to the guidance line Log coverage for varieties By default coverage is displayed on the screen as a pale yellow However if you are applying varieties you can set up the system to make different varieties visible on the screen By logging varieties you can e Change product in a field so that you can later identify which parts of the field are covered in which product e Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your field For example track the planting of e Corn seed in the left side hoppers e Clover seed in the right side hoppers 344 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Coverage logging Varieties are assigned to rows on your implement Specify the number of rows on your implement when you configure it For more information see Edit implement settings page 140 Set up variety logging To log varieties 1 At the Home screen tap H The Field Selection screen displays 2 Tap Hybrid Setup The Hybrid Setup screen displays Use this screen to complete the settings for hybrids Left hand list List of vari
21. Original Greenstar Display 60 Series Combines Moisture calibration Press BI Select D View page 1 Check moisture with a certified tester Calculate moisture correction certified tester reading minus the Greenstar reading DO UN Fw N PF Input the moisture difference Yield calibration 1 Press B 2 Tap D 3 View page 2 4 Verify that the combine s grain tank and the truck wagon are both empty and tap Start 304 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Third party display instructions Yield Calibration Start is Stopped al Weight h Ib nto 5 Harvest about 500 bushels and hit Stop Yield Calibration St is Running bad Weight Ib 516 6 Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck wagon 7 Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck wagon in wet pounds Yield Calibration Start is Stopped wal Weight b Ib aako Command Center 70 Series Combines Moisture calibration 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center Tap De a Press ge on the Command Center In the Calibrations list select Moisture Calibrations kadi 9 6 Follow the steps to perform the calibration 7 Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest Yield calibration Navigate to the Home screen on the Command Center Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guid
22. Real Time Kinetic corrections to the cellular modem The distance between the reference stations and the modem on the vehicle does not affect accuracy CORS works well in areas with spotty RTK radio tower coverage Curved line A guidance line you define on your field You begin recording and drive until you are at the end of the curved line or segment then stop recording Guidance lines are for use with automated steering Cut A point on the field where dirt needs to be removed A cut occurs when the existing field is higher than the proposed field surface Cut Fill ratio Difference between the blade height 1 and the target height 4 When cut dirt to be removed is displayed the current ground is above the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points down which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the target height When fill dirt to be replaced is displayed the current ground is below the target The height indicator arrow turns red and points up which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the target height D Data Dictionary A set of data that contains categories for entry data when you are setting up client farm field and event Design height The height of the land called for in a design Design slope The slope of the land called for in a design DGNSS Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 475 E 20 Glossary Differential GNSS positioning The GNSS
23. These settings are only used for intentional overlap Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 453 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics If sections are coming on too late or shutting off too late 1 2 3 Check that start and end overlaps are set to the desired intentional overlap Raise the on latency to allow the section to turn on earlier Raise the off latency to allow the system to start turning off earlier Typically these settings are no more than 5 seconds If they are higher double check implement measurements If sections are coming on too early or shutting off too early 1 2 3 4 Check that start and end overlaps are set to desired intentional overlap Lower the on latency if the system is turning on too soon Lower the off latency if the system is shutting off too soon If settings are set to O and system is still not accurate check implement measurements Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting Erratic sensor readings 1 2 3 Has sensor been calibrated Check that sensor is specified properly for the system Make sure the feedback voltage is in the right range Pressure sensors are O to 5 V Erratic flowmeter encoder readings a e W N p Check all cabling and connections Check that the encoder constant is correct Check that there isn t a rate control issue by setting the Rate to Manual to lock the valve Check that the meter is sized properly for the application
24. This License does not cover any patents over the Contents or the Database and c This License does not cover any trademarks associated with the Database 2 4 Relationship to Contents in the Database The individual items of the Contents contained in this Database may be covered by other rights including copyright patent data protection privacy or personality rights and this License does not cover any rights other than Database Rights or in contract in individual Contents contained in the Database For example if used on a Database of images the Contents this License would not apply to copyright over individual images which could have their own separate licenses or one single license covering all of the rights over the images 3 0 Rights granted 3 1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License the Licensor grants to You a worldwide royalty free non exclusive terminable but only under Section 9 license to Use the Database for the duration of any applicable copyright and Database Rights These rights explicitly include commercial use and do not exclude any field of endeavour To the extent possible in the relevant jurisdiction these rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether now known or created in the future The rights granted cover for example a Extraction and Re utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents b Creation of Derivative Databases c Creation of Collective Database
25. To exclude e More fields enter a smaller number e Fewer fields enter a larger number Auto Steering Lockout Disables engagement of an automated guidance system until you enable guidance in the Run screen e Yes System functions as normal Auto Guidance Enabled on off is still allowed e No System cannot engage The Engage button shows as red 52 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Language measurements keyboard layout AEK ea Setting Explanation Language Can be changed if you have chosen FM 1000 Only for the Language Selection If you change the language a message warns that the display will turn off so that the change can take effect Display Units Select the unit of measure for the display e Metric e Feet and Inches default e Decimal Feet Keyboard Layout The FM 1000 integrated display uses an on screen keyboard on the touchscreen Options for layout e ABCDEF Letters appear in alphabetical order e QWERTY Layout the same as a computer keyboard default Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 53 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Map settings CT A Configuration wW Setup Display Setup Main Track Logging Advanced At the Mapping screen you can complete settings on these tabs e Main e Track Logging Main tab Note For a new toolbar orientation to take effec
26. To figure the drag chain length you can either e Multiply the diameter of the drag shaft by 3 14 e Mark the belt and measure the distance the mark moved after 1 revolution of the drag shaft If these numbers are not correct you will have issues calibrating the spreader If any of these settings physically change in the implement they need to be adjusted in the FM 1000 integrated display to maintain accuracy The system calculates the calibration constant This value represents the liters of material dispensed from the spreader per revolution of the drag shaft assuming the gate height is 1 meter The actual gate height is factored in later The FM 1000 integrated display will automatically come up with this value Tap OK to return to the Granular Calibration screen Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the calibration and then tap Calibrate The Granular Calibration screen displays A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate Complete the settings Setting Explanation Amount of Material to be The amount to be dispensed during the calibration Dispensed Target Rate Target Calibration To begin calibration tap Start and follow the on screen instructions Select the Info tab to view the system s operational limits based on the RPM limits target rates and application width Tap OK Gate height calibration
27. advised of the possibility of such damages LWGL LICENSE ODC DATABASE CONTENTS LICENSE SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B Version 2 0 Sept 18 2008 Version 9 25 Revision A Copyright 2013 Silicon Graphics Inc All Rights Reserved Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http oss sgi com projects FreeB shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS INC BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF ORIN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of Silicon Graphics Inc shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
28. alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work ora Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications 4and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the follow
29. and Guidance pattern use page 323 At the Run screen 1 Tap as Without closing the field the Configuration screen displays Select lt TrueGuide and tap Calibrate The TrueGuide Calibration screen displays Tap Next and follow the on screen instructions Complete the test at least four times and tap OK UB O NO At the Calibration screen tap OK to return to the open field Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 241 TrueGuide calibration 13 TrueGuide setup 242 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER TrueTracker setup In this chapter The TrueTracker feature plugin works with the Autopilot system TrueTracker uses active TrueTracker nananana ii implement control enabling the vehicle as Setup process 245 well as the implement to guide to the line Implement calibration for TrueTracker IS IMPNENEZAGEUEEARAIPPOANE placement system llaa ooo eee cece eee eee eee eee 250 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 243 TrueTracker 14 TrueTracker setup TrueTracker The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot automated steering system When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system the implement receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy Implement steering actively steers the implement being towed by the vehicle This prevents the implement from pulling to one si
30. open a new field to test b Check that system is not over a previously applied area c Check that system has a fixed GPS position Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen Unable to reach target rate 1 2 3 Check that maximum meter RPM has not been set to low System defaults to 120 RPM Rawson Check that maximum motor RPM has been set to 300 RPM Check Gear ratio and encoder constant gear ratio needs to be figured from the encoder to the meter Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 455 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics 4 Check info tab in the drive calibration screen Make sure target rates and speeds are logical If they are not this usually represents improper Field IQ system set up If the settings check out okay 1 Check that the control valve has been calibrated If PWM check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters May need to be set to 100 2 Rawson Check that the motor will reach 300 RPM in the hydraulic test If it will and system still can t reach rate check that the gear ratio will allow system to reach target rate Formula on page If the rate fluctuates around the target 1 Check that a drive calibration has been performed 2 If population monitoring is on disable it to see target rate of the motors If system holds rate it is aseed monitoring issue Drive calibration is performed PWM 1 Check that motor s have suffici
31. page 375 Expand by Options are e 1 2 swath width e 1swath width Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 133 Line feature settings 6 Field feature mapping setup Line feature settings 1 7 At the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section The Select Feature screen displays At the top left hand list choose the Line feature Tap New The Edit Area Line Point Feature screen displays Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature The Enter Area Line Point Feature Name screen displays Enter the name of the line and tap OK You are returned to the Edit Area Line Point Feature screen Complete the settings for the line Setting Explanation Color Select the feature appearance color Trigger Warning Enabled Warning is enabled Disabled No warning will be issued Remote Output Set to Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area See Remote Output setup page 118 and Remote Output operation page 375 Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen displays again showing the button of the feature you just created Boundary feature settings The FM 1000 integrated display includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiple bounded areas within a field Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used
32. secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions S HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the 72 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Status Item S Heading S Latitude S Longitude S Network ID S North S Offset S Offset X S Offset Y S Satellites S Section Line Number S Speed S Target Height S Up S VDOP S Vertical Error Estimate Satellites Version 9 25 Revision A Explanation sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better Current heading of the secondary blade in degrees from direct north Secondary blade s current latitude Secondary blade s current longitude RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver s corrections Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Line number of the secondary blade
33. 415 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Item Explanation 7 Edit Line tab 8 Info tab 9 Minimum Depth The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth which is shown on the profile as a red line Note For ditching applications this depth is set close to the surface 10 Optimal Depth The depth to install the tile or ditch The design will keep this to the depth when it can It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed Note For ditching applications this depth is set close to the surface 11 Maximum Depth The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth which is shown on the profile as a blue line 12 Outlet to Optimal The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet Depth to the Optimal Depth The tile plow will level out over a long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run 13 Minimum Slope The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope 14 Outlet Depth The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet This depth can either be entered or measured To measure the depth 1 Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at
34. 473 PRs Fess sec Na NA E AR AG ened E E toe ace ARLAN 473 Baa a ee eee ple et ee et cee SAGA BNG a 474 Ca NI OBET rn pe re Me ee ee a 474 AA 475 Bi nsa cre ae AA a ce ee Aasa CG ka A erie RA NOE iran Jae 476 Fa NG ANGAS ELA A BO nA PO BA BA Cec een PA eee as 476 GN PA ANG AG EE PA GA HA AA sen oe 476 BABAE BUAN AA O eae ee teen EE cee aba BA tn ec An ana 477 Il secrecy doe PEE AIEE ccf tas RE UBO LG bana EO Ng SHA TALA Nan MINANA GOAT B NB BO ka PG PEN saad 477 pi HABA See Laraga HERA EAT APANG GRADE NG SMa KGG ONG ELA NAMATAAN AO LGE NG NAG ING 478 MAPA 478 AA 478 O BA NG ae ss ei ap eos ss etre es A te se ese 479 Peca e NAA ABO R ees iter DANE any eetaties at eiccene elite eaten nagapi ocak 479 Rana saa a a a MILAN AGA EE BA LAng hang sci Leeann teat AD IA Leen s NADERA ALAN 480 s AIEE RTL ee ULGAGALAT DUDA NG AELIAN TAG DOS AeA EE ee RET ORIEL 480 Pama ie cee ANA TAOB Gc te Da AA BA EIT allan BEE Seiden eet PPO tang se 481 Ma NA Na a NO a es 481 Wa a LA ee BAN Se BA 482 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Introduction In this chapter This user guide includes information on setting up and using the FM 1000 About the FM 1000 integrated display 22 integrated display For installation Changes to this document 24 information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 21 About the FM 100
35. A 18 Operations Fields Vehicle selection 1 Atthe Home screen tap a The Configuration Selection screen displays 2 To change the vehicle currently selected tap Switch to select to a different vehicle Event summary adjustment When a field is closed the system saves an HTML summary for the event To reduce the time it takes to close a field you can prevent the system from saving a summary 1 Atthe Configuration screen select System and then tap Setup 2 At the Display Setup screen select Map Settings and then tap Setup 3 At the Mapping screen select off from the Save Summaries list Close a field KJ After you finish using a field tap amp to close it The system displays a message asking what you want to do next These options are Tap To Cancel Return to the currently open field Close Close the current field and return to the Home screen Open Another Close the current field and open a new field Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 321 Field feature use 18 Operations Field feature use You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the field points of interest or areas to avoid There are three types of field feature e Point A single point in the field such as a tree e Line A straight or curved line in a field such as a fence e Area An area of land such as a pond Field feature buttons display on the Guidance Mapping panel at
36. Autopilot systems that use the electrical system to measure vehicle status e None e Wheel Speed Only e Gear Level Only e Wheel and Gear This list is only available when AutoSense is set to Off Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 149 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Advanced settings for Autopilot system Advanced settings are located in the Advanced tab For more information regarding the Advanced tab settings contact your local reseller Vehicle Controller Setup Vehicle Engage Steering Advanced Autopilot calibration After you configure the vehicle make and model calibrate the system for your vehicle The calibration process records additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the vehicle more accurately For high accuracy systems all settings must be correct All vehicle types Four calibration items are required for all types of vehicles e Controller orientation page 151 Correctly associates the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle e Manual Override Sensitivity calibration page 152 Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is acceptable e Roll antenna compensation calibration page 158 Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the Autop
37. Bench buttons have the same effect A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark To stop the averaging during the countdown tap Bench again Note If you are within the circle around an existing benchmark a new mark is not created Survey the field After you create the benchmark s collect field layout data by conducting a survey Define the boundary Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field Drive around the boundary while you record the shape 1 2 At the Run screen tap PHP to open the Survey Design panel Before driving the boundary select the reference point you want to use for recording the boundary e Center Records the boundary based on the location of the antenna e Left Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the left of the direction of travel e Right Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the right of the direction of travel Select Boundary from the list Tap Record Drive the boundary while recording The boundary records with a line showing it begins and ends at the starting point The boundary is a complete loop After you have driven to the end of the boundary tap Record again Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 393 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Define interior points To complete a full survey create guidance lines and then drive over all of the
38. CHAPTER Serial Rate Control setup In this chapter By using a serial connection serial rate control enables you to use the FM 1000 integrated display with non Trimble variable Variable rate controller setup 229 rate controllers A simple variable rate serial cable provides a link between your display Supported variable rate controllers 228 PIGEON AMONO K sosi sisca and variable rate application controller Bogballe Calibrator 230 Flex Air setup 2222222222222222 230 Hardi 5500 and 6500 _ 220 222 231 LH5000 2 2 eee 232 RAW OPN ts ee ha es a de 232 Rawson and New Leader 234 Vaderstad Control Station 235 Additional controller setup 235 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 227 Supported variable rate controllers 12 Serial Rate Control setup Supported variable rate controllers The FM 1000 integrated display can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time Variable rate controller Supported Models Amazone Amatron page 229 Amatron Bogballe Calibrator page 230 Calibrator Zurf Hardi 5500 and 6500 page 231 5500 6500 LH Agro See LH5000 page 232 LH5000 New Leader See Rawson and New Leader page Mark IIl and Mark IV 234 Raven page 232 SCS 440 440DB 450 450DB 460 660 661 700 710 750 760 R
39. CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THESE TERMS OF USE IF THIS EXCLUSION IS HELD UNENFORCEABLE THEN ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD OF FIFTEEN 15 DAYS AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE AND NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD LIMITATION ON LIABILITY NEITHER MAPQUEST NORITS AFFILIATES NOR ANY OF THEIR SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING OUT OF THE POSSESSION OF ACCESS TO USE OF OR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR USE THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR MAPQUEST CONTENT OR ANY PORTION INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS DATA LOSS COST OF PROCUREMENT FOR SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION EVEN IF MAPQUEST HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM OR LIABILITY IS BASED UPON ANY CONTRACT TORT BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY IN NO EVENT SHALL MAPQUEST S TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER THESE TERMS OF USE EXCEED THE LESSER OF A THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF FEES PAID BY YOU TO MAPQUEST UNDER THESE TERMS OF USEFOR THE TWELVE 12 MONTHS PRECEDING THE DATE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM OR B FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS 500 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE PARTICIPATION IN AND USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND MAPQUEST CONTENT IS DONE AT YOUR OWN RISK AND THAT YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR ANY
40. DAMAGE SUSTAINED TO YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM NETWORK OR DATA RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTICIPATION OR USE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INDEMNITY You agree to indemnify defend and hold MapQuest and its affiliates and each of their officers directors employees agents co branders or other partners as well as each of their suppliers successors and permitted assigns Indemnified Parties harmless from and against any third party claim or action including any liability cost losses damages expenses and attorney s fees arising from or in any way related to Your access use or participation in the MapQuest Services including claims related to Your Content and any use of the MapQuest Services with software data content systems or other technology not provided by MapQuest any violation of these Terms of Use or any alleged infringement of a patent copyright trademark trade secret or other intellectual property right MapQuest shall use good faith efforts Version 9 25 Revision A to provide you with prompt notice of any such claim or action provided however you agree that upon MapQuest s written request MapQuest shall control the defense or settlement of any such claim or action and you shall provide reasonable cooperation to MapQuest You may not settle an indemnifiable claim without obtain MapQuest s prior
41. EZ Steer system contains sensors that use T2 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump For roll compensation to work correctly the controller must be calibrated 1 Select v and then tap Calibrate The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen displays 2 Select Controller Orientation and tap OK The next step in calibration displays 176 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A ee Vehicle guidance setup EZ Steer assisted steering system From the Orientation list select the orientation of the steering control module and then tap Next The next step in calibration displays Park the vehicle mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the first direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read Turn the vehicle around ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in the previous step and then tap Next The next step in calibration displays The display records the roll offset in the second direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read The T2 calibration results will be listed in the Roll Offset section The Roll Offset value should be between 0 and 4 Tap OK The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen displays Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Dis
42. Explanation Tap to The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line the guidance line to engage on it Ready to Engage yellow The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance guidance line line The vehicle is not ready to N A You cannot tap this button engage on the line because the It is an indicator only guidance line is too far from the Not Ready to Engage red vehicle SIY Automatic steering is not N A You cannot tap this button KO allowed due to how it has been It is an indicator only set up Auto steering not allowed p red You can also Adjust Autopilot guidance page 359 settings during operations in the field Adjust Autopilot guidance At the Run screen tap ul The Autopilot panel displays Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 359 Autopilot system operation 18 Operations Setting Explanation Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either e GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system e GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field Use the lt and gt buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction left or right To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for Autopilot system page 149 Trim Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil con
43. Feekes growth stage 4 6 e Corn V8 V12 For updated specific algorithm instructions see www GreenSeeker com Plant coverage should be at least 50 for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing or sidedressing To collect sensor readings pass the boom mounted sensor or handheld sensor over the crop at 32 48 above the canopy Sense a large area of the NRS and nonreference portion of the field to accurately determine their respective NDVI values Apply an applicators width swath of N The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy crop N needs in a good year Enter the values into GreenSeeker on the FM 1000 integrated display e Automatically with the boom mounted sensors e Manually with the GreenSeeker handheld If the response is variable across the field select an area where the difference between the reference and the non reference areas are most apparent This assures that the algorithm will determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to N for that year To estimate yield potential most algorithms utilize an environmental factor Growing Degree Days or Days From Planting which takes into account the weather and length of time that has passed since planting Different GDD variations are used for different crops You must know the planting date and sensing date to obtain the GDD value Regional values for GDD can be found on the internet Visit http www nte
44. GPS position drift when you return to the field for guidance for example after you pause or turn off the system e GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field The vehicle can steer offline requiring Trim as a result of e Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement e Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions End of Row Warning Distance before the end of row warning occurs Note Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier warning and a greater distance Autosense Onor Off Valve on Speed For vehicles operating at speeds that are e Normal Select Normal 0 4 m s 1 3 ft s Additional settings are supported only with NavController firmware versions 5 10 and later e Slow Select Low 5 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s Or Ultra low gt 0 02 m s 0 07 ft s Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 249 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system The auto steering system must be calibrated for the implement you are using 1 Atthe Configuration screen select dig TrueTracker and then tap Calibrate The mplement Controller Calibration screen displays with a list of items to calibrate 2 Select each item and tap OK 3 Complete the calibration Controller orientation setup 1 Atthe Implement Controller Calibration screen select Controller Orientation and tap OK The Autopilot Controller Or
45. GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings OmniSTAR HP XP G2 VBS OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite based subscription correction service delivered either by 108 Satellite Internet using a DCM 300 modem with lt 1 5 3 8 cm accuracy and GLONASS compatibility At the Configuration screen tap 5a GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose OmniSTAR HP XP G2 VBS FastRestart On or off FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence After the satellite signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown Note Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down Otherwise this feature will not work Convergence Threshold Disabled GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings 5 On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connecto
46. GreenSeeker system requires either of these to be activated for use Field IQ system e Serial Rate Control system Prior to using the GreenSeeker system 1 2 3 Collect or input reference strip data Calibrate the system with either e The boom mounted sensors on the RT200 e The GreenSeeker handheld sensor If you are using the RT200 interface module for variable rate control set up the application equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands Best practice To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system 368 Rinse the boom at the end of every day Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any corrosive materials Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine Do not use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine Even though all of the connectors and modules are fully sealed there is the potential for leakage caused by the pressurized stream Every time the spray tank is filled take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors Try to check sensors at least once a day during full time operation Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine If you do not have ground protection devices on the boom such as gauge wheels or skids take extra care to not run the boom into the ground Also be aware of sensor vulnerability to stationary structures in the field Sensors are usually mounted on the front of th
47. Line 9 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass 10 Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following graphic shows an example of a right offset Measure the distance between the flags 11 Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Use the following table to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run 12 Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Test Offset distance Offset direction Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 161 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Test Offset distance Offset direction Run Total Total 3 average offset value Tracked tractor calibrations If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model the Track Spacing option displays on the calibration list This option is not shown in the Vehicle Calibration screen Tra
48. Management functionality Item Explanation Options are e Outlet at Survey Start e Outlet at Survey End 4 Outlet information Elevation of outlet depth 5 Boot Slope information The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD 600 6 Settings tab 7 Edit Line tab 8 Info tab 9 Distance The selected location s distance from the start of the section line 10 OK button Tap to save any changes to the design Design a section line After you create survey lines use design screen to create designs for installing tile or cleaning ditches along those lines At the Run screen tap J C to open the WM Drain panel Go to the Design tab of the panel From the Section list select the section line that you want to design and tap Edit Design PWN p If required tap Select Closest This enables you to select the line that is closest to you If there is more than one line within 10 m of your current position the Select Closest Section Line screen displays The line that is calculated as being closest to you is highlighted The section line number and pipe type are shown Choose the line you want and tap OK The system displays the Design screen 5 At the Design screen from the Section list choose the section line you want to design Setting at Top of Explanation Screen Section Selection Auto The nearest section line is automatically selected Manual Manually select a section from the list Rename
49. NRS can easily be found later in the season You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A B line or flag on the screen The rate of nitrogen necessary to establish a NRS e Is crop and region dependent e Should be the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season 2 Usethe sensor mounted booms of the RT200 system with RT Commander or the GreenSeeker Hand Held sensor If past practice was a 100 pre plant application of nitrogen decrease pre plant nitrogen application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total nitrogen applied during non GreenSeeker management practice Crop Explanation Spring or winter If application rate has historically been 100 Ibs N acre decrease the wheat rate to 50 lbs nitrogen per acre Note Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area Corn If application rates have historically been 200 lbs nitrogen per acre decrease to 75 to 125 Ibs N acre Note Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non limiting reference area Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 217 Field setup 10 GreenSeeker setup For best results use the RT200 to read the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent upon the crop algorithm used For most supplied algorithms this is typically e Wheat
50. Note As part of calibrating the gate height you will enter the current height of the gate then change the gate height and enter that height Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 211 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field IQ system setup UU BU N 212 At the Field IQ Calibration screen tap the gate height you want to calibrate The Gate Height Calibration screen displays At the Enabled list select Yes and tap Next In the Actual Gate Height entry box enter the actual height of the gate Adjust the gate to a different height and tap Next In the Actual Gate Height entry box enter the actual height of the gate that you adjusted it to Tap Next The system returns you to the Field IQ Calibration screen FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Upgrade Field IQ system firmware Upgrade Field IQ system firmware You can use the display to upgrade the Field IQ system firmware components Master Switch Box 12 Section Switch Box Rate and Section Control Module Seed Monitoring Module Section Control Module Rate Control Module Rawson Control Module Upgrade steps To upgrade a component s firmware 1 2 3 4 5 D 10 Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your office computer Connect a USB drive to your office computer Copy the firmware upgrade file to the Firmware folder on the USB drive Insert the USB drive in
51. See Pivot pattern page 332 e Headlands See Headland pattern page 330 e Free form patterns See FreeForm pattern page 334 Access paths With some guidance patterns you can add an access path that provides a space such as for a road See Access paths page 336 Existing patterns After you have created a guidance pattern you can choose it from the list and e Load it for use See Load a pattern page 338 e Shift it See Shift a swath page 340 e Rename it See Rename a swath page 339 e Delete it See Delete a swath page 340 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 323 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations Guidance mapping controls B When you tap pig the Run screen the Mapping Guidance panel displays with controls for features and guidance The following controls may display in the Mapping Guidance panel depending on the function you are performing Button Tap to Done Finish an A or an AB line Feature buttons Create features in the field such as boundary rock fence and so on See Field feature use page 322 Load the next master line in the Swaths library with each tap Note The active master line name will be displayed on the Run screen Project a straight line in front of the on screen vehicle Pause recording a path Oren Resume Stop pausing and resume recording the path O Record Record the path you are driving O
52. Seed Spacing Blade Height o Boot Depth CH1 CH4 Product Level Client Name CMR Percent Control Speed Correction Age Correction Type Coverage Percent Current Flow Cut Fill Design Height Explanation Current height of the vehicle Current application rate Area that can still be applied before the tank is empty Current status of the auxiliary valve Amount of free space on the display s internal memory Average rate across all rows Average distance between seeds based on the average sample size Current height of the blade Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model Current level of the products that are in channels 1 4 Name of the current client Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds Speed reported to the multi application controller Length of time since the last correction was received Correction type that is being used Percentage of the field area that is covered area Current flow of material Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill iis shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up ar
53. Speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green Height of the secondary blade receiver relative to the field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Number of satellites the system is currently receiving FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 73 Basic system settings Status Item 3 Basic settings Secondary Pressure Section Line Number Seed Mults Seed Population Seed Singulation Seed Skips Seed Spacing Session Coverage Area Session Coverage Dist Session Coverage Time Session Time Short term XTE Explanation Current pressure as reported by the secondary pressure sensor Number of the current section line Percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every intended drop Amount of seed planted per acre hectare Percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop Percentage of seed that has not been planted Percentage of seed that has been a
54. Sprayers and Spreaders Module flow calibration 1 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration and tap OK 2 Atthe Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen enter values for e Flow Meter type e Flow Meter Calibration e Minimum Flow 3 Tap Run Calibration and follow the on screen instructions 202 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field lQ Planter calibration The calibration process for a planter includes e Implement lift switch calibration page 203 e Rawson modules calibration page 203 e Hydraulic test page 204 e PWM valves calibration page 205 Implement lift switch calibration A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Make sure that the implement is safe to operate 1 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select Implement Lift 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field Q Calibration screen Rawson modules calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require Note You must have at least one Field IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate before the Field IQ Calibrate button will display on the Configuration screen 1 At the Configuration screen select Field IQ and tap Calib
55. Status Status of the system s connection to the IMD 600 Version Firmware version of the IMD 600 Serial Number Serial number of the IMD 600 Status Status of the system s connection to the SAM 200 Version Firmware version of the SAM 200 Serial Number Serial number of the SAM 600 Temperature Temperature of the SAM 600 Voltage 3 To view faults tap View Fault Log 4 To adjust the steering performance of the system tap Steering Performance See EZ Pilot system calibration page 169 EZ Steer diagnostics 1 Atthe Home screen tap x 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap G EZ Steer and then tap Diagnostics The EZ Steer Diagnostics screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information 3 To view faults tap View Fault Log 4 To adjust the steering performance of the system tap Steering Perf See EZ Steer system calibration page 174 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 437 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics 1 Atthe Home screen tap Az 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap Field IQ and then tap Diagnostics The Field IQ Diagnostics screen displays Operations tab On this tab you can e Test optional switch box page 354 if you are using an optional section switch box e Enter values manually page 354 e Enable sections page 353 Status Item Explanation Control Mode Auto or Manual Rate Switch Mode Manual Rate 1 or Rate 2
56. Tap OK The Display Setup screen displays on ow Tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 135 Point feature settings 6 Field feature mapping setup Point feature settings 1 136 At the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section The Select Feature screen displays At the top left hand list choose the Point feature Tap New The Edit Area Line Point Feature screen displays Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature The Enter Area Line Point Feature Name screen displays Enter the name of the line and tap OK You are returned to the Edit Area Line Point Feature screen Complete the settings for the point Setting Explanation Alarm Radius e Displays as a solid red block when the vehicle comes within this radius of the feature e More serious than the warning radius Set it to a shorter distance Warning Radius e Distance around the feature that causes a warning message to appear e Displays on the screen as an orange line Average Position Improves the quality of the point feature position e Yes The display calculates the average position of the feature over 30 seconds e No The display places the feature at the coordinates that the vehicle is at when you tap the button FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Implement setup In this chapter Implement setup 2 2 22222 22 138
57. Tap the SET button to switch the controller between GPS and non GPS 3 Set up communication between the FM 1000 integrated display and the controller a Connect the display to the controller with Rawson cable P N 69730 and cable P N 67091 b Set the controller baud rate to 9600 Using the controller When in GPS mode the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the display allow the drive to be on Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position If you need to quickly turn off the hydraulic drive use the switch on the controller Non GPS mode The FM 1000 integrated display sends commands to the controller If communication cannot be established it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode A message displays and gives 234 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 12 Serial Rate Control setup Vaderstad Control Station you the option to continue in Non GPS mode If the controller is set to Non GPS mode the display still shows and records as applied rates If a prescription is loaded target rates appear for reference but these are not used by the controller In this mode you must vary rates manually on the controller Loss of communication In GPS mode if communication with a Rawson controller is lost the display does not report an error until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate In Non GPS mode the display has no wa
58. The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation See Implement setup page 138 Setup steps To complete the setup for Yield Monitoring 1 Choose the combine and complete its settings See Combine settings page 294 2 Complete the Operation settings page 295 3 4 5 6 Enter the Crop settings page 296 for your crop Complete settings for the map legend See Map settings page 297 Complete the Sensor output settings page 297 Complete the Options settings page 297 Combine settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Setup tab enter information about the harvester you are using 294 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Operation settings Setting Explanation Combine Make of harvester Series Series of combine Yield Monitor Type Type of Yield Monitoring e Trimble YM Yield Monitoring e Claas e John Deere e Serial Data Input Port Connection The port on the back of the FM 1000 integrated display that the yield monitor is connected to Moisture Sensor Moisture sensor you are using e Trimble e CaselH e New Holland e AGCO e Ag Leader Advanced Setup Operation settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Operation tab enter information about the combine you are using Note The selections available on the Operation tab may vary depending on the yield monitoring type that you se
59. Variety tracking page 429 Map and compare the performance of different seed varieties throughout your field e Moisture tracking Determine if grain needs to be stored or dried based on the in field moisture content e Load tracking page 430 Record the amount of grain harvested and loaded onto your trucks e Auto cut width adjustment Adjust the cut width automatically when traveling over odd shaped fields point rows or other previously harvested areas to improve the accuracy of yield calculations 290 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices Yield Monitoring best practices There are key practices required to use the Yield Monitoring system to best advantage Read this before you start the installation and setup procedures Installation The Yield Monitoring System relies on an appropriate installation of the optical sensors To ensure the best results e Install the optical sensors in the location described in the Installation Guide e Ifthe desired location is not achievable install the optical sensors as high as possible but no more than 6 inches 15 cm below the top spindle of the elevator e Installing the sensors lower than 36 inches 90 cm above the bottom spindle will give unacceptable results e Interference Ensure that there is no opportunity for interference between the optical sensors or the retaining brackets and any moving
60. Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Main screens Main screens The FM 1000 integrated display has the following main screens e Home screen page 28 The first screen that displays when you open e Run screen page 34 For performing operations e Configuration Selection screen page 29 For switching and editing selections for system vehicle and implement e Configuration screen page 33 and subsequent setup screens For setting up the system and features e Field Selection screen page 32 For choosing which field to work in Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 27 Main screens 2 Display basics Home screen The Home screen lists the following information about the configuration e The display build date firmware and hardware version e All optional features plugins loaded on the application e The automatic steering system if applicable e The GPS receiver version correction source and subscription information e The selected vehicle make and model The Home screen has three tabs e Support tab containing the buttons e Data Files Tap to display the Data Files screen where you can transfer files between the display and a USB drive See Managing data page 78 e Upgrade Tap to display the Firmware Upgrade screen where you can upgrade firmware See Upgrade FM 1000 integrated display firmware page 44 e Unlocks Tap to display the Advanced Functionality Access screen and unlo
61. a plugin using e Atext file e The display Unlock a plugin using a text file Note This method of unlocking a plugin is faster than the manual method 1 Insert the USB drive from the FM 1000 integrated display into a computer 2 Rename the text file 3 Delete the label of the name following the password number For example Password 4850576341 FMX 2DGPSto2GLONASS TXT becomes Password 4850576341 TXT 4 Copy the password text file from the computer into the AgGPS Firmware folder on the USB drive Insert the USB drive in the display and turn on the display The feature plugin is automatically unlocked Unlock feature plugin manually Home Support System Information Camera HA Unlocks 1 Turn on the display 2 At the Home screen on the Support tab tap Unlocks The Advanced Functionality Access screen displays 3 Select the feature plugin and then tap Unlock The on screen keyboard displays 4 Enter the password that your local reseller provided and then tap OK If you entered a Acorrect password an Enabled message displays The plugin is now unlocked b An invalid password an error message displays Enter the password again If it still does not work contact your local reseller Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 43 Unlocks and upgrades 3 Basic settings Upgrade FM 1000 integrated display firmware Transfer the new firmware file from www trimble com to your compute
62. and configuration specific diagnostics Up to nine diagnostics can be shown Accelerometers Raw voltage and scaled G force for each of the system s accelerometers Vehicle voltage Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle s electrical system Vehicle voltage Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle s electrical system Autopilot Faults screen The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopilot controller To access this screen tap View Fault Log Item Explanation Active Faults that are currently active History Faults that have previously occurred Cancel Tap to close the screen Refresh Fault Lists Tap to see the latest faults Clear History Tap to clear historical faults Close amp Clear Faults Tap to clear all faults and close the screen Warning screen When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens the View Warning button flashes red if there is an active warning To view any active warnings tap the button EZ Pilot diagnostics The EZ Pilot Diagnostics screen contains the statistics for the IMD 600 and SAM 200 and inertial information 436 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics EZ Steer diagnostics 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap S and then tap Diagnostics The EZ Pilot Diagnostics screen displays IMD 600 status Explanation
63. assigned to sections you exit the Field IQ Setup Press Continue to exit the The total of the numbers in the Field IQ Setup or press Edit fields in the Sections tab exceeds to edit the row the number of rows configured assignments in the Implement Setup The number of nozzles This message could appear when must not be less than the you exit the Field IQ Setup total number of sections The total number of sections in the Hardware tab exceeds the Total Nozzles setting in the Rate tab There must be at least as many nozzles as sections Some devices have not This message shows when you been identified by serial exit the Field IQ Setup if one or number more of the serial number selection fields in the Hardware tab has no serial number selected None of the expected Field The rate and or section IQ system devices were controllers that are identified in found on the implement the current Field IQ system Do you want to switch to configuration were not detected another implement on the CAN bus configuration None of the configured The rate and or section Field IQ devices are controllers that are identified in connected the current Field IQ Do you want to remove all configuration were not detected of the missing devices from on the CAN bus the Field IQ hardware configuration 448 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays Fence nozzle is enabled The con
64. baud rate that required e Theapplied rate does not display on the Run screen e Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected Amazone Amatron 1 Connect the FM 1000 integrated display to the Amazone Amatron a Connect the special adapter cable P N 59043 to the display cable P N 67091 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 229 Bogballe Calibrator 12 Serial Rate Control setup 2 Set up the controller a Press Shift Page Setup Page 2 b Set RS232 to 57600 baud Bogballe Calibrator To use the Bogballe Calibrator you need a special adapter cable P N 59043 to connect to the cable P N 67091 Cable P N 6709 will be connected to Port Aor B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable Note The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from making a connection In this case remove the standoff nuts Controller setup To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FM 1000 integrated display tap 1 Return Return Fertil Distrib 2 3 4 Select Type 5 Bogballe E EX 6 Accept Flex Air setup The FM 1000 integrated display can send rates to the Tyler Flex Air variable rate controller The controller can have four channels e Main e Liquid e Co applicator e Supplemental Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging dbf file but th
65. button Tap to rename the section name Direction The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 419 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Setting at Top of Screen Explanation runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the other way switch the option shown in the Direction list to the other option in the list Options are e Outlet at Survey Start e Outlet at Survey End Note The section lines are labeled automatically by the system beginning at S1 in the sequence they were surveyed 6 Edit the design to your requirements On the Settingstab set Settings Tab Explanation Min Depth Optimal Depth The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth which is shown on the profile as a red line Note For ditching applications this depth is set close to the surface The depth to install the tile or ditch The design will keep this to the depth where it can It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed Note For ditching applications this depth is set close to the surface Max Depth The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation T
66. display takes turns communicating information to the rest of the work group Displays talk one at a time instead of the original format Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 261 Setup steps 15 Vehicle Sync setup 262 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Water Management setup In this chapter Water Management functionality includes survey design leveling and WM Drain Water Management features 264 y B 8 functions FieldLevel II Survey Design _ 265 FieldLevel Il Leveling 268 Tandem dual scraper setup 275 WM Drain setup 2222 278 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 263 Water Management features 16 Water Management setup Water Management features Water Management includes e Survey Creating surveys of areas You use a high accuracy GPS receiver on the water management implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field The three dimensional data shows the surface topography of the land Note If you are working in a field that has already been leveled you may not need to perform a survey and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system or installing tile using WM Drain e Design After you complete the survey you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope that can be graded with minimal d
67. ensure user safety Failure to do so could result in injury or death 1 Atthe Home screen tap PB 2 At the Current Configurations screen configure the display vehicle implement settings and then tap OK 3 Atthe Field Selection screen select the required client farm field event settings and then tap OK For setup information see Field IQ system setup page 184 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 347 Field IQ operation 18 Operations Field IQ panel To open the Field IQ panel tap w The panel displays Within the panel you can navigate to many Views e Material detail view page 348 e Row detail view page 350 e Section control view page 351 Material detail view The main view shows a list of materials Up to six materials are listed The current target and actual rates are shown for each material Target 30 00 kS a 00 gal a o 8 3 5 Hi Pje i l Material details page 1 Tap the material to see the first details view of the material 348 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation 50999999 Page 1 Buttons Tap to Material On Turn the material on or off Sections Auto Turn automatic section control on or off Target Select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown or to select Manual to turn the Target rate off Tap mm to decrease the Target rate by 1 Tap to increase the Target r
68. feature of that feature type recorded in the field Data Explanation Format Notes Area Field area Area only ha Date Date the feature was created yyyy mm dd Dist1 Dist2 86 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data storage structure Data Explanation Format Notes ID Feature ID Length Length of the AB Line meters Name Feature name Perimeter Field perimeter distance Area only meters PrefWeight Swathsin Time Time the feature was recorded hh mmiss s Version Features attribute file version The following data is only recorded in point features Data Explanation Format Notes AlarmRad Alarm radius meters Height Ground mean sea level height at antenna meters position If you are mapping on a slope the height may be wrong Latitude Antenna latitude decimal degrees Longitude Antenna longitude decimal degrees Status_Txt GPS status meters WarningRad Warning radius meters Event subfolder An event is a precision agriculture application or activity on a particular field For example e Planting of seed e Application of fertilizer or lime e Spraying with fungicide herbicide or insecticide Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 87 Data storage structure 4 Data management Files stored in this folder are Data Explanation Files Coverage Graphical files containing polygons Coverage shp Cove
69. fixed axle for conventional tractors or the center of rotation for tracked tractors and the draw bar 3 Tap OK The Configuration screen displays System aggressiveness settings Aggressiveness affects the response of the implement to move to the guidance line When aggressiveness is e Increased The response to move the implement back to the guidance line is increased e Decreased The response to the implement moving offline is smoothed 1 Atthe Run screen tap lt to open the TrueGuide panel 2 Use or to increase or decrease the aggressiveness For Use the default setting Steep slopes 10 30 150 Slow speed operations 125 240 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 13 TrueGuide setup TrueGuide calibration For Use the default setting Normal operation 100 High speed applications gt 8 mph or 12 8 kilometers per hour 33 TrueGuide calibration A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared To calibrate the TrueGuide system you must have a field open in the Run screen with an AB line configured See Fields page 319
70. freedom for others Many databases are covered by copyright and therefore this document licenses these rights Some jurisdictions mainly in the European Union have specific rights that cover databases and so the ODbL addresses these rights too Finally Version 9 25 Revision A the ODbL is also an agreement in contract for users of this Database to act in certain ways in return for accessing this Database Databases can contain a wide variety of types of content images audiovisual material and sounds all in the same database for example and so the ODbL only governs the rights over the Database and not the contents of the Database individually Licensors should use the ODbL together with another license for the contents if the contents have a single set of rights that uniformly covers all of the contents If the contents have multiple sets of different rights Licensors should describe what rights govern what contents together in the individual record or in some other way that clarifies what rights apply Sometimes the contents of a database or the database itself can be covered by other rights not addressed here such as private contracts trade mark over the name or privacy rights data protection rights over information in the contents and so you are advised that you may have to consult other documents or clear other rights before doing activities not covered by this License The Licensor as defined below and You as define
71. increments and fine tune if the plow is not pitching enough to achieve the target depth Antenna Height The distance from the antenna to the bottom of the boot Antenna Selection Select the appropriate antenna from the list Survey Height Offset The distance from the tip of the boot to the ground when the plow is in the survey position height and pitch cylinders both in full up position Survey Point Density The distance between the collected survey mapping points Slope Sensor IMD 600 Select the serial number of the installed IMD 600 slope sensor that is used for pitch and roll corrections It is recommended that the IMD 600 be installed parallel to the bottom of the boot See FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide If the serial number is not in the list make sure the cabling is connected to port C or port D of the display Click Measurements to open the Tile Plow Measurements screen and select the appropriate settings Slope Transition Distance Distance required to transition the plow to a different slope Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 279 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup Setting Explanation increment If you are using the Pitch Control or Height and Pitch control type it is recommended to set this measurement to twice the length of the boot If you are on a particularly rough ground you can increase this distance to three or four times the boot length for smoother op
72. indicators become think red arrows See blade position indicators Blade level indicators page 404 Slope Adjust This percentage controls the amount the gradient changes each time you increase or decrease the slope on the Install tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 281 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup Setting Explanation when in Point and Slope mode For example if the leveling gradient is 3 and the Slope Adjust value is set to 2 the leveling gradient changes to 5 if you decrease the slope Relative heights settings Select the Relative Heights tab and complete the settings Setting Explanation Relative Heights Enabled Select to use the relative heights from the master benchmark Disabled Select to use GPS heights at all times Relative X If relative heights are enabled this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Relative Y If relative heights are enabled this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark Height Offset If relative heights are enabled this is theheight value that will be applied to the master benchmark Operation settings Select the Operation tab and enter the settings Setting Explanation Force Rebench Yes If the field has been closed and then reopened the system will not allow you to begin work until you have re benched Use this setting if you are using a different base station s
73. it is offset Make sure you are measuring the offsets from the antenna to the ground interaction point of the implement See Implement setup page 138 Antenna Front Back r Offset 0 0 0 E Antenna Lef Right F 8 Offset 3 0 0 F Note When you enter the number of implement sections if the implement does not have sections enter 1 4 If necessary edit the vehicle profile See Vehicle settings for Autopilot system page 146 5 Calibrate the implement See Implement calibration for TrueTracker system page 250 Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system Configuration Selection Edit l Implement Controller Setup Configuration Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 245 Setup process 14 TrueTracker setup 1 Atthe Home screen tap a The Configuration Selection screen displays 2 Tap Edit next to the implement 3 At the Configuration screen select ay TrueTracker and tap Setup The mplement Controller Setup screen displays 4 Complete the e Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system page 246 e Engage settings for TrueTracker system page 248 e Steering settings for TrueTracker system page 249 Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system Note Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed If your vehicle data is correct there is no need to edit the vehicle settings If your vehicle data is not correct edit th
74. least twenty minutes If you do a roll calibration with less accurate GPS correction modes repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent result 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle 2 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the roll offset value to O zero 4 Create an AB Line 5 Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass 6 Atthe end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 7 Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass 8 In the middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line This ensures there is no cross track error 9 Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return paths 10 Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right 11 Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Ver
75. loads that were used in the current calibration Error in communication with Claas yield monitor Error in communication with Claas yield monitor Error in communication with Claas yield monitor Error in communication with Claas yield monitor Error in communication with Claas yield monitor Error in communication with Claas yield monitor The implement width in the display setup must be set to match the width that was set in the Claas yield monitor John Deere moisture sensor head unit or armrest unit not detected Check port selection Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics Warning message YIELD MONITOR CAN bus error state XX Explanation Unknown error when communicating with John Deere yield monitor YIELD MONITOR Failed to update crop type Unable to set grain type in John Deere yield monitor Probable communication error YIELD MONITOR Configuration Error state XX Verify the FmX is connected to the CAN bus and CAN bus combine series configuration Lost connection with John Deere yield monitor YIELD MONITOR Moisture sensor is not connected YIELD MONITOR Temperature sensor is reporting values outside of a valid range Trimble moisture sensor connection error Bad reading received from temperature sensor YIELD MONITOR Field changed on YM2000 Verify that the Crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000 YM 2000 reported
76. lower than the field origin point Impl Vehicle Model Implement profile name Implement Name of the current implement Implement F B Offset Implement L R Offset Distance of front to back offset Distance of left to right offset Implement Width Width of the implement Latitude Vehicle s current latitude Line Feature Length Length of the current line feature Local Time Long term XTE Current local time Vehicle Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur more than one hour apart Longitude Vehicle s current longitude Longitude Vehicle s current longitude NDVI Normalized Difference Vegetation Index Nearest Point Name Network ID Bame of the nearest point feature RTK network ID of the GPS receiver s corrections Network Status Current status of the wireless cellular network North Distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin point Nudge Amount of nudge currently applied Nudge Trim Amount of nudge or trim currently applied Offline Dist Distance away from the guidance line Offset X Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark Offset Y Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark P Altitude Current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 69
77. manually the EZ Pilot system disengages It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation To do so a Engage ona line b Turn the wheel until EZ Pilot disengages To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel see Steering performance calibration page 170 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 363 EZ Pilot system operation 18 Operations Adjust EZ Pilot guidance A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared At the Run screen tap g The EZ Pilot panel displays Setting Explanation Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either e GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system e GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field Use the lt and gt buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction left or right To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for EZ Pilot system page 167 Trim Online Aggr Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections The vehicle can s
78. message shows if the FM 1000 integrated display does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module An error occurred when attempting to lock the position of the control valve An error occurred when attempting to control the valve This message appears if the FM 1000 integrated display does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module Probably due to incompatible firmware versions The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures This message indicates that you entered the same pressure FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 19 Diagnostics Possible Causes Actions Possible causes e Control valve is drawing too much current e There is an electrical short somewhere Probably due to incompatible firmware versions Make sure that the correct firmware versions and the rate and section control module are installed Report this fault to Trimble Support Probably due to incompatible firmware Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM 1000 integrated display and the rate and section control module Probably due to incompatible firmware Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM 1000 integrated displayand the rate and section control module Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM 1000 integrated disp
79. mph To calibrate the right turn angle a Drive straight forward until yellow displays b Tap Allow the system to operate for 20 seconds until you receive a message that the calibration is complete WARNING Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles Make sure you are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system Repeat the steps to calibrate the left turn angle Steering performance calibration To calibrate the EZ Pilot system and set the correct steering performance parameters the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along an A B line 1 170 At the EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen select Steering Performance The EZ Pilot Steering Performance screen displays Tap the Override Sensitivity tab Adjust the force required to manually override EZ Pilot Tap the Aggressiveness tab The aggressiveness setting controls the amount of force that required to disengage the system and how aggressively the system holds the line If the setting is e Too low the vehicle will not hold the line e Too high the vehicle may over correct and make S turns Adjust the Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S turns To make turns e More aggressive Increase the aggressiveness value e Less aggressive Decrease the aggressiveness value Tap the Free Play tab Adjust the freeplay offset if the steering ha
80. no cross track error The current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 9 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass 10 Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right Test Offset distance Offset direction Total Total 3 average offset value 11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Use the table in step 10 to record your results Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration 1 Atthe mplement Controller Setup screen select Line Acquisition and tap OK The Autopilot Line Acquisitioncreen displays 2 Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 257 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line using a scale from 50 to 150 The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100 It varies for different implement profiles
81. or expiration 15 6 Independent Contractors The parties to these Terms of Use are independent contractors Neither party is an agent representative or partner of the other party Neither party shall have any right power or authority to enter into any agreement for or on behalf of or incur any obligation or liability of or otherwise to bind the other party 15 7 Equitable Remedies You acknowledge and agree that monetary damages may be insufficient to compensate MapQuest for an actual or anticipated breach of these Terms of Use by you You agree that in such circumstances MapQuest shall be entitled to seek equitable remedies including preliminary and permanent injunctions in addition to any other remedies available to MapQuest at law or hereunder 15 8 Statute of Limitations You agree that regardless of any statute or law to the contrary any claim or cause of action arising out of or related to use of the MapQuest Services or these Terms of Use must be filed by you within one 1 year after such claim or cause of action arose or be forever barred 15 9 Consent to Further Contacts You agree that MapQuest may contact You with respect to these Terms of Use any other MapQuest products and services and in relation to any marketing related purposes ODC Open Database License ODbL The Open Database License ODbL is a license agreement intended to allow users to freely share modify and use this Database while maintaining this same
82. page 94 e Create or load a data dictionary See Create load a data dictionary page 95 e View a PDF file of an event summary See Event subfolder page 87 e Import an AB line or boundary See Import AB Lines or boundaries page 337 e Save an Autopilot system vehicle configuration file vdb See Save vehicle profile page 165 Files generated by the FM 1000 integrated display are saved in a specific structure on the USB drive See Data storage structure page 83 Transfer data At the Data Files screen you can e Transfer data between a USB drive and the display s internal storage See Display to USB page 79 or Transfer from USB page 80 e Transfer data between a USB drive and a computer See USB to computer page 80 e Delete data from a USB drive or the display s internal storage See Delete data page 81 Data Files screen oag Data Files Display Setup _ You can access the Data Files screen from either 78 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Transfer data e The Home screen Tap Data Files e The Configuration screen a At the Home screen tap as b Atthe Configuration screen tap Pe System and then tap Setup c If necessary enter the administration password and then tap OK d Select Data Files from the list and then tap Manage The Data Files screen displays Data File categories The categories available on the Data Files scr
83. parts on the combine Be especially aware of chains belts pulleys and tensioning rods and keep in mind that their range of motion may be much greater during operation than when standing still e Alignment Ensure that the optical sensors will not move out of alignment during operation e Paddle support bracket Ensure that the optical sensors will not sense the paddle support bracket Refer to the Installation Guide for more information Tare calibration The quality of the Tare Calibration is critical to getting good accuracy particularly at low flow rates To ensure the best results e Check the tare daily e When performing the tare calibration run the system at the same speed as you would normally use during operation e While running the system empty look at the elevator speed This number must be correct typically between 12 20 Hz e Runthe tare calibration The tare value represents the measured thickness of the paddles and should be approximately correct It is more important that the number is consistent than that is exactly right e Ifthe measured value is considerably higher than expected check the entered values for paddle spacing and check that the optical sensors are not being obscured by the support brackets on the paddles Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 291 Yield Monitoring best practices 17 Yield Monitoring setup e Ifthe measured value is considerably lower than expected
84. previous laser system Plane Earth Surface Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system No corrections will be made to a flat plane so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the Earth This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field Contour The system guides you around a contour and indicates whether to drive up or down to maintain your current level This is designed for marking rice levees For cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see Leveling page 396 Implement settings for FieldLevel II At the Home screen tap A At the Configuration screen tap FieldLevelll and then tap Diagnostics At the Field Level Diagnostics screen use the Height Control options to set the target height You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open See FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test page 460 GPS receiver setup The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade To configure this receiver Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 269 FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup an F W At the Configuration screen select the Be GPS Receiver that is associated with FieldLevel Il and then tap Setup The WM Drain GPS Receiver Settings scre
85. promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics Inc MAPQUEST PLATFORM TERMS OF USE Last Updated November 1 2011 Community Edition License Agreement INTRODUCTION MapQuest has been helping people find places and get maps and directions for over 40 years We make the MapQuest APIs our Open Services as described at http open mapquestapi com Community Accounts and other developer services in short the MapQuest Services along with the maps driving directions and other content delivered through the MapQuest Services the MapQuest Content available without charge to encourage developers to use these services and content in developing their applications and websites We want you to be creative and build awesome applications and websites that thrill your users All we ask is that you comply with the terms that are included in these Terms of Use We will provide the developer community at large with support in various forms such as forums blog posts or FAQs Since we re providing the MapQuest Services for free we don t provide individual technical support or warranties for the Community Services but if you want to receive technical support and warranties we have a product for you Please check out our MapQuest Platform Services Enterprise Edition and learn more about the services we will provide for reasonable fees If you choose to use any of the MapQuest Se
86. read by the display For more information visit the ESRI website www esri com 90 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data storage structure Graphical file editing ESRI shape shp and attribute dbf files can be used in many other software packages that can import or use shp and dbf formats The Farm Works Software is recommended For more information go to www farmworks com Data collected by the display can be opened directly into the Farm Works software You can make changes to the files and save them on an office computer The Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view the data in the attribute dbf file The display can load files that you created in office software Save Shapefile or Agfile gdx prescriptions to the AgGPSs Prescriptions folder on the USB drive to send rates to a variable rate controller Data Dictionary folder The Data Dictionary folder contains text files you can add to customize the data dictionary See Data Dictionary categories page 94 and Create load a data dictionary page 95 Diagnostics folder Diagnostic logs are stored for the FM 1000 integrated display and activities Logs are useful for Trimble Support to troubleshoot system operation issues The ProgramLog txt file is saved in the Diagnostics folder and can be useful for troubleshooting This file contains data from checks perf
87. received from the rate and section control module No flow detected The Field IQ system attempted Possible causes to apply material but the flow F Incorrect flow calibration sensor failed to detect any flow j e Damaged or disconnected feedback sensor e Broken valve wiring Attention Minimum flowXX The current target application gal min is applying rate and speed require a flow that is less than the configured minimum flow limit The flow will be at that limit instead Therefore the actual applied rate will probably be above the target rate Rate not responding The flow sensor indicates that Verify correct setup on the Valve the actual flow is not changingas Calibration screen expected Perform a valve calibration Inspect feedback sensor and rate control valve for damage Unstable flow control The rate and section control Check the Plumbing setting on module is having difficulty the Valve Calibration screen maintaining the target flow Reduce Field IQ system possibly due to an incorrect aggressiveness Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 443 Field IQ diagnostics Message That Displays Valve controller reported over current Unknown valve error Unable to lock valve position Unable to start flow Field 1Q unknown internal error The second pressure entry must differ from the first Please enter a different pressure 444 Explanation setup This
88. receiver uses corrections from WAAS EGNOS satellites or from OmniSTAR HP XP G2 or VBS satellites These differential systems use special algorithms to provide differential corrections that allow the rover receiver to calculate its position more accurately Not all corrections services support the use of GLONASS satellites in their solution DGPS Differentially corrected Global Positioning System GPS E EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service An SBAS operated by the European Space Agency Event A precision agriculture activity on a particular field For example planting seed applying fertilizer or lime or spraying with fungicide herbicide or insecticide E Farm A collection of fields Field Settings created in the FM 1000 integrated display to represent an actual field one or more parts of an actual field or a group of two or more fields Field profiles include guidance lines for steering pivot patterns and landmarks Fill A point on the field where dirt must be added A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the proposed field surface Freeplay Movement in the steering linkage through which a movement of the steering wheel will cause no change in wheel angle Freeplay offset A value entered to give the control system a way to account for freeplay during guidance GDD 476 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 20 Glossary H Growing Degree Days A measure
89. recheck the entered paddle spacing and the elevator speed If both are correct low tare should not be a problem e Tare Deviation indicates how much variation there is in the measurement of the paddle size Normally this number should be less than the size of the paddle itself If this number is excessively large check the installation for interference or opportunities for excessive vibration like a poorly tensioned elevator chain Flow calibration Calibrating the Yield Monitoring system across the full range of flows will improve the accuracy of the system To get a good calibration do the following e Select calibration loads where the e Conditions are consistent e Crop quality is even e Ground is as level as possible e The passes are as long as possible Keep the combine speed constant during the entire run e Collect loads that are as large as is practical without sacrificing consistency e Collect as many different calibration loads as possible with each load at a different flow rate To accomplish this you can run the system at different speeds or harvest partial header widths e Ifyou still have significant errors in the calibrations check the noise level during harvesting If this figure is above 30 check for interference with the optical sensors or opportunities for excessive vibration If your paddles are very worn they may need to be replaced Pitch Roll calibration The Yield Monitoring system corrects for the pitc
90. return to the Configuration screen 6 Tap OK to return to the Home screen For operational information see Task Controller operation page 373 GPS output settings 1 At the Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select Be GPS Receiverand then tap Setup On the Settings tab tap GPS Output 4 On the CANGPS tab set a The Message Rate to 5 Hz b The Output Port to be the CAN attached to the ISOBUS for the implement 5 Tap OK until you are back at the Home screen Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 223 Equipment setup 11 ISOBUS setup Equipment setup Make sure that you have set up the Virtual Terminal and or Task Controller before completing the rest of this procedure For cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide 1 Atthe Home screen tap Az The Configuration screen displays 2 Select F180 Virtual Terminal then tap Diagnostics The Virtual Terminal for the equipment you have connected displays For Kinze Virtual Task Terminal Controller Planter 3110 3140 3200 Current Ground Speed Source X X 3500 3600 3660 to GPS Speed 3700 3800 Population Option to x Prescription For Kuhn Virtual Task Terminal Controller Seed Drill Moduliner HR 6004 Simulated Speed to the speed x x ML you will drive Spreader AXIS H EMC 40 1 amp TaskControl to On x 50 1 GPS Control to On xX x Set VariSpread to On Xx Set Chan
91. right in sequence until all the rows are grouped correctly and then tap OK Section pna For section widths at the Section Widths screen Enter the section width for each section from left to right in sequence karaan manta t sa a ar ae er ra ar memen o BN kag Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 193 Control setup 9 Field IQ system setup When you are finished tap OK 5 At the Section Control Module Setup screen tap Advanced Wire Assignment Note This button is only available for specific cases so may not be visible Assign the rows to the correct module and wire location To assign a wire ID to a row tap the module icon select the number of the wire you want to assign from the drop down list and then tap on the row to assign that module and wire It is recommended that you work from left to right me F3 Wee A2 Row 2 Latency Setting Explanation On Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay and the system will turn on in advance Off Latency By default this is set to 0 0 seconds Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve this can happen on larger systems In this case increase the Off Latency value to compen
92. screen displays Move the tractor forward slowly Center the steering wheel and then tap Next Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message displays The value for volts updates as you turn the steering wheel Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap Next If the steering wheel is not turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement an error message displays At the next screen center the steering wheel While the wheel is at the center position tap Next The value for volts updates as you turn the steering wheel Tap ok to accept the calibration Automated Deadzone calibration A WARNING During the Automated Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle To A avoid injury be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle and implement if applicable are clear WARNING Obstacles in the field can cause collisions which may injure you and damage the vehicle If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration stop the vehicle and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system 1 Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin 2 Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase wil
93. slow to continue the automatic valve calibration Please turn offthe master The Field IQ system is in a mode switch in which material application is not expected It is asking for the master switch to be turned off to make the system safe 446 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 19 Diagnostics Possible Causes Actions Open the gate or enter a non zero gate height If the gate is already open check the installation and wiring of the gate height sensor If this is incorrect check the tank bin sensor installation and wiring The vehicle is moving too slow to begin the automatic valve calibration Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes Actions NH3 is an irritant and The application type is set to corrosive to the skin eyes Anhydrous respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly May cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times Application width is The total of the rate controller different f
94. speed cannot be achieved calibration if the target rate and Reduce target speed or target speed that you entered target rate require the shaft to turn faster than the maximum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow calibration screen The selected target rateand This shows during granular speed may not be calibration if the target rate and achieved target speed that you entered It is recommended that the require the shaft to turn slower target speed be increased than the minimum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow 450 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays The calibration constant changed significantly For best results it is recommended that the calibration be repeated Field IQ diagnostics Explanation Possible Causes Actions calibration screen If you choose to continue the Field IQ system tries to run the system below the minimum RPM limit This message shows at the end of the granular calibration process if the calibration constant changed by more than 30 Motor failed to start Motor stopped unexpectedly The number of seeds dispensed did not match the number of seeds expected Do you want to adjust the calibration constant in order to attain the target rate Adjusting the calibration constant will alter the seed Spacing Calibration Failed The motor failed to turn Speed Too Low The vehicle is movin
95. start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected Retry and ifthe problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly No GPS No Steering Response Detected AGPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure During the calibration cycle insufficient movement was sensed in order for the calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty Unable To Determine DZ Try Again A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if the problem persists contact Technical Support Antenna position and roll offset correction Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that e TrueTracker is completely set up e The Autopilot system is properly configured See Autopilot system page 146 e The correct GPS corrections are enabled See GPS receiver settings page 98 254 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 1 Atthe Implement Controller Setup screen select Roll Antenn
96. steady reading of the applied rate If you are with in the allowable error you will see the applied rate just show your target rate Coefficent tab The material may have different calibrations for different locations This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way for example Wheat Front Bin Wheat Rear Bin that you will know which location to use them in 1 Enter the coefficient 2 Tap OK Control setup The first time you tap Control Setup the Control Setup screen is blank and you can only add a location Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 187 Control setup 9 Field IQ system setup After you have added a location you can select it from the Location list on the right hand side of the screen to see the assigned modules Button Tap to Add Add and set up a new control location This opens the Control Details screen which contains the following tabs e Material tab page 188 e Layout page 189 e Section Control tab page 191 e Rate Control tab page 195 e Row monitoring page 197 e Sensor tab page 198 Edit View or edit the details of an existing control location Delete Delete an existing location A message displays prompting you to tap either e Remove to remove the material e Cancel to return to the Control Setup screen Material tab 1 On the Material tab at the Available Materials list select th
97. swath headland number Swath_wdth Swath width meters Target Target rate at the current position Target Target application rate when serial rate control TAC or the Field IQ system are used Total Qty Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the e Aerial Flow Controller e Autocal Flow controller e Crophawk Flow Meter TRACK ID Date and time stamp Units Units metric UTC Date Point creation date YYYYMMDD UTC_Time UTC time hh mmi ss s Version Track attribute file version Yaw Theyaw Graphical data formats The FM 1000 integrated display uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute ESRI 3D shape file format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field for example spray coverage track logging points and features The three files in a shapefile set are e lt filename gt dbf file Contains the feature attributes e lt filename gt shp file Contains position information e lt filename gt shx file An index file that links the position information with its attributes The term shapefile is used to refer to these three files collectively The display records all latitude longitude and height data in decimal degrees Note The display reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2 0 or 3 1 3D polylines polygons and points The M and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3 1 can be generated in the track logging files but cannot be
98. than to over fertilize waste fertilizer it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown here You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and delivery system conditions 220 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER ISOBUS setup In this chapter ISOBUS is a global set of software and hardware standards that makes possible the ROBUS SEMINES Harana magagaan tate 222 communication between equipment made Virtual Terminal setup 222 by different manufacturers Task Controller setup 222 GPS output settings 223 Equipment setup 224 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 221 ISOBUS settings 11 ISOBUS setup ISOBUS settings To set up ISOBUS features 1 2 3 4 5 6 Connect the CAN bus to the FM 1000 integrated display Activate the feature plugin you want to use See Optional features plugins page 37 Ifyou are using Task Controller unlock the feature Set up the feature you are using See Virtual Terminal setup page 222 or Task Controller setup page 222 Set up GPS speed output See GPS output settings page 223 Set up the specific virtual terminal for your equipment See Equipment setup page 224 For operational information see ISOBUS operation page 373 Virtual Terminal setup 1 2 3 4 5
99. the Run screen Add field features To add a feature to the on screen map of your field 4 PB 1 At the Run screen tap 7 to open the Mapping Guidance panel which contains the buttons for field features you defined 2 Begin to drive the field 3 When you reach the point in your field where you want to add a feature tap the appropriate feature button If the feature is a line or area feature the feature will begin To mark the end of the line or feature tap the feature button again Note You can add a point feature while adding a line or area feature For example use a line feature to draw an overhead telephone wire and at the same time use a point feature to add the telephone poles To set up feature buttons see Field feature mapping settings page 51 322 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use Guidance pattern use Guidance patterns enable you to either e Manually steer on the guidance lines of the pattern using the on screen lightbar to guide your accuracy e Usean automatic steering system to engage on and drive on the guidance lines of the pattern The swath measurement is based on the implement width you are using Creating patterns The guidance pattern types available in the display to create are e Straight swaths created using an AB line or an At line see Straight guidance pattern page 327 e Curved pattern page 329 e Circular pivots
100. the optimum Setting Explanation Cut Fill Ratio Section Composite Slope Slope Heading North gt South Slope East gt West Slope Height or Cut Fill 3 Tap Best Fit Version 9 25 Revision A The amount of cut material that equals one volume of fill material If you set up sections when you defined the field you can select a section from the list e None Levels the entire field e Left Levels only the section to the left of the section line e Right Levels only the section to the right of the section line The true angle of the fall of the design when the East West and North South slopes are combined The heading direction of the slope when the East West and North South slopes are combined The angle of the design slope from North to South The angle of the design slope from East to West Height Gives the design the theme of a topographic height map Cut Fill Gives the design the theme of a cut fill map Red indicates the cut areas Blue indicates the fill areas Green indicates areas that do not need cut or fill FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 395 Water Management functionality 18 Operations The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the field An arrow displays on the image of the field to show the direction of fall The Stats table lists the statistics of the design computation e Cut The volume of material that must be removed for the cur
101. the property of their respective owners Release Notice This is the June 2015 release Revision A of the FM 1000 integrated display documentation It applies to version 9 25 of the display software Legal Notices The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights You may have others which vary from state jurisdiction to state jurisdiction Product Limited Warranty Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components the Product shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Trimble s applicable published specifications for the Product for a period of one 1 year starting from the earlier of i the date of installation or ii six 6 months from the date of original Product shipment from Trimble This warranty applies only to the Product if installed by Trimble or a dealer authorized by Trimble to perform Product installation services Software Components All Product software components sometimes hereinafter also referred to as Software are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the Product and are not sold Any software accompanied by a separate end user license agreement EULA shall be governed by the terms conditions restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA notwithstanding the preceding paragraph During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such Fixes to the Product software that Trimble release
102. the same height as the main or outlet 2 Tap Measure The outlet depth is entered by the system Also another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m 65 ft of the end of the surveyed section line The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag 15 Outlet Elevation The real or relative elevation of the outlet 16 Smoothing list The required smoothing level None Low Medium High to work out any humping sections in the design It is recommended you use either Low or Medium smoothing 17 Measure Outlet button Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface 18 OK button Tap to save any changes to the design 416 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Edit Line tab Item Explanation 1 Section The section you are currently designing 2 Rename button Tap to rename the section 3 Direction list The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the other way switch the option shown in the Direction list to the other option in the list Options are e Outlet at Survey Start e Outlet at Survey End 4 Outlet information Elevation of outlet depth
103. to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field 1 134 At the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the Selected Features buttons The Select Feature screen displays From the feature list select Area and then tap New From the list of features select Boundary and then tap Edit The Edit Area Feature screen displays FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 6 Field feature mapping setup Boundary feature settings 4 Set one or more of the following the attributes for the boundary features Name Custom name that displays on the Feature Mapping tab Color Color of the boundary outline and also the infill color if selected Draw as Outlined or Filled Trigger Warning Visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the boundary edge Remote Output Enabled Restricts remote output pulses from being triggered while outside the boundary Disabled Does not restrict remote output See Remote Output setup page 118 Expand By How the boundary is actually recorded e Nothing Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded position e Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by the swath width after the boundary is closed e 1Swath Width Expands the recorded boundary location by 1 additional swath width after the boundary is closed 1 swath Tap OK The Select Feature screen displays Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen displays
104. traveling South down a line and the trim is moved 1 inch right West when the vehicle is turned around and driven north the correction will still be right of the line which is East on the Northern heading Steering Aggressiveness Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively to command the steering to the guidance line Aggressiveness should not be set too high This can cause the vehicle steering not to react to commands the steering wheels cannot react fast enough to keep up with the steering commands Instability in steering will result Row Guidance Aggr Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle reacts to the input from the Row Guidance sensors 382 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations TrueTracker operation TrueTracker operation A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared When using TrueTracker with the Autopilot system the implement receives its own separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy TrueTracker controls To open the TrueTracker panel tap l i Control Explanation Nudge The guidance l
105. vehicle leves at a constant slope regardless of direction e Constant Depth Use to collect a live rolling survey of the ground surface This survey is passed in real time to the control system which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance Autopilot or EZ Pilot This mode requires two RTK enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system One of the RTK enabled receivers e Is not required to be an internal receiver e Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin feature e Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM Drain Pipe Pipe Type Select the type of pipe to be installed Pipe Size The size of the pipe to be installed Recalc When the tile plow encounters a rock pull the boot up over the rock and tap Recalc This modifies the design to ensure the remaining tile run stays within the minimum slope requirement and prevents the pipe from diving 424 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Control Explanation down to the original design grade Note This works only when installing tile in the direction away from the outlet point Height Offset Increase Raise the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment button Height Offset Lower the tile boot or blade by the blade step increme
106. when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches used with the Autoslope leveling model Percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS receiver Time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base station Note Can also be viewed from the Run screen Solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float etc Note Can also be viewed from the Run screen Difference between the blade height and the target height When Cut is displayed the current ground height is above the target height and the height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to moved down to reach the target height When Fill is displayed the current ground height is below the target height Originally planned or designed height at the current location Design slope with respect to the current location along the section line Used with Autoslope leveling model Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled Used with Point to Slope leveling model Difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP Solution type for example RTK Fixed or RTK Float and so on Note Can also be viewed from the Run screen Current estimate of the error in the horizontal component Horizontal dilution of position Horizontal component of PDOP Current direction the vehicle is heading in Latitude as recorded by the GPS receiver 406 FM 1000 Integr
107. with the Autopilot system to center the combine on the rows See Row Guidance page 163 Features for application e Trimble Field lIQ crop input control system Control sections and vary application rates See Field IQ system setup page 184 and Field IQ operation page 347 e GreenSeeker Vary fertilizer rate in real time using crop vigor measurements See GreenSeeker functionality page 216 and GreenSeeker operation page 368 e Serial Rate Controller Use a variable rate controller See Additional controller setup page 235 ISOBUS e Virtual Terminal View and use Virtual Terminal See Virtual Terminal setup page 222 and Virtual Terminal operation page 374 e Task Controller Use Task Controller See Task Controller setup page 222 and Task Controller operation page 373 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 37 Optional features plugins 2 Display basics Implement control e Trimble TrueGuide implement guidance system Use guidance on the implement for greater accuracy See TrueGuide system page 238 and TrueGuide operation page 386 e Trimble TrueTracker implement steering system Automatically steer the implement for greater accuracy See TrueTracker page 244 and TrueTracker operation page 383 Connectivity e Ag3000 modem Receive cellular RTK corrections See Ag3000 modem page 124 e DCM 300 modem Receive RTK corrections from a VRS network a third party RTK prov
108. written consent EXPORT RESTRICTIONS You agree to comply with all export and import laws and restrictions and regulations of the United States or any foreign agency or authority and not to export or re export MapQuest Services orany direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws or regulations or without all necessary approvals NOTICES AND TRANSACTING ELECTRONICALLY You understand and agree that MapQuest is an online service and that you are transacting with MapQuest electronically MapQuest shall provide electronic notices by posting them on this website and or by sending an email to any account associated with your Credentials GENERAL PROVISIONS 15 1 Entire Agreement These Terms of Use constitute the entire agreement between MapQuest and You with respect to the subject matter of these Terms of Use and supersedes all prior agreements understandings and communications between MapQuest and You with respect to such subject matter No modification or amendment to these Terms of Use shall be effective unless in writing by MapQuest 15 2 Choice of Law Jurisdiction These Terms of Use are made under and shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia except for its conflicts of laws principles and specifically excluding f the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods MapQuest and You expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any cla
109. you like to clean out the moisture sensor Would you like to begin a new load The Test Weight for the new load is XXXXX What would you like to do End Load ends the current Load Cancel continue with the current Load New Load closes this Load and starts another Load This operation will delete one or more loads that were used in the most recent yield or moisture calibration These loads will not be available for use in any future recalibration CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Uninitialized CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Cannot configure CAN port CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Cannot detect the CLAAS CAN bus CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Cannot configured Yield Monitoring CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Lost CAN communications CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Error state CLAAS YIELD MONITOR WARNING Head configuration differs between the FmX and CEBIS YIELD MONITOR CAN bus error state XX Failed to detect the following device s 470 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide reset Requesting confirmation when setting manual moisture The user has chosen to close the field before ending the load The display offers to clean out the Trimble moisture sensor when shutting down User tapped New Load and New End Load Confirmation is enabled in setup User tapped End Load and New End Load Confirmation is enabled in setup User is deleting a client farm field or event that contains one or more
110. 0 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A O Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field IQ ag Check that there is hydraulic flow to the Rawson 2 At the Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test AN WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate 3 Tap Next 4 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 5 Tap Start The next screen provides the status of each motor e NoError The test was successful e Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow Ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions e Disconnected The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor 6 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen PWM valves calibration Drive Calibration 1 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration The Field IQ Drive Calibration screen displays 2 On the Drive Limits tab enter the values for e Minimum Seed Disk RPM e Maximum Seed Disk RPM Tap Next 3 On the Auto Tuning tab follow the instructions to auto tune the system Note Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle AN W
111. 0 integrated display 1 Introduction About the FM 1000 integrated display With the FM 1000 integrated display you can perform e Field definition and mapping e Feature mapping e Guidance to predefined field patterns e Logging of coverage data e Variable rate control e Boom Row switching e Logging of topographic mapping data e Output of information for analysis in office based Geographic Information System GIS software e Seed Liquid Granular and Anhydrous Ammonia control e Seed monitoring Optional features The FM 1000 integrated display has a number of optional features plugins you can install to expand its functionality Most of these features require additional hardware For installation information see the FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To access these settings return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button When prompted to close the field tap Yes Also see Optional features plugins page 37 Unlock features plugins page 43 and Activate features plugins for use page 45 Compatibility The following are compatible with the FM 1000 integrated display e Trimble Autopilot automated steering system e Trimble EZ Steer assisted steering system e Trimble EZ Pilot steering system e Trimble TrueTracker implement steering system e Trimble TrueGuide implement guidance system e Trimble Fi
112. 00 Integrated Display User Guide 339 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations Delete a swath Na Pa N B Swath Run PLA maa AN Management P a a Mapping Guidance List of Existing er Panel Delete Guidance Lines Note To be able to delete swaths you must have entered the Administration password 4 B 1 At the Run screen tap AF open the Mapping Guidance panel 2 Tap X Swaths The Swath Management screen displays From the list on the left select the swath to delete 4 Tap Delete If prompted enter the password The swath is marked as deleted The next time you close the current field the swath does not show in the list Note You cannot delete a swath that is currently active 5 To return to the Run screen tap Close Switch to the next pattern You can switch from one existing line pattern to another To do so tap Each time you tap the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen Swaths tab The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel Note FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active Shift a swath Note Shifting a swath is a permanent adjustment To temporarily change the spacing of swaths skip a swath instead See Skip a swath page 342 Note You cannot shift line features or FreeFor
113. 00 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field lQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation Offset and the row e Rear Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the rear row e Front Row Offset 2 row offset Enter the distance between the Application Offset and the front row Material Controlled By You are controlling the material with e Switch Boxes e On Screen Section Control tab With section control you can avoid double coverage and eliminating wasted inputs using automatic or manual section control Section control e Automatically control up to 48 rows individually e Enables you to see where you have been and what you have done with overlap detection e Eliminates overlap by adding Tru Count Air Clutches and Tru Count LiquiBlock valves At the Section Control tab you can set up section control as e Rate as Section To use rate control drives as section shutoffs e Material linking To link primary and secondary materials e Automatic Section Control Automatic section control with various section control devices Rate as Section The Field IQ system can use the rate control drives as section shutoffs For example when going into a nonproductive or covered area the rate control drives will be commanded to zero rate 1 To set up rate as sections at the Section Control tab complete these settings Setting Explanation Section Control S
114. 000 Integrated Display User Guide 309 Operations overview 18 Operations Operations overview The Run screen is where you perform operations Depending on the features you are using additional feature buttons will display on the right hand side of the Run screen When you begin operations there are some basic steps you will always perform If you have already entered implement and vehicle settings 1 Select a vehicle and an implement See Vehicle selection page 321 and Implement selection page 320 2 Select or create client farm field and event See Fields page 319 3 At the Run screen a Select or create guidance patterns and lines See Guidance pattern use page 323 b Optionally add field features See Field feature use page 322 4 Optionally activate coverage logging See Coverage logging page 343 5 When you are finished close the field See Close a field page 321 310 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Operation basics Operation basics The process of beginning operation can include nu PWN HA D Create or select a field See Field creation selection page 319 Select a vehicle See Vehicle selection page 321 Select an implement See Implement selection page 320 Load or create a guidance pattern to use See Guidance pattern use page 323 Optionally create field features on screen to indicate their location in your field See Field featur
115. 2 0 0 000 aa 377 Change trigger limits during operation cece cece ccccccccccceeeeeeeees 378 Manually output a pulse 22 aaa 378 Row Guidance operation aaa 379 Use row sensors La BEAN LL NO genet ese LA SG r oeudee aa a E SESE 380 Shift or skip guidance line 22 2 cece cece cece cece cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeees 381 Row Guidance adjustments 22 2 382 TrueTracker operation 2 2 eee cece e cece eee cccccecccecceecececeeeseceeeeeeeees 383 TrueTracker controls 2 383 18 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Contents 19 Implement status 2 2 0 0 aaa 384 Implement on screen lightbar aaa 384 TrueGuide operation eee cece cece ence cece ccccceceeeceeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 386 Using TrueGuide 2 2 2 AN a 387 Vehicle Sync operation kakak 388 Common USES L ieee eee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee eee eee eee e cece eeeee 388 Benents octet rece te cota a ee et NG ta ee ama PG Stee Seer 388 Using Vehicle Sync 2 388 Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync 2 389 Coverage gan te BULAN Era ue OD AA bed cane e 390 Water Management functionality 2 2 00 0 000 000 aaa 392 Create a survey L ciel cece ccc eee eee ee cee ee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeees 392 Design esse tect es oe che ee tne Sees ee NG ab PAA NG ane Dene KN ones SINGA a 394 REV GMM a eee
116. 2 Serial Rate Control setup Configure the controller Screen or Settings Raven Additional Information Setting Type Data Menu e BAUD 9600 e GPS Inac e DLOG ON e TRIG 1 e UNIT Sec Some Raven controllers may lose the settings if power is disconnected You must then reconfigure the controller Implement Application width Boom Gar SEP e First boom section width must be greater than O otherwise the display will not communicate with the controller e Total boom section width must match the Application Width setting in the Implement Boom Setup screen The display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to the number of boom sections but it does not know the absolute width of each boom section It only knows the relative width of each boom section with respect to the total boom section width When recording coverage polygons each section is considered to be a percentage of the application width set in the Implement Boom Setup screen For example if you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the application coverage by making the application width greater than the swath width This proportionally changes the recorded width of each boom section Channel To allow rates sent by the display to setting be used by the Raven controller set channel to either e Rate 1 SCS4XX SCS6XX e Product X Auto SCS7XX If the controller is set to Rate 2 or Manual the controller ignores t
117. 20 seconds before powering the display and the combine back up 3 Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the CAN bus disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display Yield Monitor troubleshooting The display is not mapping 1 Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere s setting 2 Ensure that the crop type is the same 3 The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode The display stops mapping periodically through the field Cause The header could be raising and lowering past the setting for Stop Logging Header Height Action Increase the Header Height setting on the display Display yield information does not match John Deere s information Cause Different crop types may be selected Action Verify the crop types match in both displays The display shows a major jump or extremely different weight values from those shown on the John Deere monitor Cause The Stop Head Height setting is lower than what the John Deere monitor shows The John Deere monitor could be logging more data than the FM 1000 integrated display logs therefore showing a larger value Action Set the Head Height to 100 on the John Deere display Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 467 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring warning messages Warning message Explanation Unable to calibrate yield monitor Occurs when tare calibration fails Inv
118. 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 285 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup 1 Manually drive the plow to a depth below the optimal depth of the section line that you have surveyed and designed for this calibration run The system will default to a Height Gain of 0 2 2 Move forward at the speed and RPM that you will be running the plow When the vehicle is moving engage the WM Drain system and note how quickly the system takes to get to the design depth Note The system may not go the optimal depth that you have entered at this time because the pitch offset of this plow has not been determined In this test the system should drive to a consistent depth each time it is engaged 3 Ifthe system is too lazy slow to get to depth within a reasonable distance increase the height gain setting by a value of 0 05 Continue to raise this value until the plow achieves depth at the required speed Note The plow may oscillate while on grade 4 Split the last two values you entered For example e Height Gain run prior 0 300 e Height Gain current run 0 350 e Height Gain to try next run 0 325 Note After you have determined the optimal values for a particular plow series such as Liebrecht 5 plow it is very likely that you can enter the same measurements offsets and height gain values for other plows of the same series With a good valve calibration for each plow you should be able to get each subsequent plow ru
119. 258 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Vehicle In this chapter Vehicle Sync Setup steps Sync setup Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Vehicle Sync integrates with the Field IQ crop input control system Tru Count clutches and the Yield Monitoring system Multiple users can share coverage maps providing section control for minimized overlap and seed savings during planting season In conjunction with the Field IQ system and Yield Monitoring Vehicle Sync can influence seed placement as well as the header for increased accuracy FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 259 Vehicle Sync 15 Vehicle Sync setup Vehicle Sync Vehicle Sync supports up to six vehicles within range of approximately 325 yards 300 m and in direct line of sight with each other Requirements For Vehicle Sync you need e FM 1000 integrated display e Vehicle Sync unlock e DCM 300 Modem page 125 e High gain Wi Fi antenna kit For operational information see Vehicle Sync operation page 388 Setup steps 1 Atthe Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select ge Vehicle Sync and tap Setup The Vehicle Sync Configuration screen displays 3 On the Setup tab enter the appropriate settings Setting Explanation Channel Make sure that the channel that is selected is the same on all the vehicles that you want to link You can link up to six vehicles Static IP Must be unique for each vehi
120. 3 TrueGuide setup TrueGuide system The working implement behind the tractor is where precision counts and the only way to directly influence the implement is to measure where it is and control it While you steer the vehicle TrueGuide passively controls the implement to steer itself to the guidance line The TrueGuide implement guidance system e Is used in conjunction with the Autopilot system e Measures the position of the implement with a second GPS receiver placed on the implement The Autopilot system can then adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on the guidance line TrueGuide works with towed implements for front steered tracked and articulated tractors For operation information see TrueGuide operation page 386 Benefits With TrueGuide you can e Reduce the uncontrolled drift of the implement e Control large implements and minimize the effects of draft due to varying soil conditions and ground moisture with no additional steering hardware e Guide the implement to the line even in the most difficult field patterns e Tow your implement online when its natural tendency is to pull through curves e Prevent unpredictable implement movements due to rolling terrain by adjusting on the go e Minimize the effect of downdraft on severe hillsides by having the Autopilot system pull the implement up the hill and hold the line To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidanc
121. 436 EZ Steer diagnostics 437 Field IQ diagnostics 438 FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 460 CLAN CL MG 460 GreenSeeker diagnostics 460 Row Guidance diagnostics _ 461 Vehicle Sync diagnostics 463 Yield Monitoring diagnostics _ 464 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 431 System diagnostics 19 Diagnostics System diagnostics At the Configuration screen select BY and then tap Diagnostics Each tab contains specific information about the system e Advanced system diagnostics page 432 e CAN Bus data page 433 e Network diagnostics page 433 e Serial Comms page 433 Advanced system diagnostics At the Configuration screen tap E System and then tap Diagnostics 2 Go to the Advanced tab Select the Diagnostics Level This determines how much debugging information is logged in the program files Item Explanation 1 Minimal level of information 6 default Medium level of information 9 Highest level of information 4 At Swath Control Points select whether to hide or show swath control points When the guidance line is a curve it displays on screen as a series of short straight sections joined together Swath control points appear where these line segments meet You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data For m
122. 5 5521 DZ Eersel NL Unlicensed radios in products This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Licensed radios in products This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the condition that this device may not cause harmful interference Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 9 Contents Contents 1 Introduction 222 a 21 About the FM 1000 integrated display a 22 Optional features aaa 22 Compatibility 2 2 2 kakak 22 Installation a Na Bata ah AA a na a BN NI ka aT nng 23 Changes to this document 22 22 ec eeceeecccccccccccecccececeeceeceececeeceeceeceetenees 24 2 Display basics 2 a 25 Display power on off 26 POWER ON ua GANTI AND iit ae eel ce 26 AA AKA 26 Main screens cece cece cece ccc cc ccc cece cece cece cece eee eesteteeteteeeteeeeeees 27 Home SChCCIN naa ag A de ta Ala eis Meets adeno secon es cates eles ded 28 Configuration Selection screen _ 2 2020 e ccc cece ccc ec aaoo aaoi aoaaa 29 Field Selection screen cece e eee e cece daoa cece ceeeeeeeececeeeeeees 32 Configuration screen aaa 33 Run Screen LL eee
123. 73 The system is paused GPS positions are lost The Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions such as no corrections Manual disengagement To manually disengage the system you can Ar Tap green on the screen Press the Engage button on the optional remote control Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor When you turn the steering wheel manually the EZ Steer system disengages It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation To do so a Engageon a line b Turn the wheel until EZ Pilot disengages To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel see Steering performance calibration page 170 When the system is not in use hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it with the lock pin Adjust EZ Steer guidance A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause 366 significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations EZ Steer sys
124. ARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate During the auto tuning process the system tries to control the drive with in the specified RPM limits If the calibration fails the drive may have not been able to meet the limits you entered on the Drive Limits tab For a liquid system it may be helpful to remove all orifices or nozzles to let the system flow freely Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 205 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field lQ system setup 4 When the auto tuning is finished tap Next 5 On the Drive Settings tab turn the master switch on and vary the rates Then adjust the values on this tab if necessary 6 Tap Next On the Info tab the results and drive limits of the calibration are listed This screen is used to show the applicators operating range If the speeds that are displayed are not logical there is a setting issue You may also need to perform a catch test for these numbers to be accurate Flow Calibration WARNING During flow calibration the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death Flow calibration is used to check the accuracy of the e Gear ratio if applicable e Gate settings if applicable e App rate sensor A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate This is done by
125. Applied Rate The rate being applied Current Flow Relation of material being applied to time Control Speed Speed you are moving Master Switch Indicates which switches have been assigned to each section Tap View Error Log to see all errors listed since the last time the log was cleared Tap Section Test to begin a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections The color coding for the sections are Section Number Tab Section Indicator Graphic Section is Section switch is Not indented Red Not armed Off Not indented Gray Not armed On Indented Red Armed Off Indented Green Armed On 438 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Testing section switches Testing the switches from the Diagnostic screen is useful because you do not have to open a field or set a manual speed and manual coverage to make the section switches active At the Operation tab 1 Arm the sections by tapping on the box with the sections you want to turn on 2 Flip the section switches to test that they are working properly and are in the correct order Hardware tab On this tab the control modules are listed with the e Serial number of the module e Position on the implement e Firmware version e Status of CAN connection e Tx Rx number of packets Row Monitor tab The status column of this screen indicates e Disabled Sensor is not detected e Off S
126. B Part number 59043 DB9 F to DB9 F modem cable Some GPS receivers can output serial NMEA messages to an external device For example if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller you can have the receiver send GPS position information to the device The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector Note To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list At the Serial NMEA Messages tab on the GPS Output Settings screen complete the settings and tap OK Setting Explanation Message Rate How often the message is sent Options are Off 1min 30 sec 10 sec 1Hz 3 Hz 5 Hz 10 Hz Output Port What port the message should be sent from Options are Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 115 GPS output settings 5 Connectivity settings Setting Explanation e A ext GPS e B ext GPS e C int GPS e D int GPS e Autopilot Baud Rate Baud rate Options are e 2400 e 4800 e 9600 e 19200 e 38400 e 57600 Maximum CGA Quality How high the quality of the message should be Lat Lon Precision Options are 1 through 10 NMEA messages Some GPS receivers can output NMEA GGA type messages to an external device For example if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller you can have the receiver send GPS position informati
127. Combines 2 222 22 eee cececececccccceeeececeeceees 305 18 Operations 309 Operations overview _ 2 2 aa aaa 310 Operation basics cece cece ccc cc cece ccecccceececececccecsesseccsscecseseeees 311 Main buttons 2 2 2 2 aaa 311 Operational view 2 2 2 2 AA 314 Feature panels 2 2 22 ccccccccccccccecceccececceccecceccecececeececceecececeeeeeeeeeees 314 Engage button a 2 22 cece cece e cece eecccccecececceeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeees 317 Coverage button for logging aa 318 GNSS status ooo ccc cece eee eee eee cece eect eee cece ee eeeeeees 318 On screen lightbar for vehicle aaa 318 On screen lightbar for implement 22 aa 318 Fields 319 Field creation selection 2 00 cece ceecccecccececccecceceetecceetccsetcceeeteesees 319 Implement selection aaa 320 Vehicle selection 2 2 2 2 2 ccc aaa 321 Event summary adjustment _ 2 2 2 aaa 321 Closed field 2 2 dese veo saba dnc at GN GNG AGA G pha DALE HOT BA DLTLALELYLKINN ASA hAD ae 321 Field feature USE aaa la a kaha DA ya d pGL kA sa PNG AA ND Saka 322 Add field features 12 2 2 2 2 aaa 322 Guidance pattern use 222 02 aaa 323 Creating patterns 222 eee ccc cece ccc ne cece cece cece eee aana anaona onan 323 Access paths ana E E E E 323 Existing patterns 220 0000000000000000 00000000000 aaa L cece eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 Guidanc
128. DEALER FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED IN SUCH A CASE PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION Official Language THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS ENGLISH IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL CONTROL Registration To receive information regarding updates and new products please contact your local dealer or visit the Trimble website at www trimble com register Upon registration you may select the newsletter upgrade or new product information you desire Notices This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated ina commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits TRIMBLE is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommend
129. Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen You can now select prescriptions even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field which enables you to load a prescription before driving to the field Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 357 Manual guidance operation 18 Operations Manual guidance operation When you use the Manual Guidance option you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch the virtual lightbar for guidance The Run screen looks similar to when the Autopilot option is installed except that e There is no Autopilot tab on the right e There is no Engage button bes You can still tap WAW to open the Mapping Guidance panel and add field features or create guidance lines 358 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Autopilot system operation Autopilot system operation To engage the Autopilot system you must have e Havea field open in the Run screen e Have an existing pattern you are using e The vehicle within the distance of the guidance line set in the Engage tab See Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 When you are using Autopilot you use the Engage button to automatically steer on the guidance line The Engage button can indicate status and in some cases also control the Autopilot system Indicator Button
130. Edit to change an existing item 4 Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name then tap OK 5 Thenewor edited entry displays in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen Create load a data dictionary The FM 1000 integrated display can load data dictionaries that enable you to select field entry data for example Client Farm Field and Event from a list of predefined values This saves you time from continually entering commonly used categories You can create a data dictionary either through the display or using Farm Works software To create a data dictionary on a computer 1 Onacomputer create a text file The text file can have any name but the file extension must be Axt nu Bb W N a b C Enter the text Copy the txt file to the AgGPS Data Dictionary folder on a USB drive On specific display screens for example at the Client screen the file entries will display To access the entries in the dictionary At the Field Setup screen tap New Tap any list s down arrow to see the available items in the list Select the appropriate item from the list Tap OK Note You can still enter new information as before but these entries are not added to the data dictionary To add items to the data dictionary edit the txt file on an office computer Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 95 Data Dictionary categories 4 Data management 96 FM 1000 I
131. FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 413 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Design tab On the Design tab you choose a section to design and tap Design The Design screen page 415 opens Item Explanation 1 Survey tab page 411 2 Design tab 3 Install tab page 423 4 Section Section chosen to design 5 Select Closest button Tap to choose the closest section 6 Design button Tap to open the Design screen page 415 414 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Design screen At the Design screen you determine the design of the section line you have chosen Settings Tab Item Explanation 1 Section The section you are currently designing 2 Rename button Tap to rename the section 3 Direction list The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed If your survey profile is displayed the other way switch the option shown in the Direction list to the other option in the list Options are e Outlet at Survey Start e Outlet at Survey End 4 Outlet information Elevation of outlet depth 5 Boot Slope information The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD 600 6 Settings tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide
132. Field feature mapping setup Field area feature settings 1 Atthe Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select 4 System and tap Setup The Display Setup screen displays Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup The Feature Mapping screen displays 4 From the Record Line with Coverage list choose e None The line will not automatically record when you begin logging coverage e As Applied e Fence 5 Tap OK Field area feature settings You can use area features to define areas of land as productive or unproductive If the sprayer passes into an area that is defined as unproductive the boom sections turns off This can be useful for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray such as waterways Setting Explanation Name Name ofthe feature Color Select the feature appearance color Area Type Productive Choose this option if the area feature will be a section of land that can be included in area calculations Non productive Chose this option if the area is unproductive land Trigger Warning No Warning No warning displays Entering Area A warning displays while you are inside the area Leaving Area A warning displays while you are outside the area Remote Output Set to Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area See Remote Output setup page 118 and Remote Output operation
133. Heading to Pause Impl Altitude Impl CMR Percent Version 9 25 Revision A Amount of free space on the display s internal memory Current Greenwich Mean Time GPS correction type that the GPS receiver is currently using Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS position in 2 dimensions Current heading of the vehicle in degrees from direct north Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature feature is directly ahead 0 directly behind 180 Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position directly ahead 0 directly behind 180 Current height of the implement Percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 67 Basic system settings Status Item 3 Basic settings Impl Impl Impl Impl Impl Impl Impl Correction Age East Engaged Time GPS Status H Error HDOP Heading Latitude Impl Impl Impl Impl Impl 68 Long Term XTE Longitude Network ID North Nudge Trim Offline Dist Satellites Short term XTE Speed Correction Type Explanation receiver over the last 100 seconds Age of the corrections used by the implement receiver Correction type used by the implement receiver Distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the west of the field origin poin
134. K positioning method to achieve centimeter level accuracy To use the RTK method you must first set up a base station The base station uses a radio link to broadcast RTK corrections to one or more rover receivers Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 473 B 20 Glossary B Benchmark A point on the field with GPS coordinates assigned to it Blade height Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected Boot depth Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches Boundary A line indicating the border surrounding a field C CenterPoint RTK for radio Positioning correction service for radio communication systems Requires access to a base station located within a eight mile radius approximately from your farm An RTK base station sends corrections via a radio transmitter to a mobile receiver attached to your vehicle Works well for farms within 8 miles of an established RTK base station or base station network without line of sight obstructions such hilly terrain or an abundance of trees CenterPoint RTX Positioning correction service for satellite communication systems Delivers GPS or GNSS enabled corrections via satellite directly to your receiver Does not require a base station or cellular data plan CenterPoint RTX corrections are provided on as subscription basis CenterPoint RTX for cellu
135. Loads of grains harvested through the season for a field After the harvest is complete use the Farm Works Mapping software to track loads in the office See Load tracking page 430 e Variety of grains harvested throughout the season for a field that has an associated planting Variety map After harvest is complete use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison See Variety tracking page 429 Yield Monitoring panel To access the Yield Monitoring panel at the Run screen tap sf The panel contains several views that you can navigate between Crop summary and details The initial view shows each crop being harvested and summary information for each one Tap a crop summary section to see more details about the crop To change the status items that show for a crop at the Crop Name view tap Edit Overview 428 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Yield Monitoring operation Crop Name Summary info Summary Info Summary info po pa C ir Overview list about crop ia Choose Status Items tcit Overview KJ Yield Senso se seno Calibration N Calteation Tea Variety tracking Fora field that has an associated planting variety map Yield Monitoring enables you to track the variety of grains harvested throughout the season Variety map When you are plantin
136. MVEL components licensed under the Apache 2 0 Llicense The source is available from http code google com p mvel codehause org Google Guava components listed under the Apache 2 0 License The source is available from http code google com p guava libraries MapQuest content licensed under the Open Data Commons Database License DbCL The source is available from http developer mapquest com APACE LICENSE Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through Section 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 5096 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but n
137. P XP G2 VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence After the satellite signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown Note Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down Otherwise this feature will not work Convergence Threshold Disabled GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Frequencies tab enter the settings for Frequency and Baud Rate See Frequencies and baud rate page 114 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask RTK Base Station Filter RTK Base Station CMR ID Enabled Disabled Can be edited if Filter is enabled Scintillation Filter On or Off On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings 6 On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 7 When you have completed the settings tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 107
138. R FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS Limitation or Liability TRIMBLE S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FORTHE PRODUCT OR SOFTWARE LICENSE TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS BUSINESS INTERRUPTION LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN 8 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU PLEASE NOTE THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN THOSE JURISDICTIONS E G MEMBER STATES OF THE EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA IN WHICH PRODUCT WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL
139. Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card If you use the EZ Remote joystick you do not need to tap buttons on the display This improves your accuracy when you select buttons and gives you faster reaction times You can program the EZ Remote joystick to controls the functions of the FM 1000 integrated display Note The functions available to assign to each button depend on which optional features plugins are activated on the display 1 4 5 6 7 Connect the EZ Remote joystick into into Port B on the back of the display An EZ Remote joystick icon automatically displays on the Configuration screen At the Configuration screen select EZ Remote and then tap Setup The EZ Remote Assignment screen displays Configure each key for the function you want to control remotely You can also adjust the brightness of the LED joystick buttons On the EZ Remote joystick press the first button you wish to program The Function Assignment screen displays Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick Tap Set and then tap OK The Keypad Assignment screen displays again Repeat steps 2 through 5 to program more buttons as required When completed tap OK Note You can configure the EZ Remote control joystick while operating in a field From the Run screen tap A and then follow the previous steps 50 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system sett
140. TK operator Setting Explanation Server Name Address RTK VRS CORS base station broadcast name Server Port Number Base station port number Mount Point Base station mount point User Name Assigned username Password Assigned password 4 Ifyou are inside the USA and Subscribe to the AT amp T or Verizon data plans and have a DCM 300G modem tap OK The Configuration screen displays Supply your own SIM card and have a DCM 300G modem enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider then tap OK Note The DCM 300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 127 DCM 300 Modem 5 Connectivity settings 128 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Field feature mapping setup In this chapter You can place features on the screen that represent points areas and lines in your field Field feature mapping settings 130 Mapping location setting 132 Recording with coverage 132 Field area feature settings 133 Line feature settings 134 Boundary feature settings 134 Point feature settings 136 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 129 Field feature mapping settings 6 Field feature mapping setup Field feature mapping settings You
141. USER GUIDE FM 1000 Application Corporate Office Trimble Navigation Limited 935 Stewart Drive Sunnyvale CA 94085 USA www trimble com Agriculture 10368 Westmoor Drive Westminster Colorado 80021 USA 800 361 1249 toll free in USA 1 937 245 5154 Phone 1 937 233 9441 Fax www trimble com Email trimble_support trimble com Legal Notices 2015 Trimble Navigation Limited All rights reserved Trimble the Globe amp Triangle logo EZ Boom EZ Guide EZ Pilot EZ Steer FarmWorks Software FmX GreenSeeker OmniSTAR Trimble Ready Tru Count Air Clutch and WM Drain are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited registered in the United States and in other countries Autopilot AutoSense CenterPoint CFX 750 Connected Farm EZ Remote Farm Works Farm Works Mapping Farm Works Software Field IQ FieldLevel FM 750 FM 1000 FreeForm LiquiBlock NextSwath Rawson RTX T3 TMX 2050 TrueGuide TrueTracker VRS Now VRS WM Topo XCN 2050 xFill and Zephyr are trademarks of Trimble Navigation Limited For STL support the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library Copyright 1994 Hewlett Packard Company Copyright 1996 97 Silicon Graphics Computer Systems Inc Copyright 1997 Moscow Center for SPARC Technology Portions Copyright 2009 Nokia Corporation and or its subsidiary ies Portions Copyright 2003 Bitstream Inc All other trademarks are
142. a field error YIELD MONITOR Load changed on YM2000 Verify that the crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000 YM 2000 reported a load error YIELD MONITOR Cannot Detect YM2000 Serial Port state XX Version 9 25 Revision A Lost connection with YM2000 yield monitor FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 471 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics 472 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Glossary A Ar line A guidance line you define on your field The A line is defined fixing a point then heading in a direction Guidance lines are for use with automated steering AB line A guidance line you define on your field You set a beginning point A and an end point B You use guidance lines for use with automated steering Accelerometer A device that measures non gravitational acceleration Access path A space between your guidance lines They can be useful if there is road or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths through the middle of your field Aggressiveness The measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes Autonomous GNSS positioning Autonomous GNSS positioning uses no corrections The rover receiver calculates its position using only the GNSS signals it receives This method does not have high absolute accuracy but the relative accuracy is comparable to the other methods RTK GNSS positioning uses the RT
143. a Compensation and tap OK The Autopilot Roll Antenna Compensation screen displays 2 Enter the appropriate settings and tap OK Make sure the value entered for antenna height and distance from centerline match those entered under Implement Geometry Setting Explanation Antenna Height Above a Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface Ground b Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna c Enter this value in the Antenna Height Above Ground entry box Antenna Distance from a Place the tractor and implement on a flat level surface centerline b Measure the distance from the centerline of the implement to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna c Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from centerline entry box and indicate whether it is left or right of the centerline Note Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as negative numbers The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction Roll Offset a Choose the method that best matches the conditions to calculate the roll offset Coulter wheel track offset method page 255 or Flag offset method page 256 b Enter the average offset value in the Roll Offset entry box Implement Position Select the offline direction depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right Coulter wheel track offset method WARNING The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Propor
144. aDonna aoan 231 Application width 1 2 0 0 20 2 aaa 231 Hardi 5500 and 6500 22 aaa 231 SOOO a oases cect ee et ace 232 RAVEN ccs thet eee a ta eh ten on a O ae rote 232 Configure the controller 2 2 2 2 cece cece ccc ce cece cc cece cecceceeeeeeeetecteetetteteetees 233 Rawson and New Leader cccccccccccccccecccccecceceeeceececettteeseteeteeeeeeeeees 234 Using the controller 22 aaa 234 Non GPS mode o 22 2 aaa 234 Loss of communication aa 235 Special note on using a Rawson Accu Rate controller aa 235 Vaderstad Control Station aaa 235 Additional controller setup 2 2 0 0 00 00 cc aaa 235 NA Ana E lee te den acetact adds Chea aa dosh aeewe EEE st whaddce eel cens nce eed 236 Coverage mapping aaa 236 PFESCrIDUONS 228 cee ec debe execs cave La NOD ubexsceeedoaeteivasuddcbbocs Lum h E SE ES 236 Target and applied rates 2222 cece ccc n cence aao aooaa aooaa aaor oaa 236 Units 236 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Contents 13 TrueGuide setup a 237 TrueGuide system 2 2 2 Ak 238 PAN 238 Reguirement renen ea a et Pete r ee er eee Bete et 238 Implement setup and selection 2 2 00 0 00 0 aaa 239 TrueGuide setup 2 2 2 eee cece cece ence ceeeceecceeeeeceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 240 System aggressiveness settings 22 00 2222 eee cece cece cece ccc ccceececeecceeeee
145. ab if you want to record logs select Record Logs 7 On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 8 When you have completed the settings tap OK 102 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings CenterPoint RTX fs GPS receiver settings CenterPoint RTX fs fast start is a satellite based subscription correction service 1 At the Configuration screen tap Bee GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX fs FastRestart On or off FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for OmniSTAR HP XP G2 VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence After the satellite signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown Convergence Threshold Disabled GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Frequencies tab enter the settings for Fre
146. able Note To stop the plow cylinders from working excessively when stopped you can add a value for Stopped Deadband Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 287 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup 288 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Yield Monitoring setup In this chapter Yield Monitoring obtains data from mass flow and moisture sensors to gather data and define high and low productivity areas of Yield Monitoring functionality 290 a field during harvest Yield Monitoring best practices _ 291 Yield Monitoring settings 294 Combine settings 220 20 222 294 Operation settings 295 Crop settings 296 Map settings 297 Sensor output settings 297 Options settings 297 Yield sensor moisture sensor calibration 297 Third party display instructions _ 300 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 289 Yield Monitoring functionality 17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring functionality Yield Monitoring enables you to accurately view map and record crop yield and moisture data in real time during harvest to immediately understand how well your crop performed Supported yield monitoring types range from EOM sensors both CAN and Serial to Trimble s full Yield Monitoring CAN solution Yield Monitoring functions include e
147. action occurs at the correct location For this calibration drive the vehicle along a line and back using Remote Output to mark points on the ground If the remote output is correctly calibrated the points that you create when driving in both directions will be close together To calibrate implement lead time 1 Set front back offset page 121 2 Calibrate front back offset page 122 3 Set lead time page 122 Set front back offset Configure the correct front back offset 1 Accurately measure either of these as appropriate e Autopilot systems The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground e Manual guidance systems The distance between the antenna center point and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 121 Remote Output setup 5 Connectivity settings 2 3 At the Configuration screen tap Implement Setup Enter the measurement as the F B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen Calibrate front back offset 1 2 3 10 Create a straight AB Line At the Remote Output screen set the Lead Time to 0 Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the
148. age status of each row on the implement e Green Engaged e Gray Section closed due to overlap e Red Not engaged or section manually turned off Field IQ master switch box functions Note All systems must have a Field IQ master switch box Item Setting Explanation 1 Increment decrement Increases or decreases the applied amount by a set amount switch the amount is set in the Setup screen Rate tab 2 Rate switch Preset Rate 1 preset Rate 2 or Manual rate 3 LED indicator e Red Unit is powered but not communicating with the FM 1000 integrated display e Green Unit is powered and communicating with the FM 1000 integrated display e Yellow Unit is initializing communications with the FM 1000 integrated display Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 351 Field IQ operation 18 Operations Item Setting Explanation 4 Automatic Manual You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode while section switch traveling e Automatic mode The FM 1000 integrated display automatically opens and closes sections when entering areas of overlap non apply zones or crossing boundaries e Manual mode The sections are controlled by the user using the Field IQ system 5 Master switch e 5a Jump start position The same functions as in Master On are active plus the system is overridden to usea preset control speed the speed is set in the Setup screen Override tab e 5b On position The sectio
149. agnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics Moisture Sensor Item Explanation Sensor Value Percent of moisture and the raw sensor value Can be used by support or engineering if troubleshooting is necessary Temperature Yield Monitor error messages State 1 During boot up 60 Series 1 Ensure that the correct cable is installed Mostur unit 2 Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system Head unit diagnostics serial port Port A B Is there another value other Armrest unit than zero for CAN messages 70 e 3 For 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Moisture sensor Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM 1000 integrated display CC1 unit has been changed Cab unit ae 4 For 70 Series Combines Change the Crop Type in the command Corner post center and make sure it changes on the FM 1000 integrated display YM 2000 5 Raise the head up or down to see if the display will show a change CANNOT AGTER YM for header height 2000 a Serial port 6 If step 1 and step 2 resolve the issue log field data Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 465 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics State 2 During boot up Cause Actions Never sees the armrest header unit moisture sensor or reports which one is not visible by the display 1 Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B Is there another valu
150. ak ABO ND E E DU ALE bee sland ERNEA EEE aeaa 83 Archives tolder coscisnsscttet oat bed e uses a r Healey leceeebact eaten 84 Autopilot folder cc 84 Datatolder a NAGANA AA tet Steen ad GN eeehuecceteue eens 84 Data Dictionary folder 2 02 02 aaa 91 Diagnostics folder aaa 91 Prescriptions folder aaa 92 Summaries folder aa 92 Task Data folder 000000000000000 0o00 0000000 aaao a aoaaa oaaao aaaea aoaaa 94 Data Dictionary categories 94 Default data entry categories 2 2 2 a 94 Edit data entry categories aa aaonannann aooaa nnaonaonannarnannaronurnnnnannu 94 Create load a data dictionary cece cece c cece cceecccceccceceeccetecseetecees 95 5 Connectivity settings cc cece ccc ec eee ceceeceeceeeceeeess 97 GPS receiver settings 00 0 e eee cece eee eee cece cece cece cece cece ceeeeeeenaes 98 AgRemote Interface c cece c cece cece cece cece eee eceeeeeceeeeeceeseeeeeees 99 Basic correction settings 2 0 0 0 222 lee ccee cece cece cece cece cece cece ce ceeeeeeeeees 100 GenterPOint RIK t nc 222622 toss ce e a NINA LALA LOL ADEN hinaan Um Sencha 101 CenterPoint RTX fs 103 CenterPoint RTX sc 105 CenterPoint RTX ss cece cece cece cece cc ccccceceececeececeecececceeeeeteceeeees 106 OmniSTAR HP XP G2 VBS LL 108 OmniSTAR HP XP G2 20 2 00 e cece cece ccccccccccceeeecececcceetrec
151. al In the size entry box enter the size of the design Tap Record Section to begin recording a section and then drive To pause recording tap Pause Section The Record button changes to white when activated If you have created a section you want to remove tap Delete Section and choose the section from the list that displays Note For the most efficient method it is recommended that the end point is where the tile line is to be connected to a main or outlet To add a manual survey point at a distance different from the normal survey distance tap Manual Data Point Tap Record again to stop the recording If you create a benchmark you want to remove tap 7 X and choose the benchmark from the list that displays Set survey height offset To set the Survey Height Offset 1 2 3 4 5 412 At the Home screen tap The Configuration screen displays Select ye WM Drain and tap Setup On the tile plow raise the boot as high as it will raise Measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground Enter this value into the Survey Height Offset entry box Note It is recommended that you change the survey point spacing to 1 5m 5 feet This will then FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality record the survey points every 1 5M 5 feet and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface 6 Tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A
152. alid selection Please select one of the The user clicked on the wrong line in the Yield calibration types below this item Monitor Calibration menu No Connection Please check connections User attempted to calibrate a device that is not connected Failed to detect yield sensor Some setup parameters cannot be edited because the yield monitor is not connected Yield sensor has not uploaded configuration Some setup parameters cannot be edited into FmX because they have not been received from the yield monitor Trimble Yield Monitor not found check cabling Yield monitor not detected and fuses check Yield Monitor Setup Trimble Moisture Sensor not found check Moisture sensor not detected cabling and fuses check Yield Monitor Setup One or more Yield Monitor devices were A device has been disconnected disconnected Moisture out of range Check the sensor is Bad reading received from moisture sensor positioned properly and not being struck by paddles and there is no free water or wet soil on sensor surface The label cannot be oriented along the same Invalid selection in IMU sensor orientation axis as the connectors setup Choose the options that match the Trimble Attempting to perform roll calibration before Yield Monitor s mounting orientation setting a valid orientation Would you like to calibrate the roll sensor For accurate Roll Offset calibration you must User did not turn the vehi
153. along with any other distinctive brand features of MapQuest or its suppliers All use by You of Trademarks shall inure to the benefit of MapQuest Further You shall not a display a Trademark as the most prominent element on any page of Your website application or paper map b display a Trademark in a manner that is misleading defamatory infringing libelous disparaging obscene or otherwise objectionable to MapQuest as determined by MapQuest in its sole discretion or c remove distort or alter any element of a Trademark DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND MAPQUEST CONTENT ARE PROVIDED ONAN AS IS AND AS AVAILABLE BASIS MAPQUEST DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ACCURACY OR NON INFRINGEMENT MAPQUEST DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR CONTENT OR ANY PORTION THEREOF IS OR WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS OR ERRORS OR THAT ANY SUCH DEFECTS OR ERRORS WILL BE CORRECTED VIRUS FREE ABLE TO OPERATE ON AN UNINTERRUPTED BASIS MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR CAPABLE OF BEING INTEGRATED INTO OR WITH YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM APPLICATIONS OR NETWORK FURTHER MAPQUEST DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR ANY PORTION THEREOF IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS ACCURACY QUALITY RELIABILITY OR OTHERWISE THIS DISCLAIMER
154. alues such as Nitrogen Use Efficiency have default values that are formula specific You can change any value by tapping the entry box Note You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of the CumGDD F or similar fields For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1 3 GrtPIns GDD OKState is Cumulative Growing Degree Days Base 50F For specific algorithm instructions visit www GreenSeeker com 8 Tap OK 9 Goto the Chart tab and enter the settings Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 371 GreenSeeker operation 18 Operations Setting Explanation Limit Enabled Disabled Max Limit If necessary enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations Min Limit If necessary enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations Note Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller 10 Review the application chart for each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections and or application equipment settings 11 Tap OK 12 Tap the Output tab 13 From the Material Type list select either Granular or Liquid 14 Tap OK 372 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations ISOBUS operation ISOBUS operation With ISOBUS you can use the FM 1000 integrated display to control an ISO certified implement without an additional disp
155. alues for Slew Time and Overshoot for the Turn Left phase Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 157 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup a Adjust the New Gain if required b Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test The test is for the stop to stop position c Tap Tum Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and low overshoot percentage less than 5 896 6 Repeat Step 5 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew 7 When you locate the best gain value either e Tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory e Tap Cancel to restart the calibration procedure Roll antenna compensation calibration Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement It is recommended that these offsets are minimized whenever possible At the Vehicle Calibration screen select Roll Antenna Correction and tap OK The Autopilot Roll Antenna Compensation screen displays Precalibration Before configuring the antenna compensation make sure that e The Autopilot system is completely and correctly set up e GPS corrections are set up e You read this section carefully e If multiple GPS technologies will be used for example RTK and SBAS use the technology with the high
156. ance screen select the Step 2 tab Adjust the aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S turns To make e More aggressive turns increase the aggressiveness e Less aggressive turns decrease the aggressiveness Angle per Turn calibration for EZ Steer system Angle per Turn is a course adjustment of the angle that the wheels turn through during one full rotation of the steering wheel If the setting is too low the system may require several attempts to reach the line To calibrate the EZ Steer system and set the correct steering performance parameters complete the following steps with the vehicle moving forward along the A B line Note Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to optimize EZ Steer performance for each step in the calibration 1 Atthe EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen select Steering Performance The EZ Steer Steering Performance screen displays 2 Select the Step 1 tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 175 EZ Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup 3 With the vehicle moving forward along the A B line a Nudge the vehicle left or right 1 m 3 from the A B line b Engage the EZ Steer system 4 Adjust the Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged the vehicle moves close to the guidance line To make e More aggressive turns d
157. and then tap Setup The WM Drain Setup screen displays On the Implement tab from the Control Type list select Pitch Control Tap Measurements The Tile Plow Measurements screen displays Enter all measurements as accurately as possible to the nearest 0 25 inch 1 cm Tap OK to return to the WM Drain Setup screen On the Implement tab enter values for Height Gain and Slope Transition N D UW PF WN Calibrate the roll offset Step 2 Set up the system Inthe Implement tab enter the values for Height Gain and Slope Transition Distance See Implement control settings page 279 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 283 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup Step 3 Calibrate Roll Offset 1 Atthe Configuration screen select J 1 WM Drain and then tap Diagnostics The Drainage Diagnostics screen displays 2 Complete the roll offset calibration using one of two methods Method 1 1 Park the system on a known level surface Ensure the boot is flat on the ground 2 Note the Roll value on the Drainage Diagnostics screen 3 At the Tile Measurements screen for the Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value For example e Current angle reading 07 e IMD 600 Roll reading 0 2 e RollOffset 0 9 4 Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered reading to settle on a stable value e Ifthe Roll value is 0 0 1 the roll offset calculation
158. apers off This spike and decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs and the system disengages The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering can be engaged again If you set a e High level of sensitivity the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer before you can re engage e Low level of sensitivity the system will take longer to disengage and you will be able to re engage more quickly Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is unacceptable under all conditions Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough In either case manual override may cease to function correctly On some platforms you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not detect any steering wheel motion It is vital that you avoid this Calibration steps 1 Atthe Vehicle Calibration screen select ManualOverride and tap OK The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen displays 2 Test the current manual override s
159. ar a Tap the appropriate number field b Enter the required values Default 3 cm per LED 1 per LED Lightbar Purpose Choose the purpose of the lightbar Look ahead time The distance ahead of the vehicle that the lightbar will use for LED guidance and offline distance Default O seconds Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 59 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Power management Taas To manage power you can set the display to dim the backlight or turn off the display after a pre set period of inactivity Setting Explanation Turn Off Backlight Length of time before the backlight turns off Turn Off System Length of time before system turns off 60 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Restore default settings You can reset the FM 1000 integrated display to its default values This can be useful if e You made changes to the display settings The results are poor but you cannot determine which setting was the cause e You move the display from one vehicle to another Note If you restore the defaults the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset To restore the default settings 1 Atthe Configuration screen select the System option and then tap Setup The Display Setup screen displays 2 Tap Default A confirmation screen displays 3 Tap Yes The default settings are restored V
160. ary under Diagnostics Screenshots Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 39 Screen shots 2 Display basics 40 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Basic settings In this chapter Unlocks and upgrades 42 Activate features plugins for use _ 45 Basic system settings 2 200 0 46 Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Basic settings include e Upgrades Upgrading the system firmware or features you have purchased and activated e Unlocks Features you purchase are included with a passcode so that you can unlock them on your system Activation for use After you have unlocked a feature you can activate it for use for your operation You can also deactivate features in order to activate other features for use FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 41 Unlocks and upgrades 3 Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades Unlocks are passcodes you enter to activate a feature or service on the display after you have purchase it Upgrades are firmware updates to the existing firmware or feature that you have already activated 42 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades Unlock features plugins To unlock activate some plugins you must enter the activation password or unlock If you do not have an activation password contact your local reseller You can activate
161. as aha to ee te eee Aten oe een uae E a MAK na nE ae tel 396 WM Drain operation _ 2 2 2 2 c coe ec c cece cece cece ccc eeecceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeee 410 Yield Monitoring operation 22 2 2 2 2 aaa 428 Yield Monitoring panel 0 00 ccc 00 aaa 428 Variety tracking 0 00000000000000 aa 429 Load tracking aaa 430 PIETA AA 431 System diagnostics a aaa 432 Advanced system diagnostics aaa 432 CAN BUs data 22 2472030384bebyho4 h3 YhONINAL Said nla deeb sduedevesaeeseecesgetiadedcedecstteax 433 Configuration data aaa 433 Network diagnostics aaa 433 Serial COMMS 2NA 433 Autopilot diagnostics aa 434 AA S25 434 Guidance tab aa kaaa 435 Steering tab 22000 aaa 435 Details tab a 436 Autopilot Faults screen ee eee e nec cccecccececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 436 Warning screen cece cece cece ce cece cece cece eee eee eee ceceeeeeeeeeecseees 436 EZ Pilot diagnostics 0 0 0 00 aaa 436 EZ Steer diagnostics l l a aaa 0a 0an cece cece cece cccccecceceeceeceecececceceeceeeeeceeeeeeeees 437 Field IQ diagnostics 00 c cece ccc aaa 438 Operations tab 2 2 a aka 438 Hardware tae 26 Aa es CANG ee ce a 439 Row Monitor tab 2 2 2 0 aaa 439 Field IQ faults and troubleshooting ccc cece cece ee eceeecccccceeceeeeeees 440 Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting
162. ase height offset Increase height offset 7 Choice of Coarse or Fine increments for changing height offset Installation ditch cleaning Autoslope mode You can use the Autoslope mode for e For tile applications The system runs on both self propelled tile machines and pull type plows towed behind a tractor e For ditching applications You can use any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by the WM Drain system Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 423 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Note When the system is not running in Autoslope mode the on screen or LB25 lightbar will guide to any existing A B line This means you can use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a consistent spacing 1 Atthe Run screen tap J 3 to open the WM Drain panel 2 Go to the Install tab of the panel Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning Control Explanation Survey Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design Design Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design Note A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location Mode e Autoslope Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab e Slope Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage From the starting point the
163. at two specific wavelengths to measure the light reflected by plants e Analyzes the reflected light and determines the nitrogen level NDVI normalized difference vegetation index of the plants below e Sends the data to the FM 1000 integrated display The display sends the correct application rates to either e Theapplicator s rate controller using Serial Rate Control e The Field IQ system The required amount of fertilizer is applied as you pass over the crop As materials are applied the system logs the e NDVI e Target rate e Applied rate Note Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the display do not respond with an As Applied value For operational information see GreenSeeker operation page 368 Care and maintenance To maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping system e Each day or during applicator re fill check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source windows for dust and dirt and wipe clean with a soft rag e Do not leave the GreenSeeker system outdoors during extreme weather conditions Wide temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals and may reduce the operating life of the system e DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward Doing so may allow water to collect around the windows and gaskets causing seal failures in those areas Also direct sunlight can in some cases focus enough energ
164. atabase under different terms or to stop distributing or making available the Database is reserved Note that this Database may be multiple licensed and so You may have the choice of using alternative licenses for this Database Subject to Section 10 4 all other rights not expressly granted by Licensor are reserved 4 0 Conditions of Use 4 1 The rights granted in Section 3 above are expressly made subject to Your complying with the following conditions of use These are important conditions of this License and if You fail to follow them You will be in material breach of its terms 4 2 Notices If You Publicly Convey this Database any Derivative Database or the Database as part of a Collective Database then You must a Do so only under the terms of this License or another license permitted under Section 4 4 b Include a copy of this License or as applicable a license permitted under Section 4 4 or its Uniform Resource Identifier URI with the Database or Derivative Database including both in the Database or Derivative Database and in any relevant documentation and c Keep intact any copyright or Database Right notices and notices that refer to this License d If it is not possible to put the required notices in a particular file due to its structure then You must include the notices in a location such as a relevant directory where users would be likely to look for it 4 3 Notice for using output Contents Creating and Usi
165. ate a survey page 392 qA TrueGuide system See TrueGuide operation page 386 9 Vehicle Sync See Vehicle Sync page 260 ii TrueTracker system See TrueTracker operation page 383 jh WM Drain See WM Drain operation page 410 sf Yield Monitoring See Yield Monitoring operation page 428 316 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Operation basics Engage button A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared The Engage button displays on the Run screen when you are using an automatic steering system such as e Autopilot system operation page 359 e EZ Pilot system operation page 362 e EZ Steer system operation page 365 Indicator Button Explanation Tap to O The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line the guidance line to engage on it Ready to Engage yellow The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance guidance line line The vehicle is not ready to N A You cannot tap this button engage on the line because the It is an indicator only guidance line is too far from the
166. ate and Section Control Module to be calibrated The message Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration The Field Q Calibration screen displays that includes the serial number of the rate and section control module you just selected Select Flow Calibration The Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration screen displays 4 Select the Control tab and complete the settings for e Allowable Error e Gain e Minimum Response Note For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer see the Support Note Field IQ Crop Input Control System For Sprayers and Spreaders 5 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen 6 Select Flow Calibration The Granular Calibration screen displays 7 At the Calibrate tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Gate Height Setting Current height of the gate opening If you entered a gate height measurement during setup you must enter a measurement here Staff Encoder Constant 8 Tap Calculate to calibrate the constant The Calibration Constant Calculator screen displays 9 Complete the settings Setting Explanation Gate Width Width of the gate opening Drag Chain Distance Per Rev The length of the drag chain per turn of the drag shaft 210 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field Q 10 11 12 13 14 15 Setting Explanation
167. ate by 1 2 To see the second detailed view of the material Rows To go to the Row detail view page 350 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 349 Field IQ operation 18 Operations Depending on the material the following buttons display on the second page of the material details View Page 2 Buttons Tap to Bin Go to the Virtual Bin Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the bin settings Seed Disc Fill the seed disk Arm Pump Enable Field IQ to control the pump Gate Setup Go to the Gate Setup screen Density Go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the current product 2 Return to the previous detailed view Rows To go to the Row detail view page 350 Row detail view To see detailed information on the rows tap Rows The color of the row numbers indicate how far off target the rows are applying e Green Rows are applying on target e Red Rows are applying off target e Black Rows have been manually turned off e White Rows have been turned off automatically by the system To view more rows tap the arrow buttons GO gt 350 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation To return to the previous view tap gp Section control view To open the section control view on the Run screen tap in the lower left corner of the screen The section control view shows the eng
168. ated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Status Item Water Management functionality Explanation Longitude Longitude as recorded by the GPS receiver Network ID Network ID of the GPS receiver which must be the same as the base receiver network ID North Difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP Offset Relative offset in the vertical component Offset X Relative offset in the X axis Offset Y Relative offset in the Y axis Satellites Amount of satellites in the GPS GLONASS solution Section Line Number Line number selected for design in AutoSlope This is the current section line being recorded in the field Speed Current speed of the vehicle Survey Cut Fill Cut fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been processed in AutoPlane Target Height Up Height the blade will attempt to reach This is the design height the offset When the blade reaches the target height the arrows turn green Difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane LTP VDOP Vertical dilution of precision Vertical component of PDOP Vertical Error Estimate Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel GPS receiver Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 407 Water Management functionality Dual scraper controls Aw OF 18 Operations Blade heig
169. ation of this License 9 2 If You are not in breach of the terms of this License the Licensor will not terminate Your rights under it 9 3 Unless terminated under Section 9 1 this License is granted to You for the duration of applicable rights in the Database 9 4 Reinstatement of rights If you cease any breach of the terms and conditions of this License then your full rights under this License will be reinstated a Provisionally and subject to permanent termination until the 60th day after cessation of breach b Permanently on the 60th day after cessation of breach unless otherwise reasonably notified by the Licensor or c Permanently if reasonably notified by the Licensor of the violation this is the first time You have received notice of violation of this License from the Licensor and You cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Persons subject to permanent termination of rights are not eligible to be a recipient and receive a license under Section 4 8 9 5 Notwithstanding the above Licensor reserves the right to release the Database under different license terms or to stop distributing or making available the Database Releasing the Database under different license terms or stopping the distribution of the Database will not withdraw this License or any other license that has been or is required to be granted under the terms of this License and this License will continue in full force and effect un
170. ative Databases If You Publicly Use a DerivativeDatabase or a Produced Work from a Derivative Database You must also offer to recipients of the Derivative Database or Produced Work a copy ina machine readable form of a The entire Derivative Database or b A file containing all of the alterations made to the Database or the method of making the alterations to the Database such as an algorithm including any additional Contents that make up all the differences between the Database and the Derivative Database The Derivative Database under a or alteration file under b must be available at no more than a reasonable production cost for physical distributions and free of charge if distributed over the internet 4 7 Technological measures and additional terms a This License does not allow You to impose except subject to Section 4 7 b any terms or any technological measures on the Database a Derivative Database or the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents that alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights b Parallel distribution You may impose terms or technological measures on the Database a Derivative Database or the whole ora Substantial part of the Contents a Restricted Database in contravention of Section 4 74 a only if You also make a copy of the Database or a Derivative Database available t
171. auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared TrueGuide uses a second GPS receiver on the implement to enable the Autopilot system to pull the implement onto the guidance line To open the TrueGuide panel at the Run screen tap X Control Explanation Trim Aggr Adjust aggressiveness during operation Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line e To increase the response to move the implement back to the line increase aggressiveness e To smooth the response to the implement moving offline decrease aggressiveness The recommended settings for default values are e For steep slopes 10 3096 150 e For slow speed applications 125 e For normal operation 100 e For high speed applications 58 mph 33 TrueGuide engagement On When the right hand button displays ON the Autopilot system is engaged Auto When the right hand button displays AUTO the TrueGuide system is engaged Off Tap to disengage the TrueGuide system 386 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations TrueGuide operation Using TrueGuide 1 Atthe Run screen on the TrueGuide panel tap O vettow The right hand button changes to ON and the TrueGuide status changes to Waiting The Autopilot system acquires the line before transitioning to the TrueGuide system The TrueGuide system status remains at Waitin
172. awson See Rawson and New Leader page Accu Plant and Accu Rate 234 Tyler See Flex Air setup page 230 Flex Air Vaderstad Control Station page 235 Control Station 228 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 12 Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup Variable rate controller setup 1 Atthe Configuration screen select 7 Serial Rate Control and then tap Setup The Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen displays 2 Atthe Comm tab complete the settings Note The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected Controller The make of the controller Port The display port the controller is connected to Active Channel If displayed enter the channel name Send Rate as Unit of measure 3 Select the Rates tab and enter the settings Default Rate Step Size The increment for adjustment Rate Snapping Enabled disabled 4 Select the Sections tab 5 Enter the number of sections Then tap OK After you have selected a type of variable rate controller the FM 1000 integrated display initiates communications with the controller each time you open a field Communications are terminated when you close the field If the display cannot communicate with the controller e Amessage displays identifying the problem If the controller type you chose has a configurable baud rate the error message includes details of the
173. ay User Guide 155 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Error Explanation to successfully finish Make sure the vehicle is moving at least 0 8 kph 0 5 mph during each calibration cycle Steering Close To End Stops Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering angle approached the end stops Retry and ifthe problem persists instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected Retry and ifthe problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly No GPS AGPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure No Steering Response Detected During the calibration cycle insufficient movement was sensed for the calibration to complete If the problem persists the hydraulic installation could be faulty Unable To Determine DZ Try Again A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone Retry and if the problem persists contact Technical Support Software Problem Detected The software was unable to complete the calibration due to insufficient movement of the vehicle If th
174. bar for implement There can be more than one row of lights depending on the feature plugin that is being used The second row shows where the implement is in relation to the guidance line See Implement on screen lightbar page 384 318 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Fields Fields The FM 1000 integrated display Data Dictionary organizes all work preformed based on a Client Farm Field Event structure Field creation selection 1 To change the vehicle or implement tap switch next to the item and select the one you want 2 Tap ok The Field Selection screen displays e For existing client farm field or events select the appropriate choice from each list e To create new items tap New Item Explanation Client Select the client The Farm list will show only farms associated with this client Farm Select the farm The Field list will show only fields associated with this farm Field Tap New Enter the new field name Event Select the event Event Attributes Tap to add more information for record keeping Variety Setup Tap to add and edit information on the variety of products that can be distributed from the implement tap Hybrid Setup 3 Tap OK to enter the Run screen After you create the field select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field See Field creation selection page 319 Event Attributes screen Category Explana
175. behavior if you need to change the settings Setting Explanation Operator Time Out If the steering system is engaged and there has been no Operator interaction with the display for longer than the operator timeout period a message displays on the screen If you acknowledge the message within 30 seconds the system does not disengage Otherwise the EZ Pilot system steering disengages Minimum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit the system disengages Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit the system disengages Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit the system disengages Coverage log Displays on the Run screen to show what areas have been applied 168 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Pilot assisted steering system Setting Explanation e Select When Engage
176. between pulses Design Trigger Color What color are automatic pulses on the screen Manual Trigger Color Duration Within Distance How accurately engaged on line before pulse generates How long does pulse last e Trigger Limits What are the maximum number of pulses after the first one What color are manual pulses on the screen Setting Explanation Lead Time See Calibrate implement lead time page 121 Distance The distance in meters decimal feet feet and inches The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance The first pulse occurs at the A point Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns Duration The duration of the pulse in milliseconds ms Within Line Distance The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online If the vehicle is more than this distance offline no pulse occurs Design Trigger Color Manual Trigger Color Trigger Limits The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button If you select Nore the pulses triggered by the system are unlimited If you select Edit enter the maximum number of pulses per swath that will be triggered after you pass the A point Version 9 25 Revision A
177. blade will move by large increments Fine The blade will move by small increments 4 Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment pe Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment Design Tap to open the Plane Editor Here you can edit the design plane Bench Of Re Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re bench Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Delete Benchmark Removes any benchmark on the field You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it Logging Tap to log coverage This shows on the map where you have been dependent on your implement width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information Auto Engages automatic blade height control e Starts the slope calculation 398 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Button Explanation e Resets the height e Resets the cut fill Define a plane You can define a plane in the Plane Editor screen The controls on the Plane Editor screen enable you to either e Design a field slope and orientation e Set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile To define a plane you can use e Asingle point e Multiple benchmarks Use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope requirements 4 Item Name Explanation 1 Pivot The single benchmark where the plane is defined All slopes will pivot Benc
178. can place field features in the field while driving to define on the screen points of interest or areas to avoid There are three types of field feature e Point A single point in the field such as a tree e Line A straight or curved line in a field such as a fence e Area An area of land such as a pond You can customize e Which features display on the Mapping Guidance panel at the Run screen e The settings of each feature Access Feature Mapping settings a i Home K Configuration H W Setup J en S Pa f f N Feature Display Setup Mapping 1 Atthe Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select System and tap Setup The Display Setup screen displays 3 Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup The Feature Mapping screen displays Assign feature buttons To assign the feature buttons that will be available on the Mapping Guidance panel in the Run screenn 1 At the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section The Select Feature screen displays 2 Atthe top left hand list choose the type of feature Area Line or Point The options available to you for that feature type are listed below 3 Select the feature option you want and tap OK 130 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 6 Field feature mapping setup Field feature mapping settings Create a field feature To create a feature in your field 1 A
179. cece ccc e cece ccceceeeccceececeeeeeeeeeeeees 354 Prescriptions 222 2 c cece cece ccc cee e cece cece cece iori ERa oiea a REG 354 Manual guidance operation 0 000 aaa 358 Autopilot system operation 0 0 0 aaa 359 Adjust Autopilot guidance 22 0 0 0 0 aaa 359 Disengage Autopilot system 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 aaa 360 EZ Pilot system operation 2 2 2 2 eee eee cece ence cccecececceececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 362 Disengage EZ Pilot system _ 22 22 22 cc ccc aaa 363 Adjust EZ Pilot guidance 1 2 22 22 2 c aaa 364 EZ Steer system operation _ 2 2 cece eee c cee eee cece cce eee ceeeecceeeeeeeeees 365 Disengage EZ Steer system e eee e cece ccc ceeeeeeeeeeeeseees 366 Adjust EZ Steer guidance a 366 GreenSeeker operation aaa 368 Best practice Tap Pa ARTI et O a eee een 368 Variable rate setup 2 22 e een cccccecccecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 369 Create a custom table kakak 369 Calibrate GreenSeeker a 370 ISOBUS Operation 2 daan BEL LNLON Y bf m02 BEN ANAND NUN TZ0ranD N00 bea yy NB eae DL ear dees 373 Task Controller operation aaa 373 Virtual Terminal operation 2 2 2 2 kaaa 374 Remote Output operation ccc ccc cence cece ee cceeeeeceeeeeees 375 Distance based pulse operation cece eee eeceeccceeccceceeeeeeeeeees 375 Crossing a line feature operation 2 2
180. ces the time needed for OmniSTAR HP XP G2 VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence After the satellite signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown Convergence Threshold Disabled GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate When you have completed the settings tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 105 GPS receiver settings CenterPoint RTX ss 5 Connectivity settings CenterPoint RTX ss standard satellite is a satellite based subscription correction service 1 106 At the Configuration screen tap aa GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX ss FastRestart On or off FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for OmniSTAR H
181. chindustries com software and browse to the Where to Find GDD Information link Field setup To prepare a reference area do the following 1 218 Make certain to use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A B line or flag on the FM 1000 integrated display The ideal NRS would run the length of the field but it should at least be 400 feet long At appropriate crop growth stage take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet to be fertilized For most supplied algorithms the following is typical e Wheat Feekes growth stage 4 6 e Corn V8 V12 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 10 GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for user defined rate 3 Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the field this indicates greatest potential for the crop 4 Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop Algorithm 5 Besure to match nozzles and or rate control system to maximize response time and performance for each field s requirements For more information see Field preparations for nitrogen application page 217 for more details and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable Field preparations for user defined
182. ck Spacing value At the Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration screen enter the distance between the center of the tracks The width of the vehicle tracks is the distance from halfway across the width of the left track to halfway across the width of the right track Hydraulically steered tracked tractor If you selected a hydraulically steered tracked tractor as the make and model Engine Speed displays on the calibration list This group of vehicles includes the CAT AGCO Challenger Tracked family No calibration is required if the system is installed on a CAT MT 700 800 series equipped with the ISO option This also includes John Deere tracked vehicles Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen The Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is correct If the Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the sensor output Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen The Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the response of the hydraulic steering pumps Follow the onscreen instructions to perform the calibration Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration screen This calibration determines the compensation required for dead band in the steering pumps WARNING The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure To avoid injury be prepared for
183. ck enhanced features plugins See Unlock features plugins page 43 e System Information tab listing about the configuration e Display firmware build date firmware and hardware version e Optional features plugins loaded on the application e Vehicle and implement automatic steering controller version date and serial number if applicable e GPS receiver version correction source and subscription information e Selected vehicle make and model e Camera tab 28 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Main screens Configuration Selection screen Before you enter the Run screen the Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the e System e Vehicle e Implement Access the AA Selection screen from the Home screen configuration Selection For each of these you can e Switch to another system vehicle or implement e Edit settings The Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the e System e Vehicle e Implement Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 29 Main screens System configuration switching Configuration Selection Configuration EOK ew Configuration Selection New Select Active Configuratic OK Plugins Ok Name Configuration Selection Vehicle Configuration Configuration Selection New Configu
184. cle around for second turn the vehicle around step of roll calibration Please select one or more loads to use for Attempted to run load calibration with no loads calibration Tap the check mark to select a load selected Would you like to apply the calibration to the current field 468 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics Warning message Explanation Current field is successfully recalibrated Unable to recalibrate current field The calibration will be cleared Are you sure you want to do this The yield sensor calibration has been reset The moisture sensor calibration has been reset The temperature sensor calibration has been reset No load information is available You must record some data by harvesting some crop before you can run this calibration This load is too small to be used for calibration or contains invalid data Optical sensor is not responding No loads have been recorded Use the New Load button on the map screen to record a load This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the yield calibration This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the moisture calibration Loads cannot be recorded when there is no field open You have chosen to delete some loads Are you sure you want to do this The system is not yet ready to delete fields or events Accepting the new test weight will affect the cu
185. cle being synced If two vehicles have the same IP address tap Generate New for one of the displays CAUTION Do not remove power from the display or the DCM 300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the Generate New button Display Name Enter a descriptive name that will be easy to recognize and select when you join the vehicles Note If you already have Office Sync this item is populated with the vehicle name that you set up earlier 4 On the Data tab complete the settings and tap OK 260 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 15 Vehicle Sync setup Setup steps When there is excessive data transfer the FM 1000 integrated display may slow down To help with this it may be useful to limit the amount of data sent back and forth between displays The Coverage and Comms Strategy settings enable you to limit the amount of data the display sends out For this to be effective it is recommended that you limit the data sent out for all displays in the group Setting Explanation Coverage e AllLayers This transfers all applied layers for the Field IQ system e Layer 1 only This setting limits transfer and receiving of data to only the first product Comms Strategy e Original All displays always broadcast data Every display in the workgroup is talking always and at the same time This slows down communication traffic across the DCM and is used for heavy traffic workgroups e Round Round Robin Each
186. coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark Setting Explanation Relative Heights Enabled For relative heights from the master benchmark Disabled For GPS heights at all times Relative X The X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled Relative Y The Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled Height Offset The height value that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled Force Re Bench If set to Yes and the field has been closed and opened again the system will not let you begin work again until you have re benched Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions 272 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling Setting Explanation If you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved select No The system will not force you to rebench To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on the slide out tab See Status items page 64 Valve Setup tab Valve Module Type of valve module that is detected Valve Type Select the type of valve that is connected Valve Inverted Not Inverted Default Keep this setting unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve I
187. create the prescription store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape file format or the single gdx file in the AgGPS Prescriptions folder Then when you are within the proximity criteria the prescription is available to load If you use complex contoured prescriptions loading the prescriptions can take some time The display shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen the Run screen to show the target rate specified in the prescription file and the applied rates returned from the controller for the active channel When a field is open a prescription is loaded and a controller is connected the target rates read from the prescription and applied rates received from the controller can be shown in the status text items For more information see Status items page 64 The FM 1000 integrated display can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information System GIS The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use When you map a new field or select an existing field you can also select any shapefile shp or Agilnfo GDX gdx prescription file created in Aginfo version 3 5 44 0 or later that is within these limits For Prescriptions must Boundary Overlap the field boundary AB Line Overlap the AB Line Proximity Be within 1 km of the field If you load a shapefile prescript
188. d AB Line shapes for each field e Boundary Fields with boundaries include a boundary polygon stored in the boundary shp file Fields without boundaries do not contain a boundary file e Swath For fields with boundaries AB polylines are stored in the swath shp file Note Units are always metric in files created by the display The following is stored in the boundary and AB line attribute files Column Field Description Format Area Field area Boundary area ha Date Date the field was created YYYYMMDD Dist1 Dist2 ID AB Line number ID Length Length of the AB Line meters Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 83 Data storage structure 4 Data management Column Field Description Format Name Name assigned to the AB Line Perimeter Field perimeter distance Boundary only meters The size of the field is not defined unless a field has a boundary Therefore the 6 Complete in the EventHistory dbf file is always zero for fields without boundaries Note If you browse the dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet date fields may appear in a different format depending on your local settings Unless a field has a boundary the size of the field is not defined Therefore for fields without boundaries the _Complete in the EventHistory dbf file is always zero Archives folder When the ProgramLog txt file becomes larger than 1024 KB it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog old an
189. d below agree as follows 1 0 Definitions of Capitalised Words Collective Database Means this Database in unmodified form as part of a collection of independent databases in themselves that together are assembled into a collective whole A work that constitutes a Collective Database will not be considered a Derivative Database Convey As a verb means Using the Database a Derivative Database or the Database as part of a Collective Database in any way that enables a Person to make or receive copies of the Database ora Derivative Database Conveying does not include interaction with a user through a computer network or creating and Using a Produced Work where no transfer of a copy of the Database or a Derivative Database occurs Contents The contents of this Database which includes the information independent works or other material collected into the Database For example the contents of the Database could be factual data or works such as images audiovisual material text or sounds Database A collection of material the Contents arranged in a systematic or methodical way and individually accessible by electronic or other means offered under the terms of this License Database Directive Means Directive 96 9 EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection of databases as amended or succeeded Database Right Means rights resulting from the Chapter II suigeneri
190. d stored in the Archives folder Autopilot folder The Autopilot folder contains the following subfolders e Configuration e Custom Vehicle Configurations e VDB e Vehicle Database Data folder The data folder contains the client subfolder and all subsequent subfolders related to the client Client subfolder The client is the customer for whom the work is being done This folder contains at least one Farm subfolder for each client Farm subfolder A farm is a collection of fields This folder contains at least one Field subfolder related to each farm Field subfolder You create an on screen field to represent an actual field part of an actual field or a group of more than one actual fields 84 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data storage structure This folder contains an Event subfolder for each event performed on the field as well as the following files Data Explanation Files Field AB Line Boundary and or AB Line Swaths shp polylines Swaths dbf Swaths shx Field Boundary Polygon Only available if the Boundary shp field is a headland field and Boundary dbf therefore has a boundary Boundary shx Coordinates Contains coordinates of the field lt Latitude Longitude Altitude gt pos boundary file Paused Files Information regarding guidance being paused Event history Information about each event EventHistory dbf carried out in the field Version Client
191. d to automatically show coverage logging when the system is engaged See Engage button page 317 e Select Manual to show coverage logging only when you tap sa Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages EZ Pilot system calibration To calibrate the EZ Pilot system to work with the FM 1000 integrated display you must complete the following 1 Enter the vehicle settings 2 Complete calibration for T3 roll compensation See T3 roll compensation calibration page 171 3 Calibrate the EZ Pilot system e Angle per turn see SAM 200 calibration page 169 e Aggressiveness and Freeplay offset see Steering performance calibration page 170 4 Confirm the calibration settings Note You may have to perform the EZ Pilot calibration more than once to achieve optimal results SAM 200 calibration Note You must calibrate the IMD 600 before you calibrate the SAM 200 EZ Pilot Steering Calibration 1 Atthe Configuration screen select G EZ Pilot and then tap Calibrate The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 169 EZ Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup 6 Select SAM 200 and tap OK Ensure that you are operating the vehicle in an open field with ample area for the vehicle to make right and left turns For best results operate the vehicle at between 2 and 4
192. dance panel 2 Tap X Swaths 3 At the Swath Management screen select the Headlands pattern from the pattern list In the Headlands entry box enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths For example if you enter 2 the headland will be two swaths wide 4 Tap New Headland The Run screen displays Swath Run 3 gt NT Management fun Mapping Guidance Panel KA headlands pattern New Headland F 5 Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap o A red line displays behind the vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded 6 Define the inner pattern before you complete the headland To do so tap Infill The Mapping Guidance panel changes to show the inner pattern buttons Note After infill lines have been created they cannot be moved 7 When you reach the location for the A point tap Set A 8 To create an internal AB Line drive to the location for the B point at least 50 m 164 ft and then tap Set B 9 To create an internal A line tap Use Ar 330 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use 10 11 12 13 Tap Back to HL The Mapping Guidance panel returns to its original appearance When you complete the headland circuit the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle back to the start point Drive the vehicle to a position on the headland circuit where a straight line back to the start wil
193. de called implement draft e On extremely sloped ground e Invariable soil conditions e Oncurved guidance patterns TrueTracker supports e Steering in reverse e Straight and curved guidance patterns e Independent implement offset e Independent aggressiveness control for the implement e Zero steering to center the coulters The system has two parts e Additional hardware installed on the implement which requires professional installation e Additional FM 1000 integrated display software provided by TrueTracker For operation information see TrueTracker operation page 383 Requirements TrueTracker requires e An Autopilot system e Anunlock code e AG 815 integrated radio with secondary receiver e Second antenna e Platform kit for the implement actuation type e Implement NavController and cabling For information on TrueTracker cabling see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operation information see TrueTracker operation page 383 244 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Setup process Setup process To set up the TrueTracker system 1 Activate TrueTracker See Activate features plugins for use page 45 2 Complete the implement controller settings See Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system page 245 3 Set up the implement so that the system can tell e Which type of implement is attached e How much area it covers e How far
194. de Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use Curved pattern Gr O NO B At the Run screen tap WAP open the Mapping Guidance panel Tap X Swaths At the Swath Management screen select the Curve pattern from the pattern list Enter an access path if required See Access paths page 336 Tap New Curve The Run screen displays w Swath S Management Mapping Guidance i basi Choose curved gt gt Access Paths pattern Access Path Setup Swath Management New Curve Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap Set A To stop recording your exact path and create a straight section of line tap Record Drive the curve until you reach the end point and then tap Set B The new curve pattern displays showing all the swaths the system automatically generated If you need to shift or skip a swath see e Shift a swath page 340 e Skip a swath page 342 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 329 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations Headland pattern A headland is a straight AB Line or an A line pattern that is confined inside a boundary This boundary is called the headland Note If you want to create a headland based on the A line pattern select the straight line pattern and then set the A heading for the internal line Then complete the following steps be 1 At the Run screen tap AF open the Mapping Gui
195. ditions 2 2 0 0 2 0 02 cece aaa 293 Yield Monitoring settings 0 000 000 aaa 294 Before setup ooo lolli aaa 294 Setup steps 2 2 c cece cece cece cece cece cceeeecececececececececeeceecececececeteneeeeees 294 Combine settings aa kakak 294 Operation settings ccc c eee cccceeeeececcc cee e cece cece ccceeeeeeeeeeseseeees 295 Crop settings 2 2 2 2 cece ccc cc ee eee cece cece eee e cece cee eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 296 Map settings 2 0 00 cee ccccc eee ce cece ecceeeeececeeeeeeeeeececeececeeeerseeeeseeeeeees 297 Sensor output settings c elec a a e a i 297 Options settings 2 2 eee cece ccc cece eee cece c ect cece cece ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 297 Yield sensor moisture sensor calibration 2 00 202 2 cecceeeeccceecceeeccceeeeeees 297 Calibration steps 2 2 2 0 c cece cceccccccceccecececcccceceeceececeececccccceceeeeeeeees 298 Speed method aaa 299 Cut width method 2222 a aaa 299 Third party display instructions aaa 300 Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup a 300 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Contents Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration 2 aa 302 Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration aaa 302 Greenstar Monitor Stop Head Height setup a 303 Greenstar Monitor calibrations 222 aaa 304 Command Center 70 Series
196. ditions Use the lt and gt buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction left or right of the line you are currently engaged on To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for Autopilot system page 149 Online Ager Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line A setting that is e Higher brings the vehicle back online faster but may cause tight oscillations about the line e Lower Brings the vehicle back online more slowly but can avoid overshoot Note The default aggressiveness setting is 100 Disengage Autopilot system The Autopilot t system can be disengaged automatically and manually Automatic disengagement The Autopilot system disengages automatically when e The vehicle is outside the allowed distance from the guidance line set up in the Engage tab See Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 e Thesystem is paused e GPS positions are lost 360 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Autopilot system operation Manual disengagement To manually disengage the system you can e Tap on the screen e Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor When you turn the steering wheel manually the Autopilot system disengages It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin
197. e Antenna offsets Geometry tab As part of implement setup settings on the Geometry tab are required for implement modeling When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system the following antenna offsets are required Offset Explanation Hitch to ground contact Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point point that the implement rotates around Antenna front back Measured from the implement working point to the center of the GPS antenna if mounted Antenna left right Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the GPS antenna if mounted Antenna height The working height of the GPS antenna Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 239 TrueGuide setup 13 TrueGuide setup TrueGuide setup 1 Atthe Configuration screen select TrueGuide and then tap Setup The TrueGuide Setup screen displays 2 Enter the required settings Setting Explanation Roll compensation e On Applies roll corrections from the tractor e Off Applies no roll corrections CurveGuide e Off The system does not anticipate curves e TrueGuide only Enables the system to anticipate curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance only e Always On Keeps CurveGuide on at all times TrueGuide Aggressiveness The default aggressiveness The recommended aggressiveness is 100 See System aggressiveness settings Rear axle to hitch point The distance between the
198. e 2 3 4 Continue to press erlflf until page 2 displays page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab 5 305 Third party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup 5 6 PO ON p Tap Gp Press gp on the Command Center Continue to press P until page 2 displays page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab In the Calibrations list select Yield Calibrations a Follow the steps to perform the calibration Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest Update the Moisture Sensor 60 Series combines only Obtain version 1 20C from Stellar Support N D UU PF WN H Go to www stellarsupport com Tap Support amp Downloads in the left column Tap Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software Tap Runin the file download security warning After the download is complete choose the preferred language and press OK Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original Greenstar monitor Load version 1 20C to the Moisture Sensor 1 306 Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor Power on the Greenstar monitor Press INFO keyCard gt Tap Program Target gt Tap g 9 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Y
199. e implement controller At the mplement Controller Setup screen s Vehicle tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Connector Which port on the FM 1000 integrated display the TrueTracker NavController is communicating with TrueTracker on the FM 1000 integrated display only supports port C or port D on the internal GNSS receivers Communications for TrueTracker are serial e Port C uses Internal Receiver 1 e Port D uses Internal Receiver 2 The common practice for the Autopilot TrueTracker combination is to use Port C for the vehicle and Port D for the implement Current Selection Tap Edit if you need to change the e Vehicle profile e Implement model When you tap Edit the Edit Implement Controller screen displays Edit vehicle profile At the Edit Implement Controller screen change the settings as appropriate 246 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Setup process Choose new vehicle make model To select a new make and model from a database of vehicles vdb on the display Setting Explanation Vehicle Profile Location Select From Database new Model 1 Tap Browse and select the required vdb file 2 Tap ok After calibrating a TrueTracker implement NavController it is recommended to save the configuration 1 Tap Edit and then Save Implementto file 2 Enter the file name and tap OK Note This is the only method by which to save an i
200. e the Autopilot system on the tractor must have a good calibration An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement guidance Requirements To set up and operate TrueGuide system must have e The Autopilot automated steering system installed and configured See Autopilot system page 146 238 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 13 TrueGuide setup Implement setup and selection e Stable implements Implements that are unstable such as sprayers with large flotation tires will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on the ground e Both Autopilot and TrueGuide activated for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 e An additional GPS receiver on the implement For cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see TrueGuide operation page 386 Implement setup and selection Before you use the FM 1000 integrated display with the TrueGuide system set up and select a new or existing implement See Implement setup page 138 Note You can update existing saved implements with implement geometry to support TrueGuide guidance Note Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement These offsets should be minimized whenever possibl
201. e EZ Pilot Settings screen displays 2 On the Vehicle tab complete the settings as appropriate Setting Explanation Vehicle Type Type of vehicle Axle to Antenna The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna Measure Offset the distance accurately within 3 inches An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance Take the measurement from the antenna to the correct point of your vehicle e From the rear axle for MFWD Sprayer Floater Truck e From the front axle for 4WD tractor Combine Swathers For swathers it is recommended that you place the antenna directly 166 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Pilot assisted steering system Setting Explanation over or ahead of the front axle e From the tracked center for tracked vehicles If the antenna is e In front of the axle enter a forward distance e Behind the axle enter a back distance Antenna Height The distance between the ground and the top of the GPS antenna Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel Steering settings for EZ Pilot system On the EZ Pilot Settings screen at the Steering tab complete the settings for steering Setting Explanation Nudge Increment The distance the Nudge button on the Run screen moves when you tap it Angle Per Turn The angle the wheels turn during one full rotation of the
202. e Eut 260 16 Water Management setup u 2 200 ccc ee cece ce eeees 263 Water Management features 1 00 20 20 occ a 264 Requirements cece bee ant ewes a de dees decd deers bhakti ma las 264 FieldLevel Il Survey Design 0 0 cc cccccccececccccececctecceceeceeceetcesetteeeeee 265 Benchmarks 2222 2 AA 265 Rebenching 2 2 2 aaa 265 SOU GS ese EBA ANA nat AAO ee nia ad T E den Peet ee ip a a BE 265 FieldLevel II Leveling aaa 268 Requirements 2 2 0222222 c cece cece ccc cece cece cece cece eoe dar hoeun deiu 268 Setup process lice eee eee eee eee ee ee cece c eee e eens 268 Leveling models u s 269 Implement settings for FieldLevel ll c cece ec ceecccccccececeeeees 269 GPS receiver setup 269 FieldLevel Il settings 22 c ence eecccccececeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 270 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 15 16 Contents Valve module calibration a 273 Tandem dual scraper setup Uu 275 Tandem scraper aaa 275 DU AISChAD EM un naan yeh oats da enna ba Une ued oedee ov maa baad Lana anak madaan 275 SETUD eottout ss tee eet ee eth re ed tena ei etwas nn dat eet te ae 275 Implement setup 2 2 2 2 aaa 276 Prepare connections 2 222 c cece cece cece cece cece cece ceeeeeeeceeeeeeseeteees 276 Primary receiver setup ooo eee cece eee ececcce eee cece cece ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 276 S
203. e FM 1000 integrated display can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by e ARemote Data Logger RDL e AGeographic Information System GIS Note To load GIS boundaries files must be in WGS 84 latitudes longitudes and heights in decimal degrees To import an AB Line or a boundary into the display 1 Insert the USB drive into an office computer Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 337 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations The three files that define a line or field shp shx and dbf must have identical names Otherwise they are not recognized If you put multiple sets of files in the folder ensure that you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten 2 Copy the following files to the AgGPS AB Lines folder on the USB drive e lt field name gt shp e lt field name gt shx e lt field name gt dbf 3 Power on the display then tap et 4 Either open an existing field or start a new field 5 Tap X Swaths 6 Tap Import The Import Swaths screen displays 7 Tap the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap OK The field or AB Line is imported If the AB Line file contains more than one AB Line all AB Lines in the file are imported 8 Tap the AB Line that you want to use and tap Load A warning message displays 9 Tap OK The imported field or AB Line is ready to use 10 For best results close the f
204. e Field IQ system only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ system Rate and Section control module installed 1 Atthe Configuration screen select w Field i and then tap Calibrate 2 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Rate and Section Control module you want to calibrate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first See above Spreader calibration To calibrate a spreader first calibrate the implement lift switch Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require Implement lift switch calibration At the Field IQ Calibration screen select the Implement Lift option Raise the implement and then tap Next Lower the implement and then tap Next wu PF w N BP Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Rawson modules calibration The Field IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ system Rawson control module or rate control module set up to control the rate Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 207 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field lQ system setup 10 11 12 13 208 At the Configuration screen select Field IQ and then tap Calibrate At the Field IQ Calibration screen select the module you want to calibrate Select the first module to calib
205. e Pivot Tap and select the benchmark you want to be on grade Primary Slope If you want to define the primary heading by measuring a second point see Define a plane page 399 Cross Slope Height Above Pivot Enter the known offset if you are using one Primary Heading Flip Tap to change the direction of the Cross Slope This changes the Cross Heading between 90 and 270 from the Primary Heading For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis the slope values must be keyed in as negative values Note FieldLevel Il searches for a survey on the field If there is a survey a Cut Fill map displays on the new design plane 400 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Use multiple benchmarks You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements If multiple benchmarks are created you can design a plane of best fit through them If you use three benchmarks to design the plane the cut and fill values will be 0 0 through those points so the system can create a perfect plane If you use more than three benchmarks to design the plane the cut fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best fit and the benchmark elevations To define a plane using multiple points FieldLevel Il Panel i f Plane Editor New Plane gt New Plane 1 At the FieldLevel Il panel create two or more benc
206. e Station Filter Enabled Disabled RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled Scintillation Filter On or Off On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector None or Connector D Radar Frequency Rate Enter Hz mph rate When you have completed the settings tap OK FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings CenterPoint RTK Trimble CenterPoint RTK is radio broadcast corrections from a ground based reference station using either Single based line CenterPoint RTK Internet with a DCM 300 modem CenterPoint VRS At the Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTK Net ID GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Fil tab enter the settings Setting Explanation x Fill technology On or Off During RTK signal interruptions xFill technology can sustain RTK operation for up to 20 minutes Frequency See Frequencies and baud rate page 114 Baud Rate See Frequencies and baud rate page 114 Datum Selector Choose the datum that was
207. e USA Unlock the modem The DCM 300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS File Transfer The VRS File Transfer functionality in the DCM 300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data transfer To unlock the DCM 300 with a passcode you must connect the modem to the display and then turn it on The Unlock screen shows the DCM 300 when connected Enter the passcode in the FM 1000 integrated display and then tap OK to send it to the modem When the modem is successfully unlocked a message displays to reboot the modem Service activation Services for the DCM 300 modem can be purchased from a Trimble store Services include e VRS Now Ag correction service e Sync data transfer e Dispatch asset tracking e Wireless data plans USA only Modem setup Activate VRS for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 To use VRS corrections the GPS Setup tab must be configured with a Correction type Of Trimble VRS Note The display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type 126 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings DCM 300 Modem 1 Atthe Configuration screen select VRS and then tap Setup The VRS Configuration screen displays From the Device list select the type of modem that is connected The default is DCM 300 3 Select the VRS Server Setup tab Enter the required settings as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network R
208. e Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup Setting Explanation Boot Length Distance from where the pipe exits to the back of the boot to the leading edge of the boot Offset The distance of the GNSS antenna from the approximate center of vehicle rotation the fixed rear axle of a towed plow or the center of the tracks Forward is the antenna in front of the pivot point Backward is the antenna behind the pivot point Antenna Selection Select the antenna from the list Valve settings Select the Valve Setup tab and complete the settings for the PWM valve Valve Module Displays the type of valve module that is detected Valve Type Select the type of valve that is connected Valve Inverted Leave this value as Not Inverted unless the raise and lower hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve If this is the case select Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses Limit and increment settings Select the Steps tab and complete the settings Setting Explanation Height Step Fine You can change height steps in small increments Coarse You can change height steps in large increments Pitch Step Fine You can change height steps in small increments Coarse You can change height steps in large increments On grade Limit This limit sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to a thin red arrow At twice this distance the height
209. e a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product excluding costs of installation upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble s product return procedures than in effect Such remedy may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to third party equipment onto which the Product is installed if such damage is found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by Trimble following a root cause analysis Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that a the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed configured interfaced maintained stored and operated in accordance with Trimble s relevant operator s manual and specifications and b the Products and Software are not modified or misused The preceding warranties shall not apply to and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from i the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software products information data systems interfaces or devices not made supplied or specified by Trimble ii the operation of the Product or Software under any specification other than or in addition to Trimble s standard specifications for its products iii the unauthorized installation modification or use of the Product or Software iv damage caused b
210. e and must comply with Section 4 4 c Derivative Databases and Produced Works A Derivative Database is Publicly Used and so must comply with Section 4 4 if a Produced Work created from the Derivative Database is Publicly Used d Share Alike and additional Contents For the avoidance of doubt You must not add Contents to Derivative Databases under Section 4 4 a that are incompatible with the rights granted under this License e Compatible licenses Licensors may authorise a proxy to determine compatible licenses under Section 4 4 a iii If they do so the authorised proxy s public statement of acceptance of a compatible license grants You permission to use the compatible license 4 5 Limits of Share Alike The requirements of Section 4 4 do not apply in the following a For the avoidance of doubt You are not required to license Collective Databases under this License if You incorporate this Database ora Derivative Database in the collection but this License still applies to this Database or a Derivative Database as a part of the Collective Database b Using this Database a Derivative Database or this Database as part of a Collective Database to create a Produced Work does not create a Derivative Database for purposes of Section 4 4 and Version 9 25 Revision A c Use of a Derivative Database internally within an organisation is not to the public and therefore does not fall under the requirements of Section 4 4 4 6 Access to Deriv
211. e approximate operation height Inaccurate measurements will result in a degraded performance Setting Explanation Header Header model attached to your combine Feeler to Axle Offset Distance from the pivot point of the feeler to the front axle This measurement must be accurate to within an inch otherwise the performance will be degraded Cutter Bar to Axle Distance Distance from the front of the cutter bar or point where the crop enters the snapper rollers to the center of the front axle This measurement must be accurate otherwise the performance will be degraded Feeler Left Right Offset Distance of the center of the row crop feelers to the Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 163 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Setting Explanation centerline of the vehicle Engage Delay This delay in seconds 0 10 will be used when the system is engaged The system will wait the entered time until inputs are recognized to start row guidance Use this setting to keep the system from mistaking random stalk strikes on headlands as inputs for steering Clear Nudge When Disengaged Yes Clears the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged No Keep the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged 3 At the Configuration screen tap 44 Guidance and then tap Diagnostics Item Explanation Offline Distance Status Status of the sensor Enable Disable Tap to enable o
212. e boom and do not have rigid protection Sensors should be re calibrated after approximately 1000 hours of use due to possible changes in light output This is generally done at the factory or authorized service center Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32 48 above the crop canopy 38 is the optimum height and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED window of the sensor Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations GreenSeeker operation Variable rate setup To set up variable rate application on the display 1 Power up the RT200 interface module and the rate controller if required When the RT200 interface module is first powered on a The module s green power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps b The status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus Expect to see a brief green flash followed by a red flash at the I M message rate typically at 0 5sec This indicates that data from the left green flash and right red flash CAN ports is being transmitted 2 Activate GreenSeeker for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 3 At the Home screen tap eet 4 At the Configuration Selection screen tap OK At the Fi
213. e completed the settings tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 113 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings Frequencies and baud rate When you receive satellite signals you must select the frequency and baud rate based on your specific region Region Baud Rate Western North America RTX WN 1557 8615 MHz at 600 baud Central North America RTX CN 1557 8150 MHz at 2400 baud Eastern North America RTX EN 1557 8590 MHz at 600 baud South Central America RTX SA 1539 8325 MHz at 600 baud Europe Africa RTX EA 1539 9525 MHz at 600 baud Asia Pacific RTX AP 1539 8325 MHz at 600 baud Note These frequencies do change occasionally If you experience issues with the satellite signal contact your reseller for updated satellite information 114 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS output settings GPS output settings To access the GPS Output Settings screen 1 At the Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays 2 On the Settings tab tap GPS Output The GPS Output Settings screen displays There are three tabs available e Serial NMEA messages 1 e Serial NMEA messages page 115 e CANGPS messages 1 Serial NMEA messages Note Depending on your configuration NMEA message output may require Part number 67091 FmX to DE9 RS232 cable Port A or
214. e continuing 2 At the Configuration screen select J 3 WM Survey and then tap Setup The WM Drain Setup screen displays 3 Complete the settings on each tab e Implement control settings page 279 e Limit and increment settings page 281 e Relative heights settings page 282 e Valve settings page 281 e Operation settings page 282 4 Tap OK when you have completed all the settings 5 Calibrate the valve page 287 For operational information see WM Drain operation page 410 278 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup Implement control settings Implement tab At the Implement tab enter the appropriate settings Setting Explanation Control Type Height Control Select if no IMD 600 slope sensor is installed or if an IMD 600 slope sensor is being used for roll corrections only Pitch Control Select to allow the IMD 600 slope sensor to adjust for roll and pitch corrections Height and Pitch Select to allow the IMD 600 sensor to control pitch and height Height Gain The amount of pitch control used to get to the target height with Pitch Control Or Height and Pitch control types e Ahigher number will more aggressively pitch the plow if it is off target e Alower number will keep the plow closer to the grade and more slowly approach the target height Default value for Pitch Controlis 0 2 and for Height and Pitch is 0 0 Increase this by 0 05
215. e display can send rates to only one channel at a time the active channel The Tyler Flex Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the display 230 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 12 Serial Rate Control setup Hardi 5500 and 6500 Operation Statistics for the active channel are recorded in e The Total Qty value in the variable rate logging dbf file e The Avg Rate field in the EventHistory dbf file If you want to use these statistics start a new event before you change the active channel Application width You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller The display draws coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections If you turn boom sections off the display varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on Hardi 5500 and 6500 1 To connect the Hardi 5500 or 6500 controller you need a special adapter cable P N 59043 to connect to the cable P N 67091 Cable P N 6709 will be connected to Port Aor B on the display Optionally you can use an extension straight through serial cable a Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller b On the Hardi 6500 use terminal version 1 55 or later and Jobcom version 1 55 or later c Set the Hardi 6500 to metric units 2 Set up the controller a Turn on the controller while holding the Esc button b Inthe extended menu use the arrow keys to select t
216. e mapping controls a aaa 324 Swaths Management screen 22 aaa 325 Straight guidance pattern 22 2 oe cece aaa 327 Curved pattern 20 2 AA 329 Headland pattern 220 22 aaa 330 Pivot OY 5 osocorrecotiid sio re a a e a E eai g 332 FreeForm pattern aa 334 Pause recording na a chs naasa tot nma a bie ee BA Gata anta aaa 335 Access paths a a ikaka 336 Switch to the next pattern aaa 337 Import AB Lines or boundaries aa 337 Load a pattern aaa 338 Rename a swath 2 2 2 2 a a kaaa 339 Delete a swath aaa 340 Switch to the next pattern l a aaan aa 340 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 17 Contents Shift a swath 22002 cece cece ence cc cccccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeees 340 Skip a swath 2222 2 00 00 aa kakak 342 Coverage logging 2 2 aaa 343 View coverage layers 1 2 2 2 2 2 a aaa 343 Log coverage for varieties aaa 344 Set up variety logging aa 345 Field IQ operation eee eee ee eee eee ececccccecececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 347 Field IQ panel aaa 348 Field IQ master switch box functions aa 351 Field IQ 12 section switch box optional 352 Material assignment 22 aaa 353 Enable sections aaa 353 Enter values manually 2 2 0 0 aaa 354 Test optional switch box
217. e material that will be set up in this location Material Type Select the type of material being applied e Row Crop Seed e Liquid e Granular Seed e Granular Fertilizer e Anhydrous Material Name Name of the material Material Units Units to use with the selected material 188 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation Seeds Per Pound Number of seeds per pound Target Rate 1 Preset volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is in a position 1 o Note For liquid granular fertilizer NH3 and Granular seed enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply For Row Crop seed the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks a 1 Ks a equals 1000 seeds per acre When entering a target rate of 25500 into the display type it as 25 5 Target Rate 2 Present volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is ce in position 2 Note For liquid granular fertilizer NH3 and Granular seed enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply For Row Crop seed the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks a 1 Ks a equals 1000 seeds per acre When entering a target rate of 25500 into the display type it as 25 5 Rate Increment This setting adjusts the increment that the target rate will adjust by when in rate 1 or 2 Manual Rate Controls the aggressiveness of the rate adjustm
218. e other than zero for CAN messages For 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded 3 For 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM 1000 integrated display has been changed 4 For 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM 1000 integrated display 5 Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a change for header height State 3 During boot up Cause Actions Will show which controller is not visible armrest header unit moisture sensor 1 Ensure the display is communicating with the CAN bus system diagnostics serial port Port A B Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages For 60 Series Combines Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1 20C loaded For 60 Series Combines Check if Crop Type will change on the Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM 1000 integrated display has been changed For 70 Series Combines Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM 1000 integrated display Raise head up or down to see if the display shows a change for header height 466 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics State 4 Display has lost 1 Check cabling Cae a wata Recycle power power down the display and the combine and wait
219. e problem persists contact Technical Support Proportional steering gain calibration WARNING The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle Be prepared for sudden wheel movements Note Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than satisfactory The Proportional Steering Gain PGain setting enables a balance between rapid steering response and stability When you modify the PGain setting two steering characteristics are affected 156 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system e Slew Time The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa e Overshoot The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter the PGain value e High PGain value Decreases the slew time and increase the overshoot This provides rapid responses but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instab
220. e set in the Engage Options tab See Engage settings for EZ Steer page 173 The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and in some cases also control the EZ Steer system When you are using EZ Steer to automatically steer on the guidance line you can e Tap yellow on the screen e Press the optional remote engage foot pedal Indicator Button Explanation Tap to O The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line the guidance line to engage on it Ready to Engage yellow The vehicle is engaged on the Stop engaging on the guidance guidance line line The vehicle is not ready to N A You cannot tap this button engage on the line because the It is an indicator only guidance line is too far from the Not Ready to Engage red vehicle S R N Automatic steering is not N A You cannot tap this button e SE KB allowed due to howit has been Itis an indicator only set up Auto steering not allowed j red You can also Adjust EZ Steer guidance page 366 settings during operations in the field Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 365 EZ Steer system operation 18 Operations Disengage EZ Steer system The EZ Steer system can be disengaged automatically and manually Automatic disengagement The EZ Steer system disengages automatically when The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the Engage tab See Engage settings for EZ Steer page 1
221. e to improve the information received from satellite based positioning systems Used with GPS GLONASS and Galileo RI Response Index An indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional nitrogen Roll correction Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the navigation controller and the mounting of the GPS receiver Row The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter This can be controlled individually as a single row section or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section Run screen The screen where you perform field activities S SBAS Space Based Augmentation System A system of Earth based systems at points surveyed for location accuracy that measure satellites signals and factors that can impact the signals The SBAS then broadcasts corrections to satellite signals to improve accuracy Scintillation Causes extreme fluctuations in signals that are received Scintillation can be caused by turbulence that creates air pockets with different temperatures and densities Section A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut off valve Tru Count air clutches or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves A section can have either a single row nozzle or multiple rows nozzles depending on how the system is set up Section Control Module Controls 12 sections rows per module with up to 4 modules 48 module sections rows Service 480 FM 1000 I
222. e use page 322 Optionally activate coverage logging See Coverage logging page 343 Close the field when operations in that field are complete See Close a field page 321 The system saves an event summary of what has been done in the field If you want the field to close more quickly you can change the settings so that you do not save an event summary See Event summary adjustment page 321 Main buttons The main buttons on the Run screen enable you to See the status of items Change the view Open feature panels Navigate to other screens Control automatic steering if applicable Turn coverage logging on or off if applicable Left side of Run screen Button Indicator Explanation 32 3 Provides information about GPS If the GPS signal is lost completely a warning displays and this button turns red Tap to view GNSS status GNSS Status page 318 KA In the Operational view page 314 of the Run screen shows an overhead view of the field with the vehicle in it Overhead view Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 311 Operation basics 18 Operations Button Indicator Trailing view KI Explanation In the Operational view page 314 of the Run screen shows a three dimensional representation of the field from the driver s perspective H Information configured using the Status items page 64 menus a Zoom Pan Opens the zoom a
223. econdary receiver setup 2 2 eee aaa 276 Tandem Dual settings 276 Tandem dual calibration 2 22 2 00 ccc c cece ccec cece cccecccececcceceeceetcceeeteees 277 WM Drain setup 2 2 00 2 222 c ccc eee ec ccc cece cece cece cece cece ee aa aoaaa aonan 278 Implement control settings 2 0 aaa 279 Valve settings ccc ccc cece cece ccceccccccccccceceeececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 Limit and increment settings ccc c ccc cece cece cece cece cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeees 281 Relative heights settings 2 2 2 2 2 cece cece cece cece eee cc cc cceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 282 Operation settings 2222 cece ccc cece cece eee c cece ccc cceeeecececeseeseeee 282 Calibrate WM Drain for cantilever plow _ 22 2 2 222 cece cece cece ccccccccccccceceeeeeees 283 Calibrate the valve _ 22 2 2 a kaaa 287 17 Yield Monitoring setup _ 0 00 0 00 0 ccc cece a 289 Yield Monitoring functionality 2 022 222 c cece cece ccccccecccceeeceeees 290 Yield Monitoring best practices 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 c aaa 291 WASH ANATION Baa octet See ws ee ee ase cade once eee tutes eee 291 Tare calibration aaa 291 Flow calibration eee eee eee cece ee cecccceccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 292 Pitch Roll calibration 2 220 2 00 ccc cece cece cccccceceeccececcceteccectccceetecseteesees 292 Test weight 2 0 2 0 ka 293 Calibrating and operating con
224. ecrease the value for angle per turn e Less aggressive turns increase the value for angle per turn Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ Steer system Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line Note If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto Low Note The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available To access these options select the EZ Steer Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen 1 To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings at the EZ Steer Steering Performance screen select the Step 3 tab 2 Engage the system on the A B line If the vehicle is offline e To the left increase the freeplay offset to the right e To the right increase the freeplay offset to the left A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared 3 Enter the parameters and then tap OK The EZ Steer Steering Calibration screen displays 4 Tap OK The Configuration screen displays T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ Steer system The
225. ed Display User Guide 45 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Basic system settings f f a a K OTN gt K gt Configuration I g Setup Display Setup P A Pa arr Home At the Configuration screen select the system option and then tap Setup The Display Setup screen displays If required enter the administrator password See Passwords page 36 1 Atthe Configuration screen tap System in the list then tap Setup 2 Ifnecessary enter the administrator password See Passwords page 36 3 The Display Setup screen displays 4 Atthis screen you can navigate to and edit e CAN bus settings page 47 e Data dictionary page 48 e EZ Remote Joystick page 50 e Field feature mapping settings page 51 e Guidance settings page 52 e Language measurements keyboard layout page 53 e Lightbar settings page 58 e Map settings page 54 e Power management page 60 e Signal input module for OEM switch page 62 e Sounds page 63 e Status items page 64 that display on the Run screen e Time setup page 76 You can also return the display to its default settings See Restore default settings page 61 46 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings CAN bus settings da Note These settings are very advanced Use them only under the direct advice of Technical Support At the CAN Bus Settings screen complete the se
226. ed and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver list select Internal Secondary Tandem Dual settings You must set up the FM 1000 integrated display to control either a tandem configuration or a dual configuration depending upon the implement being used At the Configuration screen select Tandem Dual and then tap Setup The Tandem Dual Setup screen displays 276 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup Tandem dual scraper setup Setting Explanation Type Tandem Back Default Select to control two implements one towed behind the other Dual Right Select for a dual setup Antenna Height Height of the antenna installed on either the rear implement or the antenna installed on the right side of a single implement Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna Note For FieldLevel Il the antenna height value can be altered on the Blade Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either the front implement or the antenna installed on the left side of a single implement Disengage Raise Used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single implement when Auto is disengaged If you set it to 0 000s then the blade will not move up when you disengage Note For FieldLevel Il the disengage raise value can be altered from the Blade Settings tab and relates to the front implement s blade or the left side of the blade ona
227. ed cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Responsible Party Trimble Navigation 935 Stewart Drive Sunnyvale CA 94085 Telephone 1 408 481 8000 Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS GEN Cet appareil est conforme a la norme CNR GEN du Canada Europe The product covered by this guide are intended to be used in all EU member countries Norway and Switzerland Products been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to European Council Directive 89 336 EEC on EMC thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic Area EEA Contains a Bluetooth radio module These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment The 450 MHZ PMR bands and 2 4 GHz are non harmonized throughout Eu
228. ed on the Autopilot controller e Vehicle profile database file As additional profiles become available or are updated they are added to a vehicle profile database You can download the database and load profiles from it e Saved file You can install an individual vehicle profile that you configured previously and saved See Save vehicle profile page 165 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 147 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup For Vehicle Profile Then Location if you choose o From Controller New From the Model list select the make and model you want O Tap Use Vehicle From Database new Tap Browse a b Select the vdb file you want 9 Tap OK 2 Tap Use Vehicle From Saved File existing Tap Browse O o Select the file you want 9 Tap OK d Select Save Vehicle to save the new settings e When a message displays that the profile you selected on the NavController tap OK Note If you select a vehicle make and model but do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot controller that make and model may not be loaded f Tap ox when another message displays explaining the NavController will be reinitialized Engage settings for Autopilot system At the Engage tab complete settings related to the engagement of the Autopilot system Vehicle Controller Setup Vehicle Engage Steering Advanced Setting Explanation Ope
229. ed or subtracted from the current elevation based upon the current coarse offset entered into the system e Up or Down To manually stroke the valve to 100 command in the required direction to verify valve performance and wiring accuracy GPS status 1 Atthe Home screen tap as 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap Mops Receiver and then tap Diagnostics The GPS Status screen Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data To analyze the GPS signal see Serial Comms page 433 to view raw serial data GreenSeeker diagnostics The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and any error conditions 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap GreenSeeker and then tap Diagnostics The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen displays The hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates the display and RT200 are communicating 460 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Row Guidance diagnostics Incorrect data The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation and if a sensor reports incorrect data the data is not included in the rate control calculation Incorrect data can come from mud on the sensor lenses sensors viewing concrete snow wet asphalt or other non soil or non plant surface Error conditions Error conditions include sensors disconnected fr
230. ee Configuration screen page 33 Settings 1 B Tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel See e Feature panels page 314 Mapping guidance e Guidance pattern use page 323 e Guidance settings page 52 Also see e Coverage logging page 343 e Engage button page 317 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 313 Operation basics 18 Operations Operational view The operational section of the Run screen shows your guidance lines and an on screen representation of your vehicle in the field Hashed grids provide a measure of distance Fach small square represents 10 feet and each dark green outline represents 50 feet N You can change your view from an overhead view to a trailing view See Main buttons page 311 Feature panels On the Run screen you open a feature panel to view controls related to that feature The feature buttons display on the right hand side of the screen One feature is always on the Run screen PN opens the Mapping Guidance panel 314 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Operation basics Item Explanation 1 Location for feature buttons Tap to open the feature panel 2 Feature panel Contains controls specifically related to the feature 3 Optional control button Tap to open additional views related to the feature 4 Additional information related to the feature 5 Area for controls such as the coverage logg
231. eee cece cece cece ccc cece cece cece aaraa ea ea aaraa oaaae oreen erene 34 Help screen o oo AA 35 PaSSWOnO Sa ha aka ets AG AT AG kad al MAG D EN eee Ba de i 36 Access password aaa a kaaa 36 Change administration password 2 220 c cece cece cece eee ceeececeeecececeeeeeees 36 Optional features plugins 20 c cece cee cecccccccccceececceetceceercceetteeeetcees 37 Vehicle guidance gadan ees Ahaha See Shela Sosa bala ase be aoe ea Egea 37 Features for application 00 0000 aaa 37 VSO BS eee hee ees geen pant AA 37 Implement control 2 2 kakak 38 CONNECTIVITY 222 ANNA LNG eae oe e hn we ie oak ho na E 38 Water Management 2 2 2 22222 c cence eee cece eee e cece cece ee aoao aaran aoan 38 FlanveSt a sa eet esta ree Guna ais fens cana Nan AA An BA a an LAAN 38 Sareen SOS maa eect Ata tots bats fee ene ae ALA MADAAN NAAD toes 39 3 BASIS SOUS sa TAG ca a PA TENGA AG A een a tS tad 41 Unlocks and upgrades 2 2 2 2 aa aka 42 Unlock features plugins LL 43 Upgrade FM 1000 integrated display firmware 22 a 44 Activate features plugins for use 45 Basic system settings 2 2 222 c eee cece eee e cece ec cece cece cece Ea aaea 46 CAN bus settings a kaaa 47 Data dictlonary 122 7 d a anan sb ba kad nasa kab YA DA rh mha nay Nikal uceevdewd S03 h ADA hada kh 48 Data Files 5 gan Aa AA a A tee ok caste ook ee ANAN AA 2d eee et 49 EZ Remote Joystic
232. een are Category Subcategories and data Summary Files PDF summary files listed under client name Diagnostics Screen shots Folder containing screen captures System logs Configuration Features Implements System Archive Varieties Vehicle Archive Data Dictionary Data dictionary see Data Dictionary categories page 94 Field Data Data for all activities in the field Data is structured as Client Farm Field Event Display to USB CAUTION Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data This will corrupt the data AN CAUTION POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA If you copy files from An to another or to an FM 1000 integrated display An physical FM 1000 integrated display to another or to an FM 1000 integrated display First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files Transfer your files to this subfolder Otherwise you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 79 Transfer data 4 Data management 1 Atthe Data Files screen from the display s Internal Storage list tap the item to copy You can e Select all files in the category Select the entire category by tapping the category name e Select individual files See files within a category by tapping gt The arrow changes to a down arrow and shows the files stored under the category T
233. een rapid steering response and stability Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics 250 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system e Slew Time The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far right position and from the far right to the far left position e Overshoot The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value Prior to completing this calibration e Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration e Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Perform this calibration on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Run the engine at full throttle e Raise the implement To correct slight variations caused by valve current response friction and hydraulic fluid viscosity alter the PGain values e High PGain values Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot This provides rapid responses but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability for example a tendency to excessively overshoot e Low PGain values Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays i
234. ees 240 TrueGuide calibration 2 2 2 2 eee eee cece ence cececcceceecceececeeeeeceeeceeees 241 14 TrueTracker setup _ 0 0 aaa 243 MU TACK OP settee etter eta UN Ni ote gk aan UND las doe Ja ABA hk nit A belt a eh cee tN 244 Requirements _ 22 2 0 aaa 244 Setup process _ 2 2 eee ee eee ee cee e ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 245 Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 245 Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system cece ee ceeeecccccceceeeeeeeeees 246 Engage settings for TrueTracker system a 248 Steering settings for TrueTracker system aa 249 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system aaa 250 Controller orientation setup aa 250 Proportional Steering Gain calibration a 250 Implement Steering Sensor calibration cece eeeeeccccceeeeeeeees 252 Implement Automated Deadzone calibration 2 eee eee ee cece ee 253 Antenna position and roll offset correction 2 2 2 2 2 2 elec cece eee cceceeccccccceeeeeeees 254 Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration 257 15 Vehicle Sync setup 2 2a 259 Vehicle SYNG sesar nama NA al ana at naka E ahaa SWAPANG bakya a anG MA Pa AG PAGA 260 Requirements 260 0 pasas cave ond ELI LANG YY o beh HA GU lek Au wee kana cy hh h nde e i 260 Setup steps ccc ccc cee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee
235. eld When you are leveling you use benchmarks to e Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re calibrate your exact position This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling e Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB NG Field coordinates are calculated from this point Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number 68 When you tap a button to create a benchmark a countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark To stop the averaging during the countdown tap Bench again Rebenching If you plan to shift the location of the base station each time you use the survey data you can configure the system to force a re bench The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re benched When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark a message displays on the Run screen telling you how close you are to that benchmark If you tap the Rebench button when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark When you re bench the system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you but allows you to select the benchmark you
236. eld Selection screen load the field to be sprayed Create a custom table Historical knowledge about the crop enables growers or crop consultants to determine different crop input requirements based upon biomass size of the crop plant An example of this type of use would be variable rate application of e Defoliant in cotton e Desiccant in potatoes For these cases the field is scouted field calibrated to determine areas of the field that require different rates of defoliant To obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field you can use either e The RT200 system e AGreenSeeker handheld Using this data you can create a table with NDVI values corresponding to application rates To create a custom table 1 At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen tap the Algorithm tab 2 From the Formula list select either Custom Table Manually enter NDVI calibration values go to step 4 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 369 GreenSeeker operation 18 Operations Auto Calibration The system automatically enters NDVI calibration values from the Calibration step by transferring the Maximum Average and Minimum NDVI values into rows two three and four respectively 3 Tap the Number Of Rows entry box enter a value and tap OK The number of available NDVI and Rate values are dictated by the value entered in the Number Of Rows entry box Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two
237. eldLevel II 22 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 1 Introduction About the FM 1000 integrated display e Trimble WM Drain farm drainage system e Trimble Rawson drive e Trimble Field lIQ crop input control system e Trimble RangePoint RTX e Trimble CenterPoint RTX and CenterPoint VRS e Trimble VRSNow e Trimble Farm Works Software e Trimble GreenSeeker e Trimble Tru Count Air Clutch e Trimble AutoSense e Trimble T2 terrain compensation technology e Trimble T3 roll compensation e OmniSTAR wide area differential GPS service e Trimble NextSwath end of row turn technology Installation To install the display and required cabling for your configuration see the FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 23 Changes to this document 1 Introduction Changes to this document The changes for this document for the FM 1000 integrated display version 9 25 revision A are e Remote Output Crossing a Line Feature has been added See Remote Output settings page 118 and Remote Output operation page 375 e WM Drain Changes to the Run screen and added features including clipping deleting a section line and adding fixed points during design See WM Drain operation page 410 e Serial NMEA messages 10 Hz has been added as an output See Serial NMEA messages page 115 24 FM 1000 Integrated Disp
238. elect Implement Steering Sensor Calibration The Implement Steering Sensor Calibration screen displays 2 Forvehicles with coulters make sure they are raised out of the ground For other articulation methods make sure the vehicle is slowly moving forward in a wide open space to allow free movement of the steering mechanism 3 Tap Start 4 Perform the calibration The system will automatically steer to the right and to the left The value for Volts updates as the wheels are steered Implement Automated Deadzone calibration The Automated Deadzone calibration for the implement runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs In this test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs WARNING During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration the system moves the wheels that steer the implement To avoid injury make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear Before you begin calibration e Complete the Implement Steering Sensor calibration page 252 e Make sure the hydraulic fluid is at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure to ensure optimal system performance On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehic
239. elect Rate as Section Section Control Tap Setup to adjust latency and overlap values 2 Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 191 Control setup 9 Field IQ system setup Material linking The Field IQ system can link primary and secondary materials where the secondary material uses the output of the primary material For example LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output of Tru Count Air Clutch systems When planting seeding or strip tilling you can link the following together e Liquid e Granular seed e Granular fertilizer Note Anhydrous cannot be linked When the system is in diagnostics mode e The secondary material is not functional e You can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary material 1 To link materials at the Section Control tab complete these settings Setting Explanation Section Control Select Link to Material Linked Material Select the primary material you want to link to 2 Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control For more information see the sections for each type below Automatic Section Control The Field IQ system can perform automatic section control using e Air clutch such as Tru Count Air Clutch or electric clutch Used for TC and John Deere row command clutches that require inverted switching Signal to shut row off
240. elect the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots Note The default is the AB curve 3 In the Outer Edge Radius entry box adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the pivot center to the outer edge and tap OK The Swath Management screen displays 4 To update the pivot tap Load The Run screen displays with the new pivot dimensions Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 333 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations FreeForm pattern Using the FreeForm pattern you can create non symmetrical guidance paths in fields that have irregular shapes FreeForm combines these patterns e Straight line guidance segments e Curved guidance segments With this combination you can use the FreeForm pattern to create circular spirals or guidance lines with curved and straight line segments for irregular shaped fields as well as rugged topographics Unlike the other patterns where the next swath is repeated you must drive and record all paths Create a FreeForm pattern B 1 Atthe Run screen tap pag open the Mapping Guidance panel 2 Tap X Swaths The Swath Management screen displays 3 Select the FreeForm tab and complete the settings Setting Explanation Record Swath e Manually Use the record button to record the path e When Logging Record the path when you are logging coverage Note If you have an external remote logging switch that controls coverage logging the syste
241. en displays From the Receiver list select the GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system It is recommended that you tap Internal Primary when configuring the display as a stand alone FieldLevel Il system but you can use an external GPS receiver If you are also using the Autopilot system it is recommended that you use Internal Secondary as the Autopilot system will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver From the Corrections list select RTK for all FieldLevel II applications Set the Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver Tap OK FieldLevel Il is now configured and ready to use FieldLevel Il settings Complete the FieldLevel II settings Settings tab page 270 Blade Settings tab page 272 Relative Heights tab page 272 Valve Setup tab page 273 Height Filter Tab page 273 Settings tab 1 2 270 dp At the Configuration screen select FieldLevelll and then tap Setup The FieldLevel II Setup screen displays Select the Settings tab and complete the settings FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel Il Leveling Setting Explanation Operation Mode Cut Fill Range Warning VDOP Level Correction Age Timeout On Grade Tolerance Version 9 25 Revision A Choose your leveling model e Point and Slope Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage e Multiplane design U
242. enna Measure the distance accurately within 3 inches An 144 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Manual guidance Setting Explanation incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance Note Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible within 3 an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance e Ifthe antenna is in front of the axle enter a forward distance e Ifthe antenna is behind the axle enter a back distance Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel Note Any changes you make to the vehicle settings remain even if you replace the Manual Guidance option with the Autopilot option 4 Complete the GPS receiver settings page 98 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 145 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system Note Autopilot system setup is typically done when the system is professionally installed For cabling information see the FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see Autopilot system operation page 359 The sequence of setting up the Autopilot system is 1 Complete the GPS receiver settings page 98 if you have not already done so 2 Complete the settings for the Autopilot sys
243. ensor is detected but is not actively looking for seed e On Sensor is detected and is looking for seed The field is open with system planting Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 439 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Field IQ faults and troubleshooting Faults Message That Displays Field IQ devices not found Explanation Possible Causes Actions One or more Field IQ system Check devices in the current implement e Implement selection configuration are not present e Cabling and fuses e Field Q Diagnostics to identify missing modules e Field IQ Setup New Field IQ devices need configuring Please go to the Field IQ Setup The Field IQ system cannot be Check used without the master switch Ha e Cabling e To see if CAN has been dropped Check terminators The 12 section switch box has been disconnected Field IQ can operate without the Check 12 section switch box Section Sections will be controlled switching will depend only on Cabling automatically existing coverage field e To see if CAN has been boundaries and exclusion zones dropped Check To get on screen buttons for terminators controlling sections cycle power to the display One or more Field IQ One or more Field IQ system Check system devices were disconnected devices have lost re p Cabling and fuses communication with the system 8 2 Field l Q system Diagnostics to ident
244. ent hydraulic flow 2 Raise the PWM base frequency to 200H7z if PWM valve is a raven set to 120hz Rawson 1 Check that drive is running above 100 RPM Adjust gear ratio to achieve proper RPM 2 Isolate the drive from the seed shaft Make sure the drive operates properly with no load No communication with seed sensors 1 Check that the Auxiliary I O connector is plugged in 2 Apower cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in The system only looks for the sensors on boot up If they are not present it won t look for them until power is cycled 3 Check that sensors are compatible with Field IQ If the cables are connected 1 Check for the right harness 2 CT harness John Deere will always have pins 27 and 28 populated These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS 3 PM harness Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness Typically on all planters but JD These harnesses will have pins 24 27 populated 24 and 25 are 8 V power 26 and 27 are ground If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor 456 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting No commu
245. ent switch when in Increment manual rate e Ifthe valve is over active when in manual rate you need to lower the manual rate increment e Ifthe valve is slow to respond when in manual rate you need to increase the manual rate increment Minimum Rate Sets the minimum rate increment Maximum Rate Sets the maximum rate increment Note If you don t want the system to be capable of applying more than 100 units set the maximum rate to 100 units 2 If no materials are listed create a material that you can assign See Material setup page 185 Note You can also assign the correct material later using the Material Assignment option see Material assignment page 353 3 Tap Next to go to the Layout page 189 Layout At the Layout tab enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 189 Control setup 9 Field lQ system setup Setting Explanation Location Name Add a name to the ControlLocation for example Hoppers Front Bin Rear Bin Left Saddle Tanks Bin Tank Setup The system tracks how much material is left in the bin tank and provides a warning when the bin tank needs to be refilled Adjust the settings for Status e On The system tracks the bin tank level and provide warnings e Off The system will not track the bin tank level or provide warnings Density Granular and granulated material only Used in sy
246. ent switches are attached to the Field IQ system Number of Switches Select the number of implement switches that are attached to the Field IQ system The maximim is 3 Minimum Changed Enter the number of implement switches the system should Switches recognize to determine if the implement is lifted For example if the total number of switches is 2 and the Minimum Changed Switches is 2 both switches must show raised before determining the implement is in the raised position Field IQ system setup 1 Atthe Configuration screen select as Field iQand then tap Setup 2 Tap the appropriate button to continue setup Button Tap to Material Setup Set up a predefined list of materials to use in the Control Setup or Material Assignment screens See Material setup page 185 Control Setup Set up control locations and assign Field IQ system modules 184 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Material setup Button Tap to See Control setup page 187 Material Assignment Assign materials that were set up in the Material Setup screen to the Locations that were set up in the Control Setup screen Material setup When you select a material from the Available Materials list some of its specific settings appear on the right hand side of the screen This allows you to check some of the settings needing to view the material Add or edit a material Enter inf
247. er an access path if required See Access paths page 336 Tap New Straight The Run screen displays To create the start point of the line tap Set A youn Bb W N Drive to the end of the line Note The end B point must be at least 50 meters 160 feet from the A point Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 327 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations 10 11 Tap Set B The new AB line displays To extend the line drive further along it and then tap Set B again Tap Done to indicate you have finished The system automatically creates the remaining swaths If you need to shift or skip a swath see e Shift a swath page 340 e Skip a swath page 342 A line creation To create a straight A line 1 2 o N DA UU Ff 328 At the Swath Management screen select the A pattern from the pattern list Enter an access path if required See Access paths page 336 In the A Heading entry box enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous AB Line to use its heading Note The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading Tap New Straight The Run screen displays Drive to the start of the line and then tap Set A Tap Use A The new At line displays Tap Done The system automatically creates the remaining swaths If you need to shift or skip a swath see e Shift a swath page 340 e Skip a swath page 342 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Gui
248. eration of the pitch cylinder If you want the plow to follow the ground contours more closely reduce this distance to the boot length Tile Plow Measurements At the Tile Plow Measurements screen when you are setting up Pitch Control and Height and Pitch control types complete the settings and tap OK IMD 600 section Setting Explanation Label Faces The direction Up Down Left Right that the IMD 600 label faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation Connector Faces The direction Left Right Forward Back that the IMD 600 connector faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation Pitch Offset The amount of angle or tilt up or down if the sensor is not installed parallel to the bottom of the boot If you adjust the pitch offset this can help correct the boot pitch if it is not running level through the ground Roll Correction Corrects for static roll caused by minor variations in the sensor mounting Antenna section Setting Explanation Horizontal The distance from the leading edge of the boot to the center line of the antenna The horizontal distance should be positive if the antenna is forward from the tip of the boot and negative if it is backward Vertical The distance from the bottom of the boot to the base of the antenna dome Lateral Offset of the antenna from the center line of the pipe 280 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guid
249. ersion 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Third party display instructions Steering angle and steering system setup 1 Tap and then tap AO 2 Tap kam and then tap BA 3 Tap Learning sensing system Centralizing switch setup 1 Tap Bens then tap AQ 2 Tap H scroll left or right to adjust the central position and then select OK Steering sensitivity setup 1 Tap ana then tap AQ 2 Tap iv scroll left or right to adjust the steering sensitivity and then select OK Greenstar Monitor Stop Head Height setup Tap gg 1 2 Tap for Harvest Monitor 3 Position the header to 100 4 Record Stop Height Tap soo E next to Record Stop Height Stop Head Height on the Command Center 1 Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center 2 Tap the Combine icon in a the lower right corner of the screen 3 Tap the third button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab 4 After Combine tab is selected continue to press the third button from the left until page 3 displays page numbers are located on the Combine Tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 303 Third party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup CEO Pana aa il te a wedaf a0 a Laga MEF Record Step a O 5 Position the header to 100 6 Press Enter on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height Record Stop Height 56 Greenstar Monitor calibrations
250. ersion 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 61 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Signal input module for OEM switch Home x Configuration gt Setup Signal Input Module Assignment The signal input module SIM can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on screen buttons and features A SIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons 1 To assign the buttons highlight the action in the Actions list 2 Tap lt Set to set the action to the specified input 62 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Sounds The ways sounds can be produced are e Through the internal speaker of the FM 1000 integrated display e If Autopilot is part of your configration you can use an exernal Sonalert 1 Atthe Display Setup screen select Sounds and tap setup 2 Complete the settings and tap OK Setting Explanation Alarm Off External Speaker AP Sonalert Note Sonalert works only with Autopilot Warning Off External Speaker AP Sonalert Note Sonalert works only with Autopilot Track Logging Off External Speaker Touch Screen Both high Off External low Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 63 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Status items IAN Select Status Items Run Screen Info Screen Display Setup The status items are feature
251. es 4 To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap OK Note Stopped DeadBand is the control deadband that is applied when the implement is traveling at less than 0 1 mph 274 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup Tandem dual scraper setup Tandem dual scraper setup For improved productivity when leveling a field the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual scraper implements With a tandem system the second scraper is also controlled by GPS This means that you can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers With a dual system an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper Tandem scraper Thetandem scraper feature tows two scrapers one behind the other This type of leveling provides increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from the other This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt from the scraper buckets Dual scraper A dual scraper is single scraper with two GPS antennas one at each end of the blade This allows for control of the roll of the blade giving a more accurate surface This configuration is ideal for complex surfaces with hig
252. escription rates at various sensor NDVI readings Depending upon what delivery system is used there will be actual minimum and maximum rates obtainable These will be dependent upon components like the pump control valve nozzles and boom plumbing sizes GreenSeeker has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set regardless of the crop algorithm prescription After a nozzle set is chosen the minimum should be set at the lowest rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern performance Maximum rates may be limited by rates that lessen atomization or drift Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 219 Delivery system and liquid control 10 GreenSeeker setup Select a nozzle It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower mid range of the typical rates shown on the application graph Ultimately it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate If most of your NDVI readings in the area of the field not in the NRS are around 0 53 and your review the application graph shows at 0 53 NDVI you should be applying 15GPA then you should choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12 5GPA at its lowest pressure such as 20psi and 21GPA at its highest pressure such as 60psi Since the penalty to under fertilize harm yield is usually greater
253. esents the current mounting orientation of the controller The image is shown as though e You are looking down on the vehicle from above e The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle 2 Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller If the controller is set at a sloped angle the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation Note Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions If custom angles are used the on screen image of the controller does not display 3 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 151 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Manual Override Sensitivity calibration WARNING Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fall resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer Note Manual Override Sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required Manual override is one method of disengaging the Autopilot system by turning the steering wheel When you turn the steering wheel there is a voltage spike that then t
254. ess these settings return to the Run screen and then tap When prompted to close the field tap Close Then tap A to access the Configuration screen For each item shown in the configuration list on the Configuration screen you can e Change settings e View diagnostics e Save the configuration e Switch the selected configuration You can also add or remove features plugins to perform different operations See Activate features plugins for use page 45 Home A Configuration Add Remove Select Active Plugins NX Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 33 Main screens 2 Display basics Run screen You access the Run screen from the Home screen Home eft You can also move between the Run screen and the Configuration screen in some cases Configuration Field Selection OK Selection The Run screen is used during operations and shows your guidance lines and an on screen representation of your vehicle in the field The areas of the Run screen include e Operational view page 314 e Main buttons page 311 e On screen lightbar for vehicle page 318 e Optional features plugins page 37 e Coverage button and information see Coverage button for logging page 318 e Engage button page 317 if applicable You can navigate from the Run screen to the Configuration screen to e Change settings e View diagnostics e Save configuration in some cases C
255. est accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration Calibration steps 1 Set the antenna height above the ground a Place the tractor on a flat level surface b Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver or antenna c Enter this value for Antenna Height Above Ground 2 Set the antenna distance from the fixed axle a Place the tractor on a flat level surface b Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver or antenna 158 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system c Enter this value into the Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle entry box Enter a negative value if the GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction Configure the roll offset correction Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it e Tire track offset method e Flag offset method Choose the method which best matches the conditions Enter the roll offset value for roll offset Select one of the offline direction options depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the right or left Tire track offset method for roll offset Note Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction For best results use a RTK mode or OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at
256. eteecsetseseetesees 110 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 11 12 Contents OmniSTAR VBS 22 kakak kaaa 112 RangePoint RIX eee ccc eee cece ccc cece cece cece cece eece eee eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 113 Frequencies and baud rate 2222 e cence nec cccececececceeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 114 GPS output settings lll ee eee ec ccc ence cece ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeees 115 Serial NMEA messages 2 22 aa 115 NMEA messages 2 022 222 eee cece eee eee ee cee eee eee cece eee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeee 116 CAN GPS messages 2 222 2e eee eee eee cece eee ee cee ee eee ee eee cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeees 117 Remote Output setup e cece ee aoaaa 118 Remote Output settings ua 118 Calibrate implement lead time 2 2 2 2 aaa 121 Serial Data Input ka aaa 124 Ag3000 modem 2Ha eee cece eee e ence ccc cece cee ceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeteteettteetteeees 124 Modem activation aaa 125 Modem setup 2 aaa 125 DCM 300 Modem 22 a aaa 125 Unlock the modem 2 2 2 2 eee eee cence eee ceceeccecececeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 126 Service activation 2 2 20 2222 e cece cence cece ccc cece cece cece ceeeeeceeececeeeeeeeees 126 Modem setup aaa 126 6 Field feature mapping setup _ 20 20 22 0c ccc cece cece cece ec cecceccecceeeeeeeees 129 Field feature mapping settings aaa 130 Access Feature Mapping se
257. eties Add Add a new variety and select a name for it Remove Select a variety name in the left hand list and tap Remove to delete it Edit Select a variety name in the list and tap Edit to change the settings The Variety Attributes screen displays Enter a name for the variety choose the color to display for the variety and optionally complete additional record keeping information Assign Select the variety from the left hand list and tap Assign For each variety select the row numbers on your implement that will be applying the variety Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 345 Coverage logging 18 Operations Setting or Button Explanation Clear Tap to clear all current entries 3 When you have finished with the settings tap OK When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping Guidance panel list to Variety this variety color displays in the guidance window Tip For quick access to the Hybrid Setup screen from the Run screen set the Mapping Guidance panel list to Variety and then tap Attributes If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement the variety assignments are removed 346 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation Field IQ operation WARNING When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position the machine is fully operational Take all necessary precautions to
258. etting Turn the steering wheel The Override Inactive button changes color when the Override becomes active With the system active assess whether the manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for e Speed of steering wheel turn e Distance of steering wheel turn 3 To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting move the slider bar 152 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system Slider Bar Direction Sensitivity is Manual Override is triggered Left Increased More easily Right Decreased Less easily The value above the slider bar on the right is the current setting The total range of the slider bar is 0 5 to 2 5 where 0 5 is the most sensitive setting and 2 5 is the least sensitive 4 Totry the new setting tap OK The Vehicle Calibration screen displays Select Manual Override again The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen displays again 6 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to test each new setting Note You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions of loading and or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system For example you can turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity 7 Tap OK to accept the new setting or tap Cancel to exit AutoSense calibration 1 At the Vehicle Calibration screen select Autosense Calibration and
259. etup aa 143 Guidance settings AA 144 Manual guidance 222222 eee e cece ccecceecececeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 144 Autopilot system _ 2 2 2 00000000000000 e cece ce cecccececeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 146 BEBIN SETUP a pet ee te eee eee cee eae ee ee kk 146 Vehicle settings for Autopilot system cece cece ececccccccceeceeeeeees 146 Autopilot calibration 2 2 2 2 eee cee c cn cccececcccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeees 150 Row Guidance _ 12 c cece cece cece ceeeceeeeeeetetetttettttettttteteees 163 Save vehicle profile 2 0 2 oc aaa 165 EZ Pilot assisted steering system _ 22 2 2 eee cece eee cecccccccccceceeeeceeeeeeeees 166 Vehicle settings for EZ Pilot system aa 166 Steering settings for EZ Pilot system 2 2 0 0 0 0002 cece cece cece ccc ccc ccceceeeeeteteetees 167 Engage settings for EZ Pilot system aaa 168 EZ Pilot system calibration aaa 169 EZ Steer assisted steering system aaa 172 Engage settings for EZ Steer aaa 173 Advanced settings for EZ Pilot cece cece ec ececcceecececeeceeeeeees 173 EZ Steer system calibration 0 00000 aaa 174 9 Field IQ system setup 20 00 02 ooo cece cece cece cece cceceeceeceeceeceeseeseeseeee 179 Field IQ system functionality 2 20 0 0000000000 aaa 180 General setup information aa 181 Implement setup for F
260. etup between work sessions No Select if you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved VDOP Level Vertical Dilution of Precision measurs the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal If the VDOP reaches the value you enter a warning will display Asetting of less than 3 is recommended As Built Logging Manual Logs data if hydraulics are engaged and if you have begun logging in the Run screen Engage Logs data only if Auto is engaged on the plow 282 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup Setting Explanation Filter Type None Raw GPS data is used for height This setting is recommended Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls Jump detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings When you select this you must enter the following values e Threshold The change in height value that will trigger the value e Decay Time When this filter is triggered this will be the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height Calibrate WM Drain for cantilever plow Follow the steps in sequence for consistent calibration results and improved performance If you skip steps you may experience inconsistent results Step 1 Select the mode 1 Atthe Configuration screen select J WM Drain
261. f you place the files in a series of folders the combined filename and folder path may become too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files To avoid this it is recommended that you place data in your computer s C folder 3 Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows Explorer This copies all the sub folders and files in the folder Note When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer you must keep all the shape files dbf shp and shx together so that office software can open the theme file To ensure that the files stay together always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files 4 If you create a new event in a field and you already have the Field folder containing any previous events on the office computer you should still copy the Field folder so that the new EventHistory information is copied Delete data AN CAUTION Deleting data is permanent You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data If you need to create more space you can use the FM 1000 integrated display to delete from the internal memory or the USB drive e Clients e Farms e Fields e Events Note You cannot undo data deletion or restore the data Home gt Ko Configuration WH Setup N d F Data Files Display Setup Data Files 1 Atthe Data Files screen tap Delete Data The Delete Data Storage screen displays 2 If yo
262. feet and inches The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance The first pulse occurs at the A point Note Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns Duration The duration of the pulse in milliseconds ms 120 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup Setting Explanation Within Line Distance The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online If the vehicle is more than this distance offline no pulse occurs Design Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse Manual Trigger Color The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button Be sure to edit the line feature to enable remote output and the trigger warning See Line feature settings page 134 Complete the settings and tap OK Note This option works with straight AB and A lines pivots and curves For using remote output using when crossing a line feature see Crossing a line feature operation page 377 5 Tap OK when your are finished Calibrate implement lead time There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that pulse triggers an action on the implement To compensate for this system delay you can set a lead time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the
263. figured sections exceed the maximum that is supported Please reduce the number of sections Field IQ diagnostics Explanation Possible Causes Actions If the left fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field IQ Setup the leftmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections If the right fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field IQ Setup the rightmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections Cannot flush because the system is not calibrated Rate and Section Control Module and Rawson Control Module can not be present at the same time Please disconnect either device before continuing setup Field IQ has been disabled Rate and Section Control Module and Rawson Control Module cannot be present at the same time Field IQ has been disabled One or more of the Field IQ system devices requires calibration Please enter a valid flowmeter calibration constant Weighed NH3 End must be less than Weighed NH3 Start Version 9 25 Revision A This message appears if you try to use the Manual Flush button in the Tank Bin tab of the Field IQ Setup when a rate controller is not yet calibrated When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material they must all be of the same type When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material they must all be of the same type Go to the calibration screen to calibrate a controller The flow meter constan
264. forces using a combination of accelerometers and gyroscopes Integrated radio Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 477 L 20 Glossary Trimble integrated radios contain a radio antenna integrated with the GNSS receiver or display in a single unit These integrated radios receive corrections transmitted by Trimble GNSS RTK base stations L Logging Also called coverage logging Logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation for example applying fertilizer to a field License A license enables a software feature and is valid for an unlimited duration A license does not need to be activated but does need to be assigned to and delivered to a specific display Assignment and delivery of a license occurs on the reseller portal M Manual override Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable Master benchmark Before you can create a survey you must set at least one point at a known location called a benchmark When you create a benchmark the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB Field coordinates are calculated from this point Material A product that is cont
265. ft R right Note Freeform curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Number value is not appropriate for Freeform curves The number of points that define the current line Current level of the tank Tank Level N Tank Level NH3 Tank Bin Level Target Rate Total Boundaries Area Total Seed Rate Total Vol Applied Total Vol Applied N Total Vol Applied NH3 Transfer Status TrueGuide Roll TrueGuide Trim Up VDOP Vehicle Model Vehicle Type Vertical Error Estimate Version 9 25 Revision A Level of Wagen currently in the tank Level of anhydrous ammonia currently in the tank Current level of the tank or bin Application target rate Total area between the current boundaries Total seed rate that is currently being applied Total volume of material applied Total valime af nitrogen applied Total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied Connected Farm transfer activity Roll corrections in degrees that are applied Distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted Vertical heleht of the vehicle falativa i the field origin palit a negative number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin point Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better Model of vehicle that is configured Ty
266. g or seeding and are using version 6 0 or later of the FM 1000 integrated display a variety map layer is created within the Field folder if you are using either e Field IQ crop input control system e Serial Rate Control When you open the client farm and field and create a harvest event the system automatically loads the variety map layer into the background on the screen Note Set up the implement as a harvest operation if you want the variety map layer to display After harvest is complete use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 429 Yield Monitoring operation 18 Operations Load tracking Yield Monitoring tracks loads of grains harvested through the season for a field After the harvest is complete use the Farm Works Mapping software to track loads in the office At the Load Details screen you can view for each load listed Item Explanation Load Name Name you assigned to the load Recorded Weight The weight of the load Scale Ticket Weight Recorded Moisture Scale Ticket Moisture 430 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Diagnostics In this chapter This chapter covers diagnostics and System diagnostics 432 HOUR neOUNE Autopilot diagnostics 434 EZ Pilot diagnostics
267. g too slow for safe anhydrous Version 9 25 Revision A This message shows if the hydraulic motor fails to start during the Rawson Control Module Hydraulic Test This message shows if the hydraulic motor stops unexpectedly during the Rawson Control Module Hydraulic Test This message may appear during calibration of a Rawson Control Module in a planter application If the calibration test does not dispense the expected number of seeds it is likely that the seed pick up is not operating perfectly You can adjust the calibration constant to compensate for this but the seed spacing will be inconsistent where seeds are missed or doubled up This message shows if the hydraulic motor fails to turn during calibration of a Rawson Control Module For safety reasons the Field IQ system will not apply anhydrous in auto rate control mode at FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 451 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes Actions application Increase the speeds below 2 mph Either speed of the vehicle increase the speed or switch to manual mode Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting Unable to open valve 1 Check all for proper valve type in rate control setup 2 NH3 will not operate unless vehicle is moving over 1 5 MPH If settings are correct 1 Disconnect the tank from the system 2 Set the system up as a liquid 3 Check that system has control of the va
268. g while the Autopilot system acquires the line After the TrueGuide system has taken control its status changes to ON and the right hand button changes to AUTO 2 To disengage the TrueGuide system at anytime tap OFF the left hand button Note As soon as the TrueGuide system is disengaged the Autopilot system immediately begins providing all guidance Note To turn on the TrueGuide system when the status is Waiting tap ON again TrueGuide system status indicators The system status displays on the TrueGuide tab between the Off On Auto buttons Off The TrueGuide system is off Disengaged The TrueGuide system is ready but not engaged Waiting The Autopilot system is engaged and the TrueGuide system is preparing to engage after a short pause On The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 387 Vehicle Sync operation 18 Operations Vehicle Sync operation Vehicle Sync replaces the transfer of data using a USB drive Instead data is transferred wirelessly between vehicles Real time up to date information improves operational efficiency and accuracy Multiple operators belonging to the same WorkGroup in the same field can transfer location information on other vehicles and e Point line area features e Coverage mapping and implement section switching e Productivity and operational statistics and conditions Vehicles using Vehicle Sync can also s
269. ge Disc Speed to On xX Spreader AXIS W 40 1 amp 50 1 Manual Speed to the speed x x you will drive GPSC to On x 224 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 11 ISOBUS setup Equipment setup For Kverneland Models oe Virtual Task Terminal Controller Spreader Exacta TLGEOspread Driving Speed Signal to GPS x Xx J1939 Task Controller to On x Drill Accord Optima Driving Speed to GPS J1939 x x Precision Drill Task Controller to On X Drill Monopill SE Driving Speed Signal to GPS x x J1939 Task Controller to On xX For Rauch Models kag Virtual Task Terminal Controller Spreader AXIS H EMC 40 1 amp Task Control to On x 50 1 GPS Control to On X X VariSpread to On xX Change Disc Speed to On xX Spreader AXIS W 40 1 amp 50 1 Manual Speed to the speed x x you will drive GPSC to On x For Vicon Virtual Task Terminal Controller Spreader RO EDW GEOspread Driving Speed Signal to GPS x Xx J1939 Task Controller to On X 3 Refer to the equipment manufacturer s operating instructions for how to change the settings 4 Ifyou are using the Task Controller verify that the equipment recognizes it For more information refer to the equipment manufacturer s operating instructions Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 225 Equipment setup 11 ISOBUS setup 226 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A
270. get height beyond the On Grade Limit The blade is considerably above the target height more than double the On Grade Limit The blade is considerably below the target height more than double the On Grade Limit The blade is at the correct target height within the On Grade Limit When you are using dual or tandem scrapers you will see two blade indicators on the Run screen Additionally you can tap to open the legend for the operational view of the Run screen and select either Height or Cut Fill FieldLevel Il status items Status items are text information that e Describe factors in leveling models e Beginning with P are for the primary GPS receiver for example P Blade Height e Beginning with S for the secondary if you are using dual or tandem scrapers for example S Blade Height Status items can be set to always display at the top of the screen or on a slide out tab See Status items page 64 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 405 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Status Item Altitude Blade Height Boot Depth CMR Percent Correction Age Correction Type Cut fill Design Height Design Slope Distance Traveled East GPS Status H Error HDOP Heading Latitude Explanation Current GPS altitude of the blade Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected Depth of the boot
271. gs page 115 3 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask 4 On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs 110 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings 5 On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 6 When you have completed the settings tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 111 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings OmniSTAR VBS OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite based subscription correction service with 6 8 15 20 cm accuracy 1 Atthe Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays 2 On the Settings tab complete the settings Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose OmniSTAR VBS GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 3 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask 4 On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs 5 On the Radar Output tab enter the
272. h and roll of the combine To benefit from this feature perform the pitch roll calibration as described in the owner s manual The system has correction parameters for each tilt direction that you can adjust to improve performance Use the following table when you decide how to adjust these parameters Note The pitch sensitivity adjustment depends on whether your sensor is mounted in front of or behind the center of the paddle Tilt angle Yield reading too high Yield reading too low Left roll Increase left roll sensitivity Decrease left roll sensitivity Right roll Increase right roll sensitivity Decrease right roll sensitivity Backward pitch sensor Decrease backward pitch Increase backward pitch 292 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices Tilt angle Yield reading too high Yield reading too low forward of center sensitivity sensitivity Backward pitch sensor aft Increase backward pitch Decrease backward pitch of center sensitivity sensitivity Forward pitch sensor Increase forward pitch sensitivity Decrease forward pitch forward of center sensitivity Forward pitch sensor aft of Decrease forward pitch Increase forward pitch sensitivity center sensitivity To start adjust the sensitivity numbers in increments of 0 2 Test weight The Yield Monitoring system measures the volume of grain passing through the combine and estimates the we
273. h variability slopes Note For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls Set up Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller e Implement setup page 276 e Prepare connections page 276 e Primary receiver setup page 276 e Secondary receiver setup page 276 e Tandem Dual settings page 276 e Tandem dual calibration page 277 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 275 Tandem dual scraper setup 16 Water Management setup Implement setup If you have not already configured the implement see Implement setup page 276 Prepare connections If not already installed on the display install e FieldLevel Il e Tandem Dual When installed the Configuration screen will show e FieldLevel II with its associated GPS receiver e Tandem Dual with its associated GPS receiver Primary receiver setup FieldLevel II controls the primary receiver 1 At the Configuration screen below Field Level select the EE GPS receiver listed and then tap Setup 2 From the Receiver list select Internal Primary 3 From the Corrections list select RTK 4 Set the NetworkiD field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver Secondary receiver setup Tandem Dual controls the secondary receiver 1 Atthe Configuration screen below Tandem Dual select the EE GPS receiver list
274. hare data on e Yield and moisture e Tank levels e Location and speed Common uses You can use Vehicle Sync for e Same operation Multiple vehicles and implements in a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup performing the same tasks such spraying planting or harvesting e Same field different operation Multiple vehicles and implements performing different tasks such as a sprayer working with a planter or a harvester working with a grain buggy e Observation A vehicle can see the location and productivity of the WorkGroup but does not share coverage lines or points Benefits Vehicle Sync assists in e Planting Using Field IQ provides clutch triggering based on coverage sharing which maximizes input conservation e Spraying Sharing tank level and as applied information e Harvesting Maintaining yield to area integrity within the harvest data and sharing instant yield and moisture information Using Vehicle Sync Up to six vehicles can join a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup by joining the same channel 388 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Vehicle Sync operation Join a WorkGroup To sync with a specific vehicle make sure e Your vehicle has a clear line of sight with that vehicle e You are within a distance of 325 yards 300 meters from that vehicle e At least one vehicle is working in an open field To link with a vehicle see Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync You create g
275. has been calibrated correctly e Ifthe Roll value is not 0 0 1 note the value and then repeat Step 3 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error For example e Current angle reading 07 e IMD 600 Roll reading 0 5 e Increase Roll Offset by 0 2 Roll Offset now 1 1 Method 2 1 Park the system on a known level surface Ensure the boot is flat on the ground 2 Place a digital angle indication device flat against a smooth surface on the side of the system s boot shank Note the roll angle of the boot shank 3 Note the Roll value that displays on the Drainage Diagnostics screen 4 At the Tile Measurements screen for the Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value For example e Shank angle reading 4 7 e IMD 600 Roll reading 2 5 284 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup e RollOffset 2 2 5 Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered reading to settle on a stable value e Ifthe Roll value is 0 0 1 of the measurement taken in Step 2 the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly e Ifthe Roll value is not 0 0 1 note the value and then repeat Step 2 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error For example e Shank angle reading 4 7 e IMD 600 Roll reading 4 5 e Increase Roll Offset by 0 2 Roll Offset now 2 4 Step 4 Ca
276. he E 4 Data Exchange menu c Enter the COM 1 setup and complete the settings Setting Enter Equipment type VRA remote Protocol Hardi VRA Baud Rate 9600 3 Turn off the controller and turn it on again 4 Go to Menu2 3 and select VRA Remote Control Enable Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 231 LH5000 12 Serial Rate Control setup LH5000 To use the LH 5000 controller you need a special adapter cable LH Agro P N 198 701 to connect to the cable P N 67091 1 Connect the FM 1000 integrated display to the LH5000 by either a Connecting the special adapter cable LH Agro P N 198 701 to connect to the display cable P N 67091 Cable P N 6709 will be connected to Port Aor B on the display b Connecting the display to the controller with an extension straight through serial cable 2 Set up the controller press Return Return C Fertil Distrib d Select Type LH5000 f Accept Raven To use a Raven controller with the FM 1000 integrated display the controller must e Be GPS ready e Use Raven s latest communications protocol which was introduced in 1996 If your controller is not GPS ready or does not use the latest protocol contact Raven for an upgrade pack Cable P N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on the display Cable P N 6709 will be connected to Port A or B on the display 232 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 1
277. he Implement Type tab a From the Operations list choose the operation b Tap Edit The Select Implement Layout screen displays c Tap the appropriate layout and then tap OK Operations Layouts Spreading Pull type spreader Self propelled spreader Spraying Self propelled front boom Self propelled rear boom Pull type sprayer Planting Standard Front split Rear split Center offset Seeder None Tillage None Other None 3 On the Measurements tab enter the measurements for the implement These measurements are crucial to the performance of the vehicle and implement in the field Measurement Explanation Swath Width The distance between guidance lines This is typically the working width of your implement vehicle or header Application Width The width of a pass including any overlap This measurement is reflected by the display s coverage map Application Offset The distance between the tractor and the implement e Guidance Only This is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the location where the coverage will be mapped Used to reference from the vehicle to the implement application point e Field lIQ Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement tool bar The offset is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point 182 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Implement setup for Field Q Measuremen
278. he fine or coarse increment Up Hill Left Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right Up Hill Right Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left Bench Of Re Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re bench Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height 402 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Button Explanation Delete Benchmark Removes any benchmark on the field You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it Logging Tap to log coverage This shows on the map where you have been dependent on your implement width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information Guide Tap to get lightbar guidance at the current level Import designs After you finish with your design you can export a control file GPS for use with the FieldLevel II system Copy the design control file into the AgGPS Designs folder on a USB drive Reload a field When you create a design for a field for example a target leveling plane the design is saved in the field directory The design files are associated with the field If you close the field and then open it again the design reloads with the field With RTK GPS the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previou
279. he non reference strip Tap Non Ref drive the nonreference strip and then tap Non Ref again to end recording Note As the NDVI is collected the data displays Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data If you stop in one location this will affect the average values The Ref and Non Ref buttons change to a lighter color when selected or active 6 Tap Done At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen on the Calibration panel values that were collected are displayed Setting Explanation Maximum Reference You can override the existing data and enter new data Average Non Reference or Reference You can override the existing data and enter new data Minimum Reference You can override the existing data and enter new data Calibrate Non Ref Or Reference Tap to collect fresh data You will not see the new values until you deselect the button you have tapped Note The reference values for Maximum Average and Minimum are also available for the Auto Calibration function on the Algorithm tab 7 When you are satisfied with the data on the Calibration tab select the Algorithm tab For Formula select either e Anexisting formula e Custom Table to create a new algorithm see Create a custom table page 369 Note The formula selected for your last job will still be current so you are often just verifying that the correct formula is being used The values to be entered will change based upon the formula selected Some v
280. he rates being sent but the display still records the applied rates Baud Rate 9600 Some older controllers are only capable of 1200 baud Such controllers must be upgraded Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 233 Rawson and New Leader 12 Serial Rate Control setup Screen or Settings Additional Information Setting Type AN CAUTION Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates If the target rate is zero and spray is still being applied you must turn off the boom sections manually Rawson and New Leader The Rawson and New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate Yield and a step size to describe rates If you have a dual channel Rawson Accu Rate controller see Rawson and New Leader page 234 1 At the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen set the default rate to match the yield value or nominal flow rate in the Rawson controller Any non zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select A rate of zero turns off the hydraulic drive Note For best result when creating prescriptions use rates in 296 496 or 6 Yo increments of the default rate Select the percentage used on the FM 1000 integrated display 2 Put the controller into GPS mode This allows the display to change the rates on the controller Without GPS mode the display will log only the rates being used a Turn on the controller b Tap the MODE button twice c
281. he system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth shown as a blue line Outlet to Optimal Min Slope The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet Depth to the Optimal Depth The tile plow will level out over a long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of arun The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope Outlet Depth The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet This depth can either be entered or measured To measure the depth a Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet 420 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Settings Tab Explanation b Tap Measure The outlet depth is entered by the system Also another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m 65 ft of the end of the surveyed section line The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag Outlet Elevation Elevation of outlet depth Smoothing The required smoothing level None Low Medium High to work out any humping sections in the design It is recommended you use either Low or Medium smoothing Measure Output button Tap to showthe outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation t
282. he tile boot or blade by the Slope Adjust increment Raise the boot or blade by the blade step increment Lower the boot or blade by the blade step increment Select a defined percentage of vertical drop for a horizontal distance 426 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Control Explanation traveled Coarse Height Offset When you tap Coarse the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Blade increment This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch Coarse Pitch Offset When you tap Coarse the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Pitch increment This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are located relative to the section line Logging Tap to log coverage to be able to see on your map where you have been dependent on your implement width A shape file will also be created with cut fill and height information Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 427 Yield Monitoring operation 18 Operations Yield Monitoring operation Yield Monitoring enables you to track the e
283. he variable rate application may be logged to the card The information describing prescriptions for the Field IQ system also applies to non Trimble variable rate controllers Target and applied rates The FM 1000 integrated display can control only a single channel at any one time This active channel is specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen The target and applied rates shown on the Run screen are specific to this active channel Units Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement Each channel can be configured to use different types of units for example Ib ac oz ac or gal ac When constructing prescription maps make sure that the maps use the same units that the controller is configured for 236 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER TrueGuide setup In this chapter The TrueGuide implement guidance system works with the Autopilot system TrueGuide system 2 202200 238 j KANO TrueGuide employs passive implement Implement setup and selection 239 control and uses the second GPS antenna on TrueGuide setup ollaaa 240 the implemen to achieve implement location accuracy TrueGuide calibration 241 TrueGuide setup includes e Implement setup e TrueGuide system setup e Implement guidance calibration Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 237 TrueGuide system 1
284. hen select the file or files you want e Select all files Select Everything 2 Tap Copy gt The item is copied to the v USB list Transfer from USB AN CAUTION Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data This will corrupt the data AN CAUTION POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA If you copy files from An to another or to an FM 1000 integrated display An physical FM 1000 integrated display to another or to an FM 1000 integrated display First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files Transfer your files to this subfolder Otherwise you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data P e Select all files in the category Select the entire category by tapping the category name 1 At the Data Files screen from the USB list tap the item to copy You can e Select individual files See files within a category by tapping gt The arrow changes to a down arrow W and shows the files stored under the category Then select the file or files you want e Select all files Select Everything 2 Tap Copy gt The item is copied to the Internal Storage list USB to computer After you have transferred data from the display to the USB 1 Remove the USB drive from the display 2 Insert the USB drive into your computer 80 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Delete data I
285. hicle or can be moved by a user entered distance or number of rows Row width is defined by the swath width divided by the number of rows Measurement Explanation Swath Width Set the distance between guidance passes Application Width The applied width of the tool or boom which sets the width of the coverage logging and mapping Application Offset Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type e Rear axle on front steering tractor and self propelled sprayer e Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor e Center of tracks on a tracked tractor Rows Number of rows that are covered by the implement Left Right Offset Measure from the center of the vehicle to the center of the implement or header This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line Geometry Set up the measurements required for accurate implement modeling Measurement Explanation Type Select the implement type The antenna offsets are required when a GPS antenna is mounted on the implement for TrueGuide and TrueTracker Hitch to Ground Contact Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point Point that the implement rotates about For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools Note For modeled implements shortening thi
286. hmark around this point 2 Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined It has a Primary Slope and Primary Heading component The Primary Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the primary axis 3 Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined The Cross Heading will always be 90 or 270 from the Primary Heading The Cross Slope is defined as a negative number where water will fall along the cross axis To define the plane by a single heading and slope then you should set Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 399 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Item Name Explanation the Cross Slope value to 0 000 4 Composite When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined the Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading where water will fall If you have 0 000 slope on the Cross axis the Composite Heading will be the same as the Primary Heading Use a single point FieldLevel Il Panel To define a plane using a single point 1 At the FieldLevel Il panel create a benchmark to define the direction of the slope and its heading It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point For example where the water will enter or exit the field This ensures that where the benchmark is the plane is on grade 2 Tap Design The Plane Editor screen displays Complete the settings and tap OK Item Explanation New Plan Choos
287. hmarks to help define the plane If a primary heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks If all the slopes of a field are to be defined then you need at least three benchmarks Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap Design The Plane Editor screen displays 2 Tap New Plane The New Plane screen displays 3 From the Benchmarks list select the benchmark you want to use for the primary pivot then tap Add The benchmark is copied to the Design Benchmarks list 4 Repeat the previous step until all the required benchmarks are copied to the Design Benchmarks list The Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi point plane 5 Set the Primary Slope Heading a Choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the Set From button Note It is recommended that this point is the uphill point of the two points that will be used to define the primary slope b Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the Set gt To button c Tap OK The Plane Editor screen displays The selected benchmarks appear in the Benchmarks table on the upper left along with their associated cut fill values The Primary Slope and Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen 6 To update the slope values Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 401 Water Management functionality 18 Operations a Identify the benchma
288. ht indicators e The left height indicator shows the height of the left primary blade e The right height indicator shows the height of the right secondary blade Left plus and minus Controls the blade height for the left primary blade Right plus and minus Controls the blade height for the right secondary blade Pi AUT L Controls the left primary automatics Si AUT L Controls the right secondary automatics 408 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Tandem scraper controls es te Left plus and minus Controls the blade height for the front primary blade Ao Right plus and minus Controls the blade height for the rear secondary blade Blade height indicators e The left height indicator shows the height of the front primary blade e The right height indicator shows the height of the rear secondary blade Pi AUT LI Controls the front primary automatics Si AUT L Controls the rear secondary automatics Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 409 Water Management functionality 18 Operations WM Drain operation To use WM Drain you e Createa tile ditch survey line page 412 e Set survey height offset page 412 e Design a section line page 419 e Installation ditch cleaning page 423 410 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functi
289. ht of ground meters Local_Time Local time hh mmi ss s 56 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Column Description Units Logging On Coverage logging flag 1 on O off On or off Num_Stats Number of GPS satellites Offline Offline distance from swath center line meters Pitch The pitch Attribute Not Populated Relative_Height Height meters Roll The roll Attribute Not Populated Speed GPS derived ground speed kph Status Text GPS status description Swath Num Current swath headland number Swath Wdth Swath width meters Target The target rate at the current position Total Qty Total volume of material as applied for the current field Only supported for the Aerial Flow Controller Autocal Flow controller and Crophawk Flow Meter Units Units metric Attribute Not Populated UTC Date Point creation date YYYYMMDD UTC_Time UTC time hh mmi ss s Version Track attribute file version Yaw The yaw Attribute Not Populated 7 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 57 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Lightbar settings The display has two lightbar options e The on screen lightbar that displays at the top of the Run screen e Oneor more external lightbars On screen lightbar You can edit the default settings for the on screen virtual lightbar 1 At the Display Setup
290. ibration screen Modules calibration Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first The Field system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 Atthe Configuration screen select w Field i and then tap Calibrate 2 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select the operation listed under the module that you want to calibrate The message Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration Note Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator 200 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field lQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field Q Note Before priming the system the Automatic Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in the manual position 3 Tap Drive Calibration and then tap OK The Drive Calibration screen displays Enter the appropriate settings Tab Explanation Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Auto Tuning Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings approp
291. ide 201 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field IQ system setup Module drive calibration The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death The Field IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate 1 Atthe Configuration screen select Field IQ and tap Calibrate 2 Atthe Field IQ Calibration screen select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate The message Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration Note If you have an implement lift switch calibrate it first 3 Select Drive Calibration and tap OK The Drive Calibration screen displays 4 At the Drive Limits tab enter the minimum and maximum flow valves and tap Next 5 At the Drive Settings tab turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust the values if needed Enter the values for e Allowable Error e Integral Gain e Minimum Response 6 Tap Next and enter the following values for e Allowable Error e Gain e Minimum Response Note For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer refer to the support note Field IQ crop Input Control System For
292. ider or a CORS See DCM 300 Modem page 125 e Vehicle Sync Transmit data between vehicles See Vehicle Sync page 260 e Serial Data Input Enable data input from an external serial device See Serial Data Input page 124 e Remote Output Enable remote data output to an external device See Remote Output setup page 118 e EZ Remote Joystick Control a variety of display functions remotely See EZ Remote Joystick page 50 Water Management e Survey and design Survey a field and then create a design See Survey the field page 393 and Create save a design page 395 e FieldLevel II e Level the field to a design install subsurface drainage or surface ditches See FieldLevel l Leveling page 268 e Control leveling with two GPS receivers in one of two possible scraper configurations See Tandem dual scraper setup page 275 Dual scraper controls page 408 and Tandem scraper controls page 409 e WM Drain farm drainage solution For subsurface drainage See WM Drain setup page 278 and WM Drain operation page 410 Harvest e Yield Monitoring Display yield monitoring data See Yield Monitoring settings page 294 and Yield Monitoring operation page 428 38 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Screen shots Screen shots To save an imagein the Run screen tap po The image is stored in the folder AgGPS Diagnostics Screenshots e Inthe Data Diction
293. idth variable to calibrate for Low Medium and High flows Speed method 1 Conduct a calibration load of 3 000 6 000 Ibs at your normal constant speed 2 Repeat this procedure for e Oneload at 1 mph less than the normal operating speed e Oneload at 2 mph less than the normal operating speed e Oneload at 1 mph higher than the normal operating speed This provides a calibration curve for Low Medium and High flow variations throughout the course of harvest An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows e Load 1 4 547 lbs 4mph e Load 2 3 834 lbs 3 mph e Load 3 2 764 lbs 2mph e Load 4 5 768 lbs 5mph Cut width method Note It is highly recommended that you conduct a minimum of three calibration loads to ensure that the system provides accurate readings for all low medium and high flows throughout harvest If you conduct a Single Load calibration this may result in poor accuracy performance when Harvesting outside the Flow range at which the system was initially calibrated Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 299 Third party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup 1 Conduct a calibration load of 3 000 6 000 Ibs at your normal constant speed with a 100 cut width 12 rows at 30 ft 2 Repeat this procedure for e One load at 75 of the normal cut width 8 rows at 20 ft e One load at 50 of normal cut width 6 rows at 15 ft e One load at 25 of normal cu
294. ield IQ 2 2 2 aaa 181 Field IQ system setup e cece cece cece cece ce ceeceeceececccceececceeeeceeeeeeeees 184 Material setup 2 2 2 2 aaa 185 Alarms tab 220 2 occ aaa 186 Operation tab a a aaa 186 Coefficent tab 222 22 a 187 Control setup aaa 187 Material tab 2 2 2 ccc cece cece cece cccccccceececccccececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeees 188 Layout 189 Section Control tab aaa 191 Material linking 0 0 0 aaa 192 Automatic Section Control 2 192 Rate Control tab cece cece en cccncccececececeeeecceceeeceeeeeees 195 Row monitoring _ a 197 SENSON tabi na ka raat Se ys att AA ee ea eee 198 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 2 2 0 cece cccecccceceeeeeeesees 200 Air Seeder calibration 22 2 2 kakak 200 Anhydrous calibration 2 0 2 2 2 a 201 Planter calibration 2 2 2 2 2c ccc eee ec cece ee ee cece eccceceeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 203 Sprayer calibration aaa 207 Spreader calibration 2 2 2 0 kaaa 207 Upgrade Field IQ system firmware ccc ceccccccceeececcceceeeececceeeeers 213 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 13 14 Contents Upgrade steps aaa 213 10 GreenSeeker setup u o ccc c cece cece cece ccc cecceccccceceeceeseesseseteeeneees 215 GreenSeeker functionality 0 00 0 a 216 Care and main
295. ield Monitoring setup Harvest Monitor Combine gt Tap PF347112 Version 1 12 Tap Moisture 1 12 Third party display instructions Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 307 Third party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup 308 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Operations In this chapter This chapter covers common user work operations preformed at the Run screen Operations overview _ 310 Operation basics _ 202 2 222222 eee e ee 311 LA 319 Field featureuse 322 Guidance pattern use 0 000000000 323 Coverage logging 343 Field IQ operation _ 2222 347 Manual guidance operation 358 Autopilot system operation 359 EZ Pilot system operation _ 362 EZ Steer system operation 365 GreenSeeker operation 368 ISOBUS operation 373 Remote Output operation _ 375 Row Guidance operation 379 TrueTracker operation 383 TrueGuide operation _ 386 Vehicle Sync operation 388 Water Management functionality 392 Yield Monitoring operation 428 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1
296. ield and then reopen it Load a pattern f ee B Swath Run A gt PN Management Run NN ne N Mapping Guidance List of Existing Lines Panel To load a line pattern you previously created in a field 338 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use B At the Run screen tap AF open the Mapping Guidance panel Tap NI Swaths The Swath Management screen displays To load a pattern select it from the list on the left of the screen The system loads the closest pattern to you Tap Load The Run screen displays with the pattern loaded If you try to load a pattern that is over 100 km 63 miles away the following message displays Your current position is too far from the field to work in it Rename a swath Note To rename swaths you must have entered the administration password You cannot rename line features or Freeform curves an e W N List of Existing Enter new Rename swath name Guidance Lines f 4 B At the Run screen tap AF open the Mapping Guidance panel Tap X Swaths The Swath Management screen displays From the list on the left select the swath to rename Tap Rename If prompted enter the password The Enter new swath name screen displays Enter the new name for the swath and tap oK The Swath Management screen displays again To return to the Run screen tap Close Version 9 25 Revision A FM 10
297. ientation screen displays with a graphic that represents how the controller is oriented in the cab If the controller is in an orthogonal orientation a graphic of it displays If it is not in this orientation no graphic will be displayed The graphic of the controller is shown as though e You are looking down on the vehicle from above e The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle 2 Tap the buttons to select the orientation of the controller The graphic of the controller will change as you tap the buttons 3 Ifthe controller is set at a sloped angle tap the Direct Entry tab Then enter the yaw pitch and roll angles of the controller Note If you use direct entry to enter custom angles the on screen image of the controller does not display 4 Tap OK to accept the new orientation or tap Cancel to exit Proportional Steering Gain calibration WARNING The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle Be prepared for sudden wheel movements Note Complete this calibration only When the TrueTracker system s performance is less than acceptable After you complete Implement Steering Sensor calibration page 252 The proportional steering gain PGain setting enables you to reach a compromise betw
298. ify missing modules 3 Field IQ System Setup Rate not achievable For current target rate the maximum speed is X mph The target application rate Maximum flow rpm has been cannot be achieved within the set too low for desired speed configured maximum RPM at and rate the current speed The Field IQ system is limiting the RPM to the configured maximum 440 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays Target rate may not be achieved for current target rate the minimum speed is X mph The current coverage pattern will degrade system performance Hydraulic motor over speed or Hydraulic motor under speed Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor over speed or Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor under speed Hydraulic motor stalled Rate control has been disabled Toggle the master switch to re enable rate control Check the hydraulic motor It ran too fast Rawson Degraded GPS Automatic section control has been disabled Use switches to control sections Version 9 25 Revision A Field IQ diagnostics Explanation Possible Causes Actions At the current speed and target Minimum flow rpm has been set application rate the required to high for desired speed and RPM is below the configured rate minimum RPM limit A combing coverage pattern is Contact Trimble support being generated because of a mix of on a
299. ight by multiplying the measured volume by the test weight Therefore an accurate measurement of test weight is required in order to achieve an accurate total weight measurement To ensure the best results e Recheck the test weight whenever the field conditions change significantly either when harvesting different varieties or when the moisture level of the crop changes e Take several samples of test weight on calibration loads and use the average of these samples when calibrating Calibrating and operating conditions How you operate your combine can affect your accuracy Consider the following e Calibration will be most effective if you operate your combine at the same conditions as you used during calibration e Frequent starts and stops during a load could degrade the overall accuracy of the load Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 293 Yield Monitoring settings 17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring settings The following yield monitoring systems are supported Trimble Yield Monitoring Various supported OEM moisture sensors Claas 670 and 700 series North America only John Deere 60 and 70 series Serial data input Before setup Before setting up Yield Monitoring make sure 1 All components are installed on the vehicle Refer to the Installation Guide that is shipped with every Yield Monitoring kit Yield Monitoring has been added to the display s configuration See
300. ility for example a tendency to excessively overshoot e Low PGain value Increases the slew time and decrease the overshoot This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side Perform the calibration e Immediately before you run the PGain calibration even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past e Onahard level surface that is free of obstructions e While maintaining a vehicle speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is required e Overshoot exceeds 5 8 depending on the vehicle e Wheels noticeably shake near end stops Calibration steps 1 At the Vehicle Calibration screen select Steering Gain and tap OK The Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration screen displays 2 Tap Run Slew Test A warning message displays 3 Tap Next AN WARNING The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle Be prepared for sudden wheel movements 4 Tap Next in the next two screens that display 5 Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the v
301. ilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting e Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration How aggressively the vehicle approaches the guidance line Articulated and front wheel steered types For articulated and front wheel steered vehicle types additional calibrations are required e Steering angle sensor calibration page 153 Converts the sensor output into commands for steering full left full right and any position in between e AutoSense calibration page 153 Orients Autosense e Automated Deadzone calibration page 154 Required to learn the vehicle s steering deadzone e Proportional steering gain calibration page 156 Required only if system steering performance is not satisfactory 150 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system Tracked tractors For tracked tractors there are several calibrations required See Tracked tractor calibrations page 162 Begin calibration NO a ail Vehicle guration Calibrate Controller Setup 1 At the Home screen tap K 2 AttheConfigurations screen tap Setup next to the vehicle 3 Select al Autopilot Vehicle and tap Calibrate The Vehicle Calibration screen displays 4 Select a calibration and tap OK Controller orientation 1 At the Vehicle Calibration screen select Controller Orientation and tap OK The Autopilot Controller Orientation screen displays A graphic of the controller repr
302. im or dispute relating to or arising out of these Terms of Use resides in the state courts in Loudoun County Virginia and the federal courts of the Eastern District of Virginia Alexandria Division and further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in such state and federal courts of Virginia in connection with any such dispute 15 3 Severability Waiver If any provision in these Terms of Use should be held illegal or unenforceable by a court having jurisdiction such provision shall be modified to the extent necessary to render it enforceable without losing its intent or severed from these Terms of Use if no such modification is possible and other provisions of these Terms of Use shall remain in full force and effect A waiver by either MapQuest or You as applicable of any term or condition of these Terms of Use or any breach thereof in any one instance shall not waive such term or condition or any subsequent breach thereof 15 4 Public Statements You acknowledge and agree that MapQuest may make any public statements regarding the existence of these Terms of Use or the relationship described herein without Your consent 15 5 Survival Any term or condition of these Terms of Use that by its nature would logically survive termination or expiration of these Terms of Use including but not limited to protections of proprietary rights indemnifications and limitations of liability shall survive such termination
303. ine can move off target due to either e GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system e GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field Use the lt and gt buttons to move the guidance line in a perpendicular direction left or right Aggr Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line Zero Steering Off Zero Steering is not used On Commands the steering to zero degrees left right centering the steering device on the implement This option can be turned on in the field keeping the coulters pointed straight or just at the ends of the field to center the steering Note Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero Steering Engage Green For the main button color Vehicle steering is engaged For the smaller inner color on the button Implement steering is engaged For settings on Engage see Engage settings for TrueTracker system page 248 Engage Red For the main button color Vehicle steering cannot engage For the smaller inner color on the button Implement steering cannot Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 383 TrueTracker operation 18 Operations Control Explanation engage For settings on Engage see Engage settings for TrueTracker system page 248 Engage Yellow For the main button color Vehicle steering is ready to engage For the smaller inner color on the butto
304. ing and Engage button when applicable See e Coverage logging page 343 e Engage button page 317 Feature plugin buttons Button Opens the feature panel for TrueGuide implement control system See Using TrueGuide page 387 Autopilot automatic steering system See Autopilot system operation page 359 EZ Pilot automatic steering system See EZ Pilot system operation page 362 EZ Steer automatic steering system See EZ Steer system operation page 365 Field IQ application control system See Field IQ operation page 347 FieldLevel Il See Leveling page 396 FieldLevel Il tandem See Tandem scraper controls page 409 and Tandem dual scraper setup page 275 GreenSeeker See GreenSeeker functionality page 216 ik KALA Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 315 Operation basics 18 Operations Button Opens the feature panel for B Guidance mapping See Guidance pattern use page 323 and Field feature use page 322 Cat ISOBUS Task Controller See Task Controller operation page 373 a SOBUS EJ ISOBUS Virtual Terminal See Virtual Terminal operation page 374 Manual guidance See Manual guidance operation page 358 af Remote Output See Remote Output setup page 118 Row Guidance See Row Guidance operation page 379 Serial Rate Control See Variable rate controller setup page 229 Survey See Cre
305. ing places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant
306. ings Field feature mapping settings A field feature is an item you designate on the display while your in your field to indicate lines such as fences areas such as areas to exclude and points such as rocks f Home KK Configuration jan ey Setup ma Pi P The field feature mapping settings determine e What buttons are available on the Mapping Guidance panel of the Run screen for creating features in the field e The reference point for creating field features center left or right of the boom e Ifa path should be recorded when you begin logging coverage e Thetypes of warnings that can trigger when entering a feature or area e When to restrict remote output e Howa boundary is recorded For detailed information see Field feature mapping settings page 130 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 51 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Guidance settings Note If you are setting up the system for the first time you should not need to adjust these settings HH HI Main Curves Headlands Setting Explanation Limit Field Selection Limits the number of fields that display when you are selecting a field e Yes Enables Limit Field Selection The displayed fields are within the set radius of the vehicle s current location based on the vehicle s GPS position e No Disables Limit Field Selection e Selection Radius Fields that fall within this radius will display
307. interior of the field boundary while the system records interior points 1 At the Survey Design panel select Interior from the list 2 Tap Record and drive around the interior of the field gaining enough coverage to produce a height map You can change the data logging intensity in the FieldLevel II Survey Design settings Coarse 25 ft Medium 10 ft Fine 5 ft Define a section optional After you create a boundary you have the option to create sections that split the entire area into portions This enables you to create a design for each section instead of the entire area Sections can be useful after you finish working on the area for the day Define the area that you completed as a section When you return to the area you can level the remaining area to a second best fit plane See Design page 394 There are two methods for defining a section e Method 1 e Begin recording the section line outside the boundary e Drive through the field to define the section line then cross outside the boundary again e The section is defined e Method 2 e Record a section line inside the boundary e The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary Design After you have completed the survey the system can create the design based on the information gathered by the survey and the settings you enter as part of the design process FieldLevel II defines the three dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement
308. ion To set up the EZ Steer system 1 Complete the GPS receiver settings page 98 2 At the Configuration screen select V and tap Setup The EZ Steer Settings screen displays 3 Complete the settings as appropriate Setting Explanation Vehicle Type Type of vehicle Axle to Antenna The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna Measure Offset the distance accurately within 3 inches An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance Note Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible within 3 An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance e Ifthe antenna is in front of the axle enter a forward distance e Ifthe antenna is behind the axle enter a back distance Antenna Height Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna Wheelbase The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel 172 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Steer assisted steering system Note The Engage Steering and Advanced tabs on this screen are completed automatically with starting values based on the vehicle type selected 4 Tap OK The Configuration screen displays Engage settings for EZ Steer To edit the EZ Steer system engage settings 1 At the EZ Steer Settings screen select the Engage Options tab and complete the settings Setting Expla
309. ion The gate height calibration process requires calibration at two different gate heights This message indicates that the FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Check e Shaft Encoder Constant e Width in the Hardware tab in Field IQ Setup If this message persists after the gate is moved check the installation and wiring of the gate height sensor 445 Field IQ diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation report from the gate height sensor did not change when the second reading was taken The gate must be raised or lowered between readings Gate not open Please open the gate The Field IQ system is attempting to dispense material but the gate height sensor indicates that the gate is closed Or if the gate height sensor is disabled you did not enter a non zero gate height The spinner pulses per revolution setting is invalid Please check the spinner sensor setup The tank bin is empty Please refill tank bin The tank bin level sensor has reported that the tank bin is empty Valve Calibration Not Started This shows only during auto valve calibration which is not available in firmware version 4 0 For safety reasons when running an auto valve calibration for anhydrous the vehicle must be moving at a speed of at least 2 mph If the vehicle speed is above 2 mph check that the FM 1000 integrated display is receiving valid GPS positions Valve Calibration Failed The vehicle is moving too
310. ion select the rate column CAUTION When you select a shapefile prescription the applied rate will be incorrect if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller Load prescription file A prescription works only when the Field IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position Rate Switch Position Increment Decrement Switch Status Rate 1 Disabled Rate 2 Enabled To load a prescription file Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 355 Field IQ operation 18 Operations 1 Mapanew field or select an existing field The FM 1000 integrated display lists the prescription files within the specified limits If there are many prescriptions on the hard drive this can take several seconds and a progress bar displays If any prescription files are within the specified limits the Select Prescription screen displays 2 From the Available Prescriptions list select a prescription file Note If an Aginfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format it will not display in the Available Prescriptions list e If you select a shapefile prescription select the correct prescription rate column Note When you select a shapefile prescription if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller the applied rate will be incorrect e If you select an Aginfo GDX prescription the Rate Column box does not appear 3 From the Prescription Scale Factor select the scale factor for
311. irt movement e Leveling After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it you can use FieldLevel II to control a land leveling implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an optimal slope e WM Drain Surface and subsurface drainage installation Water Management system enables you to e Conserve precious water resources and help control the water table e Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil e Perform touch up leveling each year e Use technology with a larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit e Work with your existing agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective system For example you can connect the Autopilot system to the FM 1000 integrated display at the same time as the implement Requirements The Water Management system requires e An FM 1000 integrated display with or without the Autopilot system e Aplatform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type P N 55045 xx e Anunlock code for the water management functionality e Aleveling or drainage implement 264 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey Design FieldLevel II Survey Design Benchmarks Before you can create a survey you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark When you create a benchmark the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your fi
312. is correct e Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a high clearance sprayer After initial calibration is completed you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out 174 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Steer assisted steering system e Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle e Havea straight AB line available If you do not create an A B line before you begin the calibration the system will prompt you to open a field and create one To calibrate the EZ Steer system 1 Complete the T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ Steer system page 176 2 Calibrate the EZ Steer system e Angle per Turn calibration for EZ Steer system page 175 e Aggressiveness calibration for EZ Steer system page 175 e Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ Steer system page 176 3 Confirm the calibration settings Note You may have to perform the EZ Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results Aggressiveness calibration for EZ Steer system The aggressiveness setting fine tunes how aggressively the system holds the line If the setting is too low the vehicle will not hold the line If the setting is too high the vehicle may over correct and make S turns To configure the aggressiveness settings at the EZ Steer Steering Perform
313. k 2 0 2 aaa 50 Field feature mapping settings 1 2 0 0 0 0 00 aaa 51 10 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Contents Guidance settings eee cece cence ence cece ceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 52 Language measurements keyboard layout ccccccccccccceceeeeeees 53 Map settings 0 002222 aoaaa cece cece cece eee e ccc eee cece cece DaDa aLa Daaa nanon 54 Lightbar settings 2 2 2 2 occ eee cece e cece ec ccceccccecceceeecececeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 Power management 2 20 22 2 cece ee eee cc cece cece ccc cceeececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 60 Restore default settings 2 2 0 0 0 0 00 aaa 61 Signal input module for OEM switch 200 0 2c cece eee cece cece eee eeeceeeeeeeeeees 62 Sounds 63 NG NA 64 MIM ES CUUID scout oe TE Tan NLA NE ts Cu acinar MAJA e a a an e 76 4 Data management 000 02200 o cence ccc cee cece aaao naaar naaa 77 Managing data _ 2 2 2 aaa 78 Transfer data lcci ce local teins se GN a NAA 78 Data Files screen 2 02 20 e cece cece cece e cece eeeeeeececeeeteeseeeeees 78 Display to USB 1 2 cece aaa 79 Transiter trom USB 28229 nD i cess Jatin RL akan cha AI a LAN L hahaba nh dELJE LANA 80 USB to computer eee cece eee cece c eee e cece cece arasa OSE saa 80 pelatadakak a Na ar ag kama AD Ran BANG Ll SANANG NGO a DA anna ee 81 Data storage structure a 83 AB Lines folder chan aa aan s
314. kit to suit your vehicle and valve type P N 55045 xx Unlock code for the field leveling functionality Leveling or drainage implement Setup process Note Before you can configure the system it must be professionally installed For more information contact your local reseller FieldLevel Il setup and calibration include 1 2 268 Implement settings for FieldLevel II page 269 GPS receiver setup page 269 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling 3 4 FieldLevel Il settings page 270 Valve module calibration page 273 Leveling models The FieldLevel II system has five leveling models Point and Slope The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope regardless of the vehicle s direction This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage Multiplane Design The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from Multiplane design software This software can run a wide range of what if scenarios enabling you to create complex designs with multiple field sections You can export these design control files and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in the office Plane flat Use this leveling model to level a field that has previously been measured with a laser The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match your
315. l not cut off part of the pattern Tap Close HL The new headland displays showing all the swaths that the system has automatically generated If you need to shift or skip a swath see e Shift a swath page 340 e Skip a swath page 342 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 331 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations Pivot pattern be 1 At the Run screen tap EF open the Mapping Guidance panel Tap NG Swaths At the Swath Management screen select the Pivot pattern from the pattern list Tap New Pivot Uu Pw N The Run screen displays ete E Mapping Guidance Panel ae New Pivot 6 Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot and then tap Set A 7 Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then tap Set B The Enter Distance to Pivot Field Edge screen displays 8 Enter the distance or the number of rows from the current path to the outside of the pivot and then tap OK The pivot displays showing the swaths it generated 9 Ifyou need to shift or skip a swath see e Shift a swath page 340 e Skip a swath page 342 Outer edge radius adjustment The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate the coverage area After you create a pivot you can adjust this outer edge radius 332 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use 1 Atthe Run screen tap Swaths The Swath Management screen displays 2 S
316. l require a left or right turn 3 Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available 4 Tap the button to begin the next phase The Automated Deadzone calibration runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs In th is test the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs 154 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system e You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure e To ensure optimal system performance the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure On some vehicles with large reservoirs it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature Calibration steps Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards To minimize the effect of the ground conditions the field should have smooth soil that is loose but firm At the Vehicle Cont
317. lar Positioning correction service for cellular communications Delivers corrections via cellular network directly to your receiver Requires a cellular data plan CenterPoint VRS Virtual reference station Positioning correction service for cellular communication systems Enables RTK Real Time Kinetic corrections over a large geographic area where robust cellular data coverage is available Provides high accuracy for guidance applications throughout the whole coverage area Requires a cellular data plan Uses a cellular communication modem such as the DCM 300 or Ag3000 Relies on CORS Clean grain elevator After grain has been separated from the rest of the plant the clean grain auger moves the grain from the separator to the grain bin Client The customer for whom the work is being done Composite slope 474 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 20 Glossary D The true angle of the fall of the design In other words the angle of the slope when two slope angles are combined Controller orientation Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle Correction age Time since the last GPS correction was received Correction service A service which provides corrections to create a higher GPS accuracy CORS network Continuously Operating Reference Station A network of GPS GNSS reference stations situated within the coverage area to transmit RTK
318. lay An ISO certified implement has small computers called electronic control units ECUs which send signals to the FM 1000 integrated display An ISO certified tractor has a tractor ECU TECU installed on it ECUs on implements enable you to control the operation e With the FM 1000 integrated display using Task Controller an optional feature See Task Controller operation page 373 e With Virtual Terminal an on screen window opens so you can directly access the functions provided by the ECUs See Virtual Terminal operation page 374 Task Controller operation a After you have activated Task Controller ows displays on the Run screen 1 If you are using one of the following models you must tap the Start or Auto button in the Virtual Terminal screen before starting section and rate control using Task Controller a Tap so open the Virtual Terminal b Tap the appropriate button Start or Auto Mode Tap Kuhn Moduliner Seed Drill Auto Kverneland Exacta TL GEOspread Start Rauth ikun AXIS H EMC Start Rauch Kuhn AXIS W Start Vicon RO EDW GEOspread Start nt 2 Atthe Run screen tap we on the right hand side to display the Task Controller panel 3 Tap a to begin logging coverage f bo U 4 Tap ws on the left hand side to view the current section control ea 7h 5 To switch between the two target rates tap the appropriate target rate button NG TO onthe Task Controller panel 6 To t
319. lay User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Display basics In this chapter The FM 1000 integrated display has five main screens you use for setup and operations Display power on off 26 You can also access on screen help Main screens nanaonan 27 Optional features plugins are available to Passwords 36 add to the display Optional features plugins 37 Screen shots u cece eee eeeee 39 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 25 Display power on off 2 Display basics Display power on off Note The display must be correctly installed before powering on For more information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide Power on Briefly hold down the power button for approximately half a second The display turns on and after a pause the Home screen displays Power off 1 Close all fields before you power off the system See Close a field page 321 Note If you fail to close before rebooting or shutdown you may experience a loss of data 2 Either return to the Home screen and tap Shutdown or turn off the display manually by holding the power button down for about two seconds Note Sometimes after you press the power button and tap Shutdown the display does not immediately turnoff This is because the FM 1000 integrated display is saving settings The display will power off after all settings are saved 26 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide
320. lay and the rate and section control module Report this fault to Trimble Support Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays No pressure change has been detected Please change the system pressure Invalid setup for flow calibration Invalid setup for granular calibration The second gate height entry must differ from the first Please enter a different height No gate height change has been detected Please change the gate height Version 9 25 Revision A Explanation twice Note Zero is a valid pressure for calibration The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures This message indicates that the report from the pressure sensor did not change when the second reading was taken Field IQ diagnostics Possible Causes Actions The pressure in the system must be changed between readings for example by either e Opening or closing a valve e Starting or stopping the pump If this message persists after the pressure is changed check the installation and wiring of the pressure sensor Check e Total Nozzles in the Boom tab in the Field IQ system setup e Width in the Hardware tab in Field IQ Setup e Flow meter number The gate height calibration process requires calibration at two different gate heights This message indicates that you entered the same gate height twice Note Zero is a valid gate height for calibrat
321. le cannot communicate with the motor 5 Tap Stop to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen PWM valves calibration Drive calibration From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate Enter the appropriate settings on each tab Tab Explanation Drive Limits Enter the minimum and maximum flow values Auto Tuning Moving parts during this operation Ensure that the implement is safe to operate Follow the on screen instructions to auto tune the system Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 209 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field IQ system setup Flow calibration WARNING During flow calibration the machine will become operational Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death The Field IQ system Calibration option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field IQ system Rate and Section control module installed 1 Atthe Configuration screen select w Field IQ and then tap Calibrate 2 Atthe Field IQ Calibration screen select the R
322. le documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold repeat both the Deadzone and the Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature Calibration steps 1 Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards 2 Raise the implement 3 Atthe Implement Controller Setup screen select Implement Automatic Deadzone and tap OK The Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays Note Read the onscreen instructions on each page 4 Tap Next to continue The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays 5 Tap Next in the two screens that display next Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 253 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup 6 Follow the instructions The system will automatically move the coulter wheels steering wheels or other mechanism in both directions several times 7 Tap Start The system engages and performs the calibration Automated Deadzone error messages If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully an error message will display Message Error Steering Close To End Stops Explanation Before the calibration cycle could be completed the measured steering angle approached the end stops Retry and if the problem persists instead of centering the steering at the
323. lected Setting Explanation Header Height Sensor Enabled The sensor is enabled Disabled The sensor is disabled Head Logging Height The height at which yield data logging starts and stops The Head Logging Note Not available for Height is read from the Header Height Sensor the Claas 600 700 This is If required tap Current Height to enter values related to your own setup set by the CEBIS Grain Flow Delay Time in seconds it takes for the grain to reach the yield sensor after it Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 295 Crop settings 17 Yield Monitoring setup Setting Explanation enters the head Reset Autocut Controls when the rows are automatically reset e When head is lifted Automatically resets the rows at the end of the row when the head is raised above the logging height e Never Disables autocut Rows must be controlled manually Crop Overlap When more than one crop variety is detected in the head the system will stop accumulating variety statistics Use this setting to adjust the percentage of crop overlap that is allowed before the system stops accumulating variety statistics Select a value between 1 and 25 For best results the recommended setting is 10 Crop settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Crop tab enter the settings for your crop Setting Explanation Commodity Select the crop that is currently being harvested Units Selec
324. lement and the next point for the system to output a pulse Manual Trigger w Tap this button to manually output a pulse Change trigger limits during operation To change the maximum number of pulses per swath during operation tap the button to the left of the label Trigger Limits and enter the new number Manually output a pulse To manually output a pulse tap Oy To set the color of the dot that indicates a manual pulse see Remote Output settings page 118 378 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Row Guidance operation Row Guidance operation A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared With Row Guidance the information from existing sensors installed on the combine heads are used to automatically adjust the combine response to changes in the row position Row Guidance is used with the Autopilot system to help center the combine on the crop rows when they are are not aligned with the guidance line used to plant the crop caused by planter drift or environmental damage Row Guidance enables you to e Increase corn yield through reduced ea
325. less terminated as stated above 10 0 General 10 1 If any provision of this License is held to be invalid or unenforceable that must not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms and conditions of this License and each remaining provision of this License shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law 10 2 This License is the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the rights granted here over the Database It replaces any earlier understandings agreements or representations with respect to the Database 10 3 If You are in breach of the terms of this License You will not be entitled to rely on the terms of this License or to complain of any breach by the Licensor FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 7 10 4 Choice of law This License takes effect in and will be governed by the laws of the relevant jurisdiction in which the License terms are sought to be enforced If the standard suite of rights granted under applicable copyright law and Database Rights in the relevant jurisdiction includes additional rights not granted under this License these additional rights are granted in this License in order to meet the terms of this License Warranty Remedies Trimble s sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be at Trimble s option to repair or replace any Product that fails to conform to such warranty Nonconforming Product and or issu
326. librate the valve Perform an automated valve calibration to provide the best valve drive performance See Valve module calibration page 273 Step 5 Tune system performance The system gains may need to be fine tuned to reach the desired level of system performance 1 Set the tractor hydraulics to 70 of the maximum flow This will allow you to fine tune the hydraulics without adjusting any other calibration settings 2 Walk beside the system while operating a dry run This allows you to see the visual cues necessary for efficient gain adjustment Pay close attention to the cylinder movement and note any directional trend Excess movement in both directions can indicate the following e Hydraulic flow is too high It is recommended that you drop the flow by 5 and then recheck e Drop both valve gains by 5 and then check for improved performance Excess movement in one direction can indicate e Valve gain in that direction raise or lower is too high Drop the corresponding valve gain by 5 and then check for improved performance e Valve gain in the opposite direction raise or lower is too low Raise the corresponding valve gain by 596 and then check for improved performance Step 6 Set the height gain Fine tuning the height gain and the overall valve gains are a crucial step in perfecting the precision control of a cantilever plow with the WM Drain system In the Implement tab adjust the Height Gain values Version 9
327. line from point B to point A marking another set of trigger points Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Adjust your Front Back Offset value by this amount Ifthe return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points increase the F B offset Ifthe return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points lower the F B offset Set lead time 1 122 Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers Ensure that your speed remains constant At the end of the line turn the vehicle around Drive back down the line from point B to point A marking the trigger points Measure any offset distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run Divide the distance by two Convert your speed from mph to inches second Inches second mph x 17 6 To calculate the lead time setting in seconds divide the distance between the points in inches from Step 5 by the vehicle speed in inches second Lead Time Half the distance between points inches divided by speed inches per second Enter the lead time at the Remote Output screen For example if a 4 mph pass creates a 14 distance between each set of points FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Re
328. listed on the tag If settings check ok Check that control valve has been calibrated If PWM check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters May need to be set to 100 Rate fluctuates around target 1 Check that a drive calibration has been performed 2 Check that tips orifices are sized appropriately for the system For PWM Servo systems 458 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics 1 You may need to manually tune the valve 2 Set valve to manual rate With the rate in manual the valve should be locked If the rate still fluctuates check the pump and the flowmeter For Rawson 1 Check that the drive is running above 100 RPM 2 Isolate the drive from the pump Make sure the drive operates properly with no load Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting Unable to turn motor 1 Check valve type in Rate control set up 2 Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow 3 Check that motor will pass a drive calibration PWM only 4 Perform a hydraulics test Rawson If the motor will run in the calibration screen check the operation of the system in the Field IQ diagnostics screen 1 Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on 2 Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen 3 If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position If motor ran in diagnostics screen 1 Check c
329. lor in the Cut Fill scale If a value of 0 5 is used for the on grade tolerance any value between 0 5 of cut and 0 5 of fill will show as green on the Cut Fill map FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 271 FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup Blade Settings tab Setting Explanation Blade Step The increment that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down by the plus or minus offset buttons Course Blade Step Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large increments with a single tap such as a 0 2 fill The increment you want the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down in Coarse mode Antenna Height Height of the antenna above the lower edge of the blade On grade Limit Distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to thin red arrows At twice this distance the height indicators become thick red arrows See Blade Settings tab page 272 Disengage Raise When you disable Auto while scraping a field you can set a time value that will automatically raise the blade For example if you set 0 5s the blade will raise for half a second when you turn off Auto mode Remote Input Auto You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto mode This remote is controlled with the Remote Input Auto setting Relative Heights tab For survey data collection or field leveling set relative the relative offset height so that the
330. lve when in manual rate During this procedure a no flow detected warning may appear This is normal as there is no flow going through the system 4 For FM 1000 integrated display 6 5 and up System will run in diagnostics Only attempt after trying the previous steps If system will run in diagnostics 1 Check color of sections in the run screen If sections are red there is an issue a Check that system is not outside a boundary open a new field to test b Check that system is not over a previously applied area c Check that system has a fixed GPS position 2 Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen Unable to reach target 1 Check that system control components are sized properly 2 See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate if not may be a tank or cooler limitation If system is sized properly for rate 1 Check minimum and maximum flow settings 2 Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag If settings check ok 452 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Check that control valve has been calibrated If PWM check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters May need to be set to 100 Rate fluctuates around target 1 Check that a drive calibration has been performed 2 Turn valve on and set rate switch to Manual to lock the valve 3 Ifthe rate s
331. m Calibrate the Header Height Calibrate the Temperature Calibrate the RollOffset Calibrate the Yield Sensor Tare If the Average Tare Deviation is equivalent to or greater than the thickness of the elevator paddle the system may encounter a large amount of noise Noise can be introduced into the system by any of the following factors e Paddles contacting the Yield Sensor optical lens e Yield Sensor optical lens obstructed e Yield Sensor s loose e Elevator chain with excessive slack or paddles flopping up down FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Yield sensor moisture sensor calibration e Tensioning rod contacting yield sensors e Excessive paddle wear causing large quantities of grain to fall back down the elevator between the elevator wall and the outside of the paddles 9 To check the noise percentage of the system turn the combine separator on at full engine RPM and then select Yield Monitoring Diagnostics Status to see the noise percentage If this is very high check the aspects listed Note If the frequency deviation is high you may have an inconsistent Elevator RPM and may need to inspect the performance of your clean grain elevator pulleys bearings chain and so on 10 Select either method for calibration e Speed method Uses a consistent speed variable to calibrate for Low Medium and High flows e Cut Width method Uses a consistent cut w
332. m curves 340 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use bes 1 Atthe Run screen tap Ato open the Mapping Guidance panel 2 Tap X Swaths The Swath Management screen displays Select the swath to shift from the list on the left 4 Tap Shift The Enter the Shift Distance screen displays af Mapping Guidance Panel List of Existing Swath Management Enter the Shift Guidance Lines itane 5 Enter the values Setting Tap to Left Shift the line to the left of your view Right Shift the line to the right of your view Value entry Enter the distance you want to shift the line boxes Metric Change to metric values Feet amp Inches Change to feet and inches Decimal Feet Change to decimal feet Rows Calculator Open the calculator Note If you shift a line it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have applied Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 341 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations 6 Tap OK The Swath Management screen displays The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen Skip a swath Note The Skip position of a swath line is temporary and is not saved permanently To save such an adjustment shift the swath instead See Shift a swath page 340 FM 1000 integrated display uses the original swa
333. m records FreeForm curves when the remote logging switch is enabled U Turn Detection e Auto Do not record the U turn at the end of a path e None Do record the U turn at the end of a path Delete All Removes all segments of the FreeForm pattern you have recorded 4 Tap New FreeForm 5 To begin recording you can either e Tap o e Tap a if you have set up to record logging coverage while you are engaged See Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 Engage settings for EZ Pilot system page 168 or Engage settings for EZ Steer page 173 and Coverage logging page 343 6 To stop recording you can 334 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use e Tap O if you are recording manually e Tap pi to stop logging coverage if you have set up to record logging while you are engaged See Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 Engage settings for EZ Pilot system page 168 or Engage settings for EZ Steer page 173 and Coverage logging page 343 7 To create a straight line within a FreeForm path a Make sure you are actively recording and the vehicle is moving forward b Tap J The system projects a straight dashed line from the front of the on screen vehicle based on the current heading r o e You can immediately engage on this line and the path driven is recorded c To stop recording the path disengage automatic steeri
334. ment of heat units since planting above a prescribed base temperature GLONASS A Russian space based satellite navigation system GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System A system of GPS US and Russian satellites that provide information about geo spatial positioning A GNSS receiver can determine its longitude latitude and altitude In the future GNSS will also use Chinese GPS satellites GPS Global Positioning System A space based satellite navigation system A GPS receiver can determine its position by using GPS satellites GPS autonomous positioning A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data alone without reference to data supplied by a base station Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform yielding position fixes that are precise to 100 meters H HDOP The horizontal component of PDOP Header height A sensor that indicates the position of the head IMD Inertial Measurement Device IMEI International Mobile Station Equipment Identity Anumber to identify mobile equipment The GSM network uses this number to identify valid devices The IMEI number has no relationship to the subscriber Implement steering A system that actively steers the implement being towed by a vehicle IMU Inertial Measurement Unit An electronic device that measures and reports on a vehicle s velocity orientation and gravitational
335. meout Time that Jumpstart speed will be active A timeout setting for 186 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation the Jump Start Speed which allows you to run the jump start for a specified amount of time Auto control resumes if Jump Start Speed is exceeded by Ground Speed Shutoff Speed This setting will shut the control system down when the vehicle reaches a minimum speed Minimum Override Speed Setting used to hold the operating speed at a preset minimum to prevent the control system from operating out ofa controllable range Maintains the application rate when the implement s actual speed drops below the value entered It is used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds Apply Latency to Boundary This setting is also applied when you exit an exclusion zone and Note Only applies to fields that return to the workable area of the field nave MODUROAD e Yes The system starts when needed to begin applying immediately when crossing a boundary e No The system starts when the boundary is reached and any mechanical delay could leave a gap between the boundary and where the product is applied When GPS accuracy is low this is the preferred selection Rate Snapping Due to pump constraints liquid flow generally is inconsistent with the information on the display Enabling this setting gives you a more
336. mmaries Bb U N p Open the file Index htmi Note If you use the Microsoft Internet Explorer Internet browser you may need to allow ActivexO technology to see all of the summary file Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 93 Data Dictionary categories 4 Data management Task Data folder The TaskData folder contains yield data collected in the IS011783 BIN format which is read by Farm Works and other precision agriculture software Data Dictionary categories The data dictionary editor enables you to edit default data entry categories and add new ones Default data entry categories The following are default categories in the Data Dictionary e Application method e Harvest e Soil type e Client e Harvest year e Stoppage reason e Crop e Implement e Target pests e Custom 1 2 3and 4 e Material e Vehicle e Event e Operator e Wind direction e Farm e Operator EPA e Wind gust speed e Farm location e Sky conditions e Wind speed e Field e Soil conditions Edit data entry categories O 2 al Home A Configuration gt Setup ee Data Dictionary Setup 1 At the Display Setup screen tap Data Dictionary 2 Tap Setup The Data Dictionary Setup screen displays 3 From the data list select the data item you want to add or change 94 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data Dictionary categories e Tap New to create a new item e Tap
337. more than the number of filed calibration areas sampled This allows for starting at zero and ending at 99 NDVI Tap an NDVI entry box to enter a custom value Tap OK Tap a corresponding Rate entry box to enter a custom value Tap OK Select the Output tab jo O ND UN Ff From the Material Type list select either Granular Or Liquid 10 Tap OK Calibrate GreenSeeker In the GreenSeeker panel on the Run screen the controls displayed depend on what you previously selected for example a crop algorithm or a custom table When you first open a new job or event and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected the Calibration Required message displays If you want to use a custom table but see the Calibration Required message tap Edit See Create a custom table page 369 Note If a custom table has been previously selected the Calibration Required message will not display Calibration steps 1 Atthe Run screen tap a The GreenSeeker panel opens 2 Tap Calibrate 3 The GreenSeeker panel displays e The buttons Ref Non Ref and Done e NDVI bar graph showing the real time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module 4 Position the vehicle at the reference locations 5 To record NDVI data from 370 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations GreenSeeker operation e The reference strip Tap Ref drive the reference strip and then tap Ref again to end recording e T
338. mplement TrueTracker NavController configuration Choose existing vehicle To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file on the display Setting Explanation Vehicle Profile Location Select From Saved file existing Model 1 Tap Browse and select the required vdb file 2 Tap Open 3 Tap Change Restore Implement The following message displays The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset Do you want to continue 4 Tap OK to load the new configuration A message displays information you the Autopilot controller will now be reinitialized 5 Tap OK Read the warnings and tap OK The file is now loaded Change or restore implement The Change or Restore Implement button is only active when you have selected either anew vdb ora saved configuration Until then it is not available for use The button is used to acknowledge and apply load the desired vdb or config Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 247 Setup process 14 TrueTracker setup Engage settings for TrueTracker system At the mplement Controller Setup screen s Engage tab complete the settings as appropriate Setting Explanation Operator Timeout Amount of time allowed before the operator receives an alert for lack of activity If the operator fails to respond to the alert the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop Co
339. n Implement steering is ready to engage For settings on Engage see Engage settings for TrueTracker system page 248 Implement status GPS status Tap the second 5a to view status on the implement receiver e Implement GPS Status e Implement Correction Type e Implement Correction Age e Latitude e Longitude e Altitude e Satellites e HDOP e VDOP e Network ID Text Anumber of status text items provide information about the implement You can set these status text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or on a slide out tab To set up status items see Status items page 64 Implement on screen lightbar When implement steering is enabled a second smaller lightbar displays on the screen below the main lightbar 0000000000009008890990000000000 384 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations TrueTracker operation The lower lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the guidance line Each LED on the second lightbar represents 1 inch Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 385 TrueGuide operation 18 Operations TrueGuide operation A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the
340. n the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs e Slew times no longer decrease a low value is required e Overshoot exceeds 10 depending on the Tracker unit e Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops Calibration steps 1 Atthe Implement Controller Setup screen select Steering Gain and tap OK The Autopilot Steering Gain Calibration screen displays 2 Tap Next to continue The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays 3 Tap Next for the next two screens that display 4 Follow the instructions The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both directions several times Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 251 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup 10 11 12 13 14 jo o ND VI A WARNING The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements Tap Start The system engages and performs the calibration Tap Run Slew Test A warning message displays Tap Next Tap Next in the two screens that display next Test various gain settings while you monit
341. nation Minimum speed Minimum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit the system engages Maximum speed Maximum speed at which the system can engage If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit the system disengages Maximum angle Maximum angle at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Engage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit it cannot be engaged Disengage offline Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit the system disengages Engage on A B Set up whether the system can or cannot be engaged on the master A B line Override sensitivity Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages EZ Steer external switch Set up the behavior of a seat or foot switch 2 Tap OK The Configuration screen displays Advanced settings for EZ Pilot At the EZ Pilot Settings screen on the Advanced tab complete the settings as appropriate Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 173 EZ Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Setting Explanation Roll Offset Angle Fine tunes the roll calibra
342. nation Sensor Type e Air pressure vacuum Liquid pressure NH3 pressure Bin level RPM Gate Height Name Enter a name for the sensor Sensor Setup Field IQ module The Field IQ system module that is controlling this sensor 198 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation Input location Which wire is controlling the sensor Not required for gate height Alarm Alarm settings Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 199 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field IQ Calibrate the equipment for your setup e Anhydrous calibration page 201 e Air Seeder calibration page 200 e Planter calibration page 203 e Sprayer calibration page 207 e Spreader calibration page 207 Air Seeder calibration A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate To calibrate an air seeder calibrate the implement lift switch then the modules For a spreader or seeder Minimum and maximum motor RPM are used to keep the motor within the manufactures recommended operating range Rawson specs are 150 and 500 RPM Implement lift switch calibration 1 Atthe Field IQ Calibration screen select implement Lift 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Cal
343. nce based pulses with straight AB or A lines Within range limits When you use remote output with distance based pulses and you are within the limits of the range set in the Trigger Limits setting your screen will show e The first dot for the first pulse output at the A point for the current swath e Dots showing additional previous pulses e Ared X indicating where the system will output the next pulse The Remote Output panel shows Remote Output Panel Explanation Next Output ID A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID Current Pass Output The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath Total Outputs The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 375 Remote Output operation 18 Operations Remote Output Panel Explanation Next Output Distance The distance between the implement and the next point for the system to output a pulse Trigger Limits The maximum number of pulses allowed per swath past the A point This is set in Remote Output settings page 118 You can also change this during operation See Change trigger limits during operation page 378 Manual Trigger w Tap this button to manually output a pulse Outside range limits When the vehicle and implement are outside the range limits e There is no red X on the screen e On the Remote Output panel the Next Output ID sh
344. nd off boom sections This causes generation of many coverage polygons possibly leading to degraded system performance The hydraulic motor is not running at the commanded speed The hydraulic motor was stopped due to it not running at commanded speed No RPM is being reported from encoder The hydraulic motor is not Check hydraulic pressure running at the commanded speed The GPS positions are uncorrected Due to potential inaccuracy of the positions the Field IQ system will not switch the boom sections automatically You must control the sections manually through FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 441 Field IQ diagnostics Message That Displays No GPS Automatic rate and section control has been disabled Please maintain speed at X mph Tank bin level is getting low Using jump start speed Please maintain speed at XX mph A power brown out has occurred check cabling and fuses check power supply Section controller reported over current Section and rate control have been disabled Toggle the master switch to re enable control Rate and Section Control Module Not Configured Please set the number of nozzles in the Field IQ Setup Controller Requires Valve Calibration Sprayer configuration error Check the settings on the Valve Calibration screen Flow meter configuration error Explanation the switches The Field IQ system is no longer adjusting the application
345. nd pan controls for the Operational view page 314 With the pan function you can view the field outside of the normal viewing area To pan around the field tap one of the four arrows positioned at the edge field area To zoom in and out tap either plus or minus S 312 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Operation basics Button Indicator Explanation Note To toggle the zoom feature on or off tap the field area of the Run screen NG The fifth level of zoom in the pan view OS is asummary view of all your coverage It adjusts depending on the size of the field It does not include grid lines Tip If you close the field create a second field and then show the summary view the summary view may be zoomed to show the area of both fields To avoid this reboot the display The view will be correct Tap to see a listing of all optional features plugins and their description xFill icon xFill is activated displays in the top left e Blue Engaged and has been used between 0 15 minutes e Red Engaged and 5 minutes remain Right side buttons on Run screen The following buttons are the standard buttons on the right that are always available Item Explanation q If you are at the Run screen and have a field open tap to close the field and return to the Field Selection screen See Close a field page Home 321 xr Tap to go to the Configuration screen S
346. ne leave this field empty e To drop introductory characters enter them For example if you receive data that begins with SGPGGA enter 24GP in this field The data will then begin with GGA 24 is the ASCII code for S Suffix The end point of the data you want to collect To log to the end of the line keep the default field OD 0A Log Interval How regularly the data is written to the file Ag3000 modem The Ag3000 modem enables the FM 1000 integrated display to receive RTK corrections from a e Trimble VRS network e Third party RTK provider e Continuously Operating Reference Station CORS 124 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings DCM 300 Modem Modem activation In the USA the Ag 3000 is bundled with a Trimble installed AT amp T card which is tied to your Ag3000 unit and cannot be separated You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device Additionally the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network Outside of the USA you must contact your local VRS Now or third party cell provider for a SIM card Modem setup Activate VRS for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 1 Atthe Configuration screen select VRS and then tap Setup 2 The VRS Configuration screen displays 3 Select the VRS Server Setup tab Enter the required settings as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator Setting Explanation
347. nformation for later use This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the display from one vehicle to another Configuration gt wl gt Setu p AN f Home go K Fi Vehicle Controller Setup N Vehicle Engage Steering Advanced fi Edit 4 Edit Vehicle Ss Nay A To save a vehicle profile 1 Atthe Home screen tap K Select al Autopilot and then tap Setup The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays On the Vehicle tab tap Edit The Edit Vehicle screen displays Tap Save Vehicle At the Save Vehicle Configuration screen tap in the Filename entry box At the Enter Save Filename screen enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap OK sou P W N At the Edit Vehicle screen tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 165 EZ Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Pilot assisted steering system The EZ Pilot assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance For cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see EZ Pilot system operation page 362 TG E2 Pilot Settings To set up the EZ Pilot system 1 Complete the GPS receiver settings page 98 2 Complete the EZ Pilot settings 3 Calibrate the EZ Pilot system Vehicle settings for EZ Pilot system 1 Atthe Configuration screen select G EZ Pilot and tap Setup Th
348. ng a Produced Work does not require the notice in Section 4 2 However if you Publicly Use a Produced Work You must include a notice associated with the Produced Work reasonably calculated to make any Person that uses views accesses interacts with or is otherwise exposed to the Produced Work aware that Content was obtained from the Database Derivative Database or the Database as part of a Collective Database and that it is available under this License a Example notice The following text will satisfy notice under Section 4 3 Contains information from DATABASE NAME which is made available here under the Open Database License ODbL DATABASE NAME should be replaced with the name of the Database anda hyperlink to the URI of the Database Open Database License should contain a hyperlink to the URI of the text of this License If hyperlinks are not possible You should include the plain text of the required URI s with the above notice 4 4 Share alike a Any Derivative Database that You Publicly Use must be only under the terms of i This License ii A later version of this License similar in spirit to this License or iii A compatible license If You license the Derivative Database under one of the licenses mentioned in iii You must comply with the terms of that license b For the avoidance of doubt Extraction or Re utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents into a new database is a Derivative Databas
349. ng by either tapping Q disengage the automatic steering or moving the steering wheel more than 5 degrees Pause recording You can pause recording and then begin recording again This is useful when you encounter areas or objects you are driving around but will not need to drive around on the next line 1 Tap O e Apause indicator displays on map e Astraight dashed line projects from the rear of the moving vehicle based on the current heading e The pause button changes to a Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 335 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations e Your position is saved to a file on the display You can then close the field and power off the display When you open the field again you will be guided back to your former position 2 When you have returned to your desired position for example after driving around an obstacle tap Q to stop the pause and snap a straight line from the initial pause location and the current vehicle position Access paths An access path is a space between your guidance lines These paths can be useful if there is road or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths through the middle of your field Note You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern but not headlands or pivots 1 At the Run screen tap WAP open the Mapping Guidance panel 2 Tap X Swaths 3 Atthe Swath Management screen tap Access Paths The Access Pa
350. ngs 3 Basic settings Setting Track logging is Distance O Time 514 Recorded by time s Distance gt 1 Time gt 1 Recorded by whichever setting is higher Track logging files Track logging files are created whenever you open an event The track file records points at the rate set on the Track Logging tab At each point a number of attributes are recorded Note The data stored in the track logging file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf is in metric units The information stored for each point in the track logging file is listed in the following table Column Description Units Along_Line Along line distance from start of swath meters Attribute Not Populated Ant_HAE Antenna height above ellipsoid meters Attribute Not Populated Ant_Lat Antenna latitude WG5 84 DD dddddddd Ant_Long Antenna longitude WG5 84 DD dddddddd Appln Wdth Application width meters As Applied Applied rate Attribute Not Populated Auto_ Steer Auto Steer flag 1 0n O off On or off Corct_Age DGPS signal correction age seconds Field Name The name of the field GPS Status GPS status value NMEA 1 2 5 4 Ground_HAE Ground height above ellipsoid meters Attribute Not Populated HDOP Horizontal Dilution of Precision A measureof the quality of positions based on satellite geometry Heading Direction of travel with respect to true North decimal degrees Height Mean sea level heig
351. nication with seed sensors 1 Check that the Auxiliary I O connector is plugged in 2 Apower cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in The system only looks for the sensors on boot up If they are not present it won t look for them until power is cycled 3 Check that sensors are compatible with Field IQ If the cables are connected 1 Check for the right harness 2 CT harness John Deere will always have pins 27 and 28 populated These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS 3 PM harness Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness Typically on all planters but JD These harnesses will have pins 24 27 populated 24 and 25 are 8 V power 26 and 27 are ground If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness Sprayer Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting Control valve will not open 1 Check valve type in Rate control set up 2 Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow P WM pump servo 3 Check that the product pump is on and producing flow Servo For PWM 1 Check that system will pass a drive calibration a If not check that max flow setting has not been set too high This setting is dependent of nozzle size Refer to a tip chart
352. nning very quickly Determine the pitch offset Note It may take some time to determine the proper pitch offset of a plow accurately Without a correct pitch offset the system will most likely attempt to maintain the design slope and drive the plow above or below the optimal depth All cantilever plows must assume an angle that is slightly tipped up in order to maintain depth against the immense down pressure being applied by the soil that is being displaced If the boot traveled through the soil with an even attitude the plow would progressively plow deeper as it was pulled through the soil After the pitch offset value has been determined the value should only change as the tip begins to show considerable wear Note Before completing this process ensure that the system drives to a consistent depth This depth may not be the optimal depth but it will ensure that the hydraulic system is operating well Once you are certain that optimal performance has been achieved you may begin the process of determining the proper pitch offset with consistent results 1 Engage the plow on a newly surveyed section line in soil that has been undisturbed 2 Allow the system to drive the vehicle to a consistent depth and then begin entering a positive 286 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup Pitch Offset value in the Implement tab Enter values in 0 50 increments Note It may
353. ns and rate are ready to be commanded by the FM 1000 integrated display e 5c Off position Sections are closed and rate is set to zero When you use Lock in Last Position the valve is locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary master valve or section Field IQ 12 section switch box optional Only one section switch box can be used on each system Each section switch is automatically assigned to the corresponding section The sections are read from left to right For example switch 1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the implement For more information see the Hardware tab in Setup screen of Field IQ The section switches have different functions depending upon the status of the master Automatic Manual section control switch on the master switch box Automatic section control When the Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Automatic position if the section switch is in the e On up position The section s assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FM 1000 integrated display e Off down position The section s assigned to it are commanded to be off 352 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation Manual section control When the Automatic Manual section control switch is in the Manual position if the section switch is in the e On up position The section s assigned to it are commanded to be on This ove
354. nt Decrease button Height Offset Coarse or When you tap Coarse the increase or decrease button moves the Fine button blade by the Coarse Blade increment This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment When you tap Fine the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the fine increment Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch Coarse Pitch Offset When you tap Coarse the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Pitch increment This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment Point and slope mode 1 At the Run screen tap J i to open the WM Drain panel 2 Goto the Install tab of the panel Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning Control Explanation Survey Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design Design Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design Note A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location Mode e Autoslope Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 425 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Control Explanation Pipe Slope Increase Slope Decrease Height Offse
355. nt screen are Buttons Tap to No AB Prevents the AB guidance lines from being loaded for WM Form activities New FreeForm Begin a new FreeForm line and go to the Run FreeForm pattern page screen 334 Load Load a new pattern Load a pattern page 338 Close Close the Swaths Management screen and Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 325 Guidance pattern use 18 Operations Buttons Tap to See return to the Run screen New Straight Begin a new straight line and go to the Run Straight guidance pattern screen page 327 Import Open the Import Swaths screen to import AB Import AB Lines or lines or boundaries boundaries page 337 326 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use Straight guidance pattern There are two ways to create a straight guidance pattern e Create an AB Line Define the start and end points e Create an At Line Define a point on the line and the heading direction Swath Management a fa Mapping Guidance Panel Choose straight jp gt Access Paths pattern Access Path Setup Swath Management New Straight AB line creation To create a straight AB line B 1 At the Run screen tap ey open the Mapping Guidance panel Tap X Swaths At the Swath Management screen select the AB pattern from the pattern list Ent
356. ntegrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 20 Glossary T A service is a subscription to an application that lasts for a specific amount of time such as one or two years You associate a service with a specific display that can be delivered wirelessly through a QR code included in an email or through download to a computer Signal Input Module The signal input module SIM can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on screen buttons and features Singulation The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop Slew time The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and back Slope heading The heading direction of the slope Steering deadzone The amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to turn Stop bit A bit sent at the end of every character to enable the detection of the end of the character Then the hardware can synchronize again with the character stream TAP Tuning parameter for guidance algorithms Target height Height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach This is the design height 6 the offset 5 When the blade reaches the target height the height indicator arrow turns green V VDOP A measurement of the vertical PDOP VI Vegetation Index A value that is calculated or derived from sets of remotely sensed data used to quantify plant heal
357. ntegrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Connectivity settings In this chapter GPS receiver settings _ GPS output settings 115 Remote Output setup 118 Serial Data Input 22222 2222222222 eee 124 Ag3000 modem 124 DCM 300 Modem 125 Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER This chapter covers connectivity related to e GPS receiver settings including corrections e GPS output e Serial data input e Remote Output setup FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 97 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings The FM 1000 integrated display automatically adds a GPS receiver option that controls the internal GPS receiver when you install e Manual Guidance e Autopilot e FieldLevel Il In addition the system may need second GPS receiver For example the TrueTracker system uses a second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS receiver option f Home A gt Configuration aaa GPS Receiver up Settings Note GPS receiver settings will show different options depending on how your system is setup Setup of the GPS receiver begins with corrections The following corrections are available e Autonomous no GPS corrections WAAS and EGNOS e CenterPoint RTK see CenterPoint RTK page 101 e CenterPoint RTX see Cen
358. number of seed openings per disk plate Row monitoring Setting Explanation Row Monitoring e Disabled Row monitoring is turned off e Blockage Select when using an air seeder or when applying granular material e Seed Count Select for precision seeding Setup e RowSensor Enable Turn individual row sensors on or off e RowSensor Wiring Select which wire each row sensor is wired to Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 197 Control setup Sensor tab 9 Field IQ system setup At the Sensor tab you can add alarm functionality to a sensor You can also access the Sensor Setup screen where you can add edit or delete sensors Setting Explanation Sensor Type The required sensor for which you want to create an alarm Name Displays after you have selected the sensor type You can enter aname for the sensor Alarm Enabled Alarm is enabled Disabled There is no alarm Warn if below If less than this threshold and longer than the delay time the alarm will display Warn if above If more than this threshold and longer than the delay time the alarm will display Warn after Delay time for the threshold values Warn if below Warn if above Sensor Setup Tap to access the Sensor Setup screen Sensor Setup screen At the Sensor Setup screen you can add edit or remove a sensor When adding or editing a sensor enter the following information Setting Expla
359. nverted Select if tank and pressure hoses have not been installed correctly This eliminates the need to reverse the hoses Height Filter Tab Choose the filter for height Setting Explanation None This setting this is the raw GPS data used for height is recommended Average The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls Jump Detect This will filter out some jumps in the height readings When selected the following values must be entered e Threshold The change in height value that will trigger the filter e Decay Time After the filter is triggered the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height Valve module calibration Note Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 273 FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup ap 1 At the Configuration screen select II Calibration screen displays FieldLevel l and then tap Calibrate The FieldLevel 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 For automatic calibration tap Start The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minut
360. o the Database Right including Extraction of Contents from non electronic Databases for private purposes Extraction for purposes of illustration for teaching or scientific research and Extraction or Re utilisation for public security or an administrative or judicial procedure Version 9 25 Revision A b Fair dealing fair use or any other legally recognised limitation or exception to infringement of copyright or other applicable laws 6 2 This License does not affect any rights of lawful users to Extract and Re utilise insubstantial parts of the Contents evaluated quantitatively or qualitatively for any purposes whatsoever including creating a Derivative Database subject to other rights over the Contents see Section 2 4 The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re utilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may however amount to the Extraction or Re utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents 7 0 Warranties and Disclaimer7 1 The Database is licensed by the Licensor as is and without any warranty of any kind either express implied or arising by statute custom course of dealing or trade usage Licensor specifically disclaims any and all implied warranties or conditions of title non infringement accuracy or completeness the presence or absence of errors fitness for a particular purpose merchantability or otherwise Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties so this exclusion may not a
361. o the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s
362. o the recipient of the Restricted Database i That is available without additional fee ii That is available ina medium that does not alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights an Unrestricted Database and iii The Unrestricted Database is at least as accessible to the recipient as a practical matter as the Restricted Database c For the avoidance of doubt You may place this Database ora Derivative Database in an authenticated environment behind a password or within a similar access control scheme provided that You do not alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights 4 8 Licensing of others You may not sublicense the Database Each time You communicate the Database the whole or Substantial part of the Contents or any Derivative Database to anyone else in any way the Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Database on the same terms and conditions as this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License but You may enforce any rights that You have over a Derivative Database You are solely responsible for any modifications of a Derivative Database made by You or another Person at Your direction You may not impose any further rest
363. o the surveyed surface Distance Tap the design graph or enter a distance to display the Design Info depth elevation slope surface for that location 7 On the Edit Line tab you have the options to a Indicate fixed points on the line See Add a fixed point page 422 b Clip and remove sections of the line See Clip a portion of a section line page 421 8 Tap OK At the Run screen you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of the profile The section line that you use for installation or cleaning will display as red on the screen other section lines are white Clip a portion of a section line You can remove a portion of the section line from either the beginning or end of the line or both 1 At the Designtab tap Design to open the Design screen 2 Go to the EditLine tab 3 From the far left hand list at the bottom of the screen choose either Clip Start or Clip End depending on which end of the line you want to remove 4 Indicate where you want to clip to by a Touching on the screen b Moving the slider c Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box 5 When you have finished indicating the areas to clip tap Delete All 6 To save the changes tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 421 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Add a fixed point You can add a fixed point to your design This enables you to avoid 1
364. olor of sections in the run screen If sections are red there is an issue a Check that system is not outside a boundary open a new field to test b Check that system is not over a previously applied area c Check that system has a fixed GPS position 2 Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen Rate fluctuates around target 1 Check that a drive calibration has been performed 2 Set the Rate to Manual With the drive locked the drive should be running steady If the rate is still fluctuating check the encoder If drive calibration is performed check that motor s have sufficient hydraulic flow For Rawson Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 459 FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 19 Diagnostics 1 Check that drive is running above 100 RPM Adjust gate height to achieve proper RPM 2 Isolate the drive from the shaft if possible try to minimize the load on the drive Make sure the drive operates properly with little or no load FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 1 At the Home screen tap A 2 At the Configuration screen tap FieldLevelll and then tap Diagnostics 3 You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open by either tapping e Auto To engage the system this sets the current elevation as Target Height 0 0 and tests its response as height offsets are add
365. om the CAN bus or a sensor transmitting invalid data Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions or more commonly if it is seeing a target other than plants and soil For example when setting up the system the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet asphalt Either of these conditions will likely generate an error code from a sensor Error Code Explanation 1 Red 5 NIR Red reflectance higher than NIR 2 BOTH lt 01 Both reflectances are below 0 01 3 RED lt 01 Red reflectance below 0 01 4 NIR lt 01 NIR reflectance below 0 01 5 BOTH gt 98 Either reflectance above 0 98 9 NIR lt 015 NIR net reflectance below 0 15 Row Guidance diagnostics 1 At the Home screen tap a 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap Row Guidance and then tap Diagnostics Item Explanation Offline Distance Status Status of the sensor Enable Disable Tap to enable or disable sensors Voltage Voltage for the left and right sensor Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 461 Row Guidance diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Item Explanation Voltage status Status for the left and right sensor 462 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Vehicle Sync diagnostics Vehicle Sync diagnostics 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 At the Configuration screen tap Age Vehicle Sync and then tap Diagnostics The Vehicle Sync Diagnostics screen display
366. ome screen tap A 2 Atthe Configuration screen tap w Field i and then tap Diagnostics 3 At the Field IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab you can enter values manually for Setting Explanation Tank Level Enter a value or tap Refill Tank Target Rate Use the buttons to decrease or increase the required rate for the rate switch Speed Use the buttons to decrease or increase speed Aggressiveness Check the value for Applied Rate Increase or decrease aggressiveness to achieve the rate you want Test optional switch box To test the optional switch box 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 At the Configuration screen tap Field IQ and then tap Diagnostics 3 At the Field IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab a Flip each switch in the section switch box b The section it is assigned to displays as gray Prescriptions To send target rates to the variable controller you can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received 354 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Field IQ operation from the controller and both target and applied rates display on the screen In addition you can log data relating to the variable rate application to the hard drive After you
367. on the screen When the vehicle sync layer is selected for events that have the same Client Farm Field Event the coverage associated with other vehicles will be color coordinated to that vehicle KEN View only layer When vehicles are not in the same event a View Only layer is shown for those vehicles that does not affect section control 390 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Vehicle Sync operation Age 0 6 Sec Distance 91 1 ESE Coverage controls the following e Tru Count clutches e Liqui Block clutches e Rate as section e Header swath width for yield calculation e Sprayer sections Note The warning Event Memory Low displays when the size of the file in the current event exceeds the memory capacity of the display If this warning displays exit the current field and begin a new event with a similar name Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 391 Water Management functionality Water Management functionality The functions you can perform with Water Management features include e Create a survey page 392 e Create save a design page 395 e Leveling page 396 e Point and Slope mode page 397 e Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes page 398 e Contour mode page 402 For dual or tandem operations there are e Dual scraper controls page 408 e Tandem scraper controls page 409 Create a survey The steps
368. on to the device The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector Note To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature for example the GPS receiver connected to an TrueTracker system controller make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list At the NMEA tab on the GPS Output Settings screen complete the settings and tap OK Setting Explanation Message Rate How often you want the message sent Baud Rate Baud rate Messages Enabled On Send NMEA message Off Do not send NMEA message Message types supported are e CGA e VIG 116 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS output settings Setting Explanation e GSA e GST e RMC e ZDA CAN GPS messages You can set up specific messages to be sent from the GPS receiver from a CAN port If you are using an ISO certified implement use this setting to send information to the implement such as speed At the CAN GPS tab on the GPS Output Settings screen complete the settings and tap OK Section Setting Explanation Output Port The port you want the GPS speed to be sent from Rate How often you want the message to be sent Simulated Speeds Wheel Speed Port The port you want the wheel speed to be sent from Wheel Speed Rate Off or On Radar Ground Speed The port you want the radar ground speed to be Port sent from Radar Ground Speed Off or On Rate
369. onality Survey tab The Survey tab is used to create a survey by creating a master benchmark and logging survey points while driving the area you want to survey Aaa Be Item Explanation Survey tab Design tab page 414 Install tab page 423 Record Section button Pause Section button Delete Section button Manual Data Point button Type of design Main Size of design Create Benchmark Tap to create a benchmark Delete Benchmark Delete a benchmark 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Re Rebench Tap to rebench Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 411 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Create a tile ditch survey line Before creating the survey line Set survey height offset page 412 This offset will be applied to the heights of your surveyed alignment so that you do not need to rebench before installing tile 10 11 At the Run screen tap J 3 to open the WM Drain panel Go to the Survey tab of the panel Drive to a point that will be untouched to use as a reference point Tap RA to create a master benchmark and flag this point so you can find it again easily Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch Note For the most efficient method it is recommended that you drive to the high end of the line From the Type list select the type of design The options are Main Sub main and Later
370. onfiguration Selection Configuration Field Selection OK Setup Diagnostics OK Save Config 34 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Main screens Help screen The FM 1000 integrated display has on screen help that provide details and helpful information about the current screen 1 To access help tap 7 A Help screen displays 2 To exit the Help screen and return to the previous screen tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 35 Passwords 2 Display basics Passwords The access and administration passwords apply to the FM 1000 integrated display Access password Any Setup Or Calibrate button marked with a padlock icon 4 is protected by two passwords e Administration password Your password e Master password A backup password in case you lose the Administration password If you need the Master password contact your local reseller The password screen displays the first time that you tap a Setup or Calibrate button after you turn on the FM 1000 integrated display Use the on screen keyboard to enter the administration password and then tap OK Note Passwords are case sensitive Change administration password Note To change the Administration password you need the Master password If you do not know it contact your local reseller 1 Ifyou have not entered the password during the current session at the Configu
371. onse to additional nitrogen O OEM moisture sensor Moisture sensor installed by the combine manufacturer Offset Difference between design height and target height By using the offset buttons you can create a plane that is parallel to the original design p Parity When used with a serial port an extra data bit is sent with each data character to detect errors in transmission PDOP Position Dilution of Precision A calculation that takes into account the satellites that can be seen how high they are and their bearing The outcome of the calculation is an estimation of how prone to error your GPS position is The lower the value the more accurate your position You may wish to plan your field work for periods of low PDOP Generally the more satellites in view the better lower the PDOP Pivot A guidance pattern you define for your field by recording the outer circular boundary of the pivot area and then entering a value to compute the rows within the pivot Guidance patterns are for use with automated steering Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 479 R 20 Glossary R RangePoint RTX Positioning service for satellite communication systems RangePoint RTX works with a built in GNSS receiver Does not require a base station or cellular data plan Rate switch for Field IQ Used to select Preset Rate 1 Preset Rate 2 or Manual Rate Control Real Time Kinematic RTK A navigation techniqu
372. or the implement steering performance and the values for Slew Time and Overshoot during the Turn Left phase Adjust the New Gain value if required Tap Turn Left Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew Note The optimum gain setting has short slew time short millisecond reading and overshoot percentage less than 1056 Repeat Step 11 with Turn Right Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew When you reach the best gain value tap OK to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory If you want to restart the calibration procedure tap Cancel Implement Steering Sensor calibration Note Complete this calibration before you calibrate the Automated Steering Deadzone or Antenna Roll Correction This calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement Note This calibration is only available for implements that have a steering sensor providing feedback for the steering mechanism location Sideshift hitches do not use this calibration Make sure that you e Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions e Followthe instructions on each page e Runthe engine at full throttle e Raise the implement 252 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system Calibration steps 1 Atthe Implement Controller Calibration screen s
373. ore information see Serial Comms page 433 432 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics System diagnostics CAN Bus data You can view CAN Bus data as the display receives it To view the data At the Configuration screen select g System and then tap Diagnostics Go to the CAN Bus tab To view the data from a port tap View The port diagnostics screen for that port displays Bb wn H To capture data tap the Capture button Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data 5 To close the screen tap OK Configuration data 1 To view display configuration information tap A 2 The Home screen shows e Display firmware information e Autopilot controller information e GPS receiver and correction method information e Vehicle make and model Network diagnostics 1 At the Configuration screen tap System and then tap Diagnostics 2 Go to the Network tab The status of various network connections display To enable Remote Assistant select Enabled Serial Comms You can view raw serial data as the display receives it This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal To view the raw serial data Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 433 Autopilot diagnostics 19 Diagnostics 1 Atthe Configuration screen select System and then tap Diagnostics
374. ormation about the material At the Material Setup screen tap Add The Material Details screen displays At the Material tab enter the appropriate settings and tap Next See Material tab page 188 At the Alarms tab enter the alarm information and tap Next See Alarms tab page 186 At the Operation tab complete the settings and tap Next See Operation tab page 186 a e w NA At the Coefficient tab enter the calibration value with the material The material may have different calibrations for different locations This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way for example Wheat Front Bin Wheat Rear Bin that you will know which location to use them in When you have entered the coefficient tap OK See Coefficent tab page 187 Delete a material 1 At the Material Setup screen tap Delete 2 To remove the material tap Remove A message displays prompting you to tap either e Remove to remove the material e Cancel to return to the Material Setup screen Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 185 Material setup 9 Field IQ system setup Alarms tab Setting Alarm triggers when High Alarm The rate reaches the selected percentage above the target for longer than the delay setting Low Alarm The rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay setting for the selected percentage Singulation Low The sing
375. ormed by the FM 1000 integrated display e When the display is turned on or off e Periodically while running The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog old and stored in the Archives folder See Archives folder page 84 The Diagnostics folder contains the following subfolders e Autopilot if you are using the Autopilot system e Preferences System settings stored in the lt Preferences gt xml file e Screenshots Screenshot files automatically numbered Screenshot_ lt num gt png e gps e logs e Screenshots Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 91 Data storage structure 4 Data management Autopilot subfolder This folder contains Autopilot configuration settings vehicle cfg Screenshots folder The Screenshots folder contains screenshots you have captured System folder The system folder contains log files used in troubleshooting Program log files The ProgramLog txt file can be useful for troubleshooting This file contains data from checks performed by the FM 1000 integrated display e When the display is turned on or off e Periodically while running When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog old and stored in the Archives folder See Archives folder page 84 The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad Prescription
376. ot limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent t
377. our use of the MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content is subject to the Additional Legal Requirements which are incorporated and made a part of these Terms of Use Please read the Additional Legal Requirements carefully as they include usage limits and additional restrictions that may impact your plans for development 3 3 Reservation of Rights MapQuest reserves all rights not expressly granted in these Terms of Use and you may not use the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content in any manner not expressly authorized in these Terms of Use LICENSE FROM YOU TO MAPQUEST If you upload any data feedback ideas suggestions content points of interest including any points of interest that include Trademarks or other material to MapQuest collectively Your Content you hereby grant MapQuest a perpetual worldwide non exclusive royalty free license to access archive reproduce publicly display translate modify the format or the display of distribute transmit stream cache overlay seam perform sublicense and otherwise use Your Content with or without attribution and without financial obligation in whole or in part via any method for any purpose MapQuest makes no assertion of ownership over Your Content and you retain all intellectual property rights to Your Content subject to the license you grant to MapQuest above MODIFICATIONS TO THESE TERMS OF USE AND THE SERVICES MapQuest reserves the right to change or modify these Terms of U
378. ows n a for both the next pulse number and the current swath ID 376 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Remote Output operation Crossing a line feature operation Using this option a pulse is output at any point where the line you are engaged on intersects another line feature that has the remote output option enabled See Line feature settings page 134 You can use this remote output option with AB A lines as well as pivots and curves Your screen will show e Dots showing additional previous pulses e Ared X indicating where the system will output the next pulse Note The location of the next output may change as accuracy of the calculated position improves e Awarning when you near the intersecting line if you have set up warnings see Remote Output settings page 118 The Remote Output panel shows Remote Output Panel Explanation Next Output ID A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID The pulse number increments with each pulse and is not related to the swath or vehicle position Current Pass Output The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 377 Remote Output operation 18 Operations Remote Output Panel Explanation Total Outputs The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently Next Output Distance The distance between the imp
379. p You can also set additional features on variable rate controllers including Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 235 Additional controller setup 12 Serial Rate Control setup e Coverage mapping page 236 e Target and applied rates page 236 e Units page 236 e Alarms page 236 Alarms If you want low limit and target rate alarms set these on the variable rate controller You can also set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription For more information refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller Coverage mapping The FM 1000 integrated display receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active boom sections from a variable rate controller It does not receive any information about the swath or application width To accurately record coverage maps if your controller does not send the number of active boom sections set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using for example the width of the spray boom Prescriptions You can define variable rate controller setup data and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller Applied rates are received from the controller and both target and applied rates are shown on the screen In addition data relating to t
380. pe of vehicle that is configured Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 75 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Time setup a f N Home KO Configuration g Setup O f N j a Display Setup gt Setup Time W NN a Note When you configure the time zone multiple warning messages may display Do not be concerned by this To synchronize the system time to the GPS signals 1 From the Display Setup screen tap Timezone 2 Tap Setup If the time is not correct tap the or button to change the time by 1 hour increments 76 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Data management In this chapter Managing data 0 Transfer data Delete data aaa 000 a0000an00an Data storage structure Data Dictionary categories _ Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER This chapter explains e How to transfer data between a USB drive and the display e The structure of data on the USB and computer e The Data Dictionary FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 77 Managing data 4 Data management Managing data As part of data management you can e Transfer files See Transfer data page 78 e Delete files See Delete data page 81 e Edit and add to the data entry categories by editing the data dictionary See Data Dictionary categories
381. performing a catch test 1 Atthe Field IQ Calibration screen select Flow Calibration under the valve you want to caibrate The Planter Calibration screen displays 2 On the Calibrate tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Shaft Encoder Pulses per revolution Constant Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number 3 Tap Test and follow the instructions to test the settings you entered 4 On the Limits tab you can view an overview of the limits that are set 206 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field IQ Sprayer calibration A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate To calibrate a sprayer calibrate the implement lift switch then the modules Implement lift switch calibration 1 From the Field IQ Calibration screen select Implement Lift 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field Q Calibration screen Spraying modules calibration Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require The option to calibrate th
382. permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been
383. play User Guide 177 EZ Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup 178 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Field IQ system setup In this chapter Field IQ system functionality 180 General setup information 181 Implement setup for Field IQ 181 Field IQ system setup 184 Material setup 0 222222222222222 185 Control setup 22 eee 187 Equipment calibration for Field IQ _ 200 Upgrade Field IQ system firmware 213 Version 9 25 Revision A When the Field IQ system is installed the FM 1000 integrated display can control e Planters e Sprayers e Air seeders e Liquid strip till tool bars e Spinner spreaders FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 179 Field IQ system functionality 9 Field IQ system setup Field IQ system functionality The Field IQ system can perform automatic section control using e Tru Count Air Clutch e Boom valves e LiquiBlock e Various section control devices While performing automatic section control it can control rates using a prescription with e Rawson drives e Servo valves e PWM valves e Various flow control devices The Field IQ system can be configured to perform different functions Application Main functions Planter e Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual rows Field lIQ system sec
384. pplied in the specified spacing Area that has been logged during the current session Distance covered while logging during the current session Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current session Length of the current field session Vehicle pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Current vehicle speed Steering Angle Survey Area Survey Cut Fill Survey Points Swath Length Angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense device Total area of the current survey Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fillis shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Number of survey points that have been created Length of the current guidance line 74 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Status Item Explanation Swath Number Swath Points Tank Level Note FreeForm curves are made up of line segments so the Swath Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves Swath number L le
385. pply to You 8 0 Limitation of liability 8 1 Subject to any liability that may not be excluded or limited by law the Licensor is not liable for and expressly excludes all liability for loss or damage however and whenever caused to anyone by any use under this License whether by You or by anyone else and whether caused by any fault on the part of the Licensor or not This exclusion of liability includes but is not limited to any special incidental consequential punitive or exemplary damages such as loss of revenue data anticipated profits and lost business This exclusion applies even if the Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 8 2 If liability may not be excluded by law it is limited to actual and direct financial loss to the extent it is caused by proved negligence on the part of the Licensor 9 0 Termination of Your rights under this License 9 1 Any breach by You of the terms and conditions of this License automatically terminates this License with immediate effect and without notice to You For the avoidance of doubt Persons who have received the Database the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents Derivative Databases or the Database as part of a Collective Database from You under this License will not have their licenses terminated provided their use is in full compliance with this License or a license granted under Section 4 8 of this License Sections 1 2 7 8 9 and 10 will survive any termin
386. quency and Baud Rate See Frequencies and baud rate page 114 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask RTK Base Station Filter Enabled Disabled RTK Base Station CMR ID Scintillation Filter Can be edited if Filter is enabled On or Off On the Logging tab enter the settings Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 103 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings Setting Explanation Record AgRemote Logs Off or Record Logs 6 On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 7 When you have completed the settings tap OK 104 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings CenterPoint RTX sc CenterPoint RTX sc standard cell is a satellite based subscription correction service 1 At the Configuration screen tap Bee GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose CenterPoint RTX ss FastRestart On or off FastRestart technology greatly redu
387. r Connect a USB drive to your computer 1 2 3 Unzip the firmware file Save it to the root folder of the USB drive 4 Insert the USB drive into the USB socket on the rear of the FM 1000 integrated display 5 Press the power button on the rear of the display to turn on the display and then wait for the Home screen to appear D Tap Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen displays 7 Select a firmware file from the Firmware list and tap Upgrade 8 After the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts 44 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Activate features plugins for use Activate features plugins for use All features that have been unlocked must be activated or added for use before you can set up or use them Home gt K Configuration Add Remove gng 1 Open the FM 1000 integrated display if you are not already in it 2 Atthe Home screen tap A Note To add or remove features plugins you must access the Configuration screen only from the Home screen At the Configuration screen tap Add Remove The Select Active Plugins screen displays To use a feature select it from the Inactive Plugins list and tap Add gt To stop using a feature select it from the Active Plugins list and tap lt Remove an PF w When you are finished with your choices tap OK The system returns you to the Configuration screen Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrat
388. r D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 6 When you have completed the settings tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 109 GPS receiver settings OmniSTAR HP XP G2 5 Connectivity settings OmniSTAR HP XP G2 is a high accuracy satellite based subscription correction service The accuracy for each type is e HP 2 4 5 10 cm accuracy e XP 3 4 8 10 cm accuracy e GP 2 4 8 10 cm accuracy compatible with GLONASS 1 Atthe Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays 2 On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Antenna Selection Explanation Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose OmniSTAR HP XP G2 FastRestart On or off FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence After the satellite signal has initially converged you can turn off the receiver When you turn the receiver on again accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown Convergence Threshold The required accuracy of the correction service before the signal will converge and the automatic steering system will engage GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settin
389. r disable sensors Voltage Voltage for the left and right sensor Voltage status Status for the left and right sensor Implement setup for Row Guidance Before starting the Row Guidance setup ensure that e Allcables and components of the system are installed on the vehicle e The Autopilot system has been installed and configured with the NavController firmware e When setting up Autopilot for use with the RG 100 system ensure that e Avehicle profile that ends in RG 100 is selected at the Vehicle Controller Setup screen e The XML header file in the latest release of the vehicle database vdb has been added to the vehicle profiles on the FM 1000 integrated display Firmware versions after v 6 63 contain an XML file For instructions on updating the XML file refer to the support note Autopilot System Installing the VDB File v6 e Row Guidance has been added activated for the display 164 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system E At the Home screen tap et The Configuration Selection screen displays 2 Tap Edit next to Implement The Configuration screen displays w Tap Add Remove to add Row Guidance to the configuration Save vehicle profile Note From Autopilot firmware version 3 0 and later the vehicle profile location defaults to From Database After you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle you can save that i
390. r loss e Reduce operator fatigue in difficult conditions such as down corn curved rows long passes and other poor visibility conditions e Operate effectively in fields that were planted using other steering systems or in areas where the planter drifted You can operate Row Guidance with e Straight lines You can use either A B or A lines e FreeForm patterns When recording and in corn rows the Row Guidance sensors drive the firsts pass After that the guidance system uses the previously recorded pass but augments it with sensor input e Curves When operating on a sharp curve Row Guidance aggressiveness may need to be increased for performance See Row Guidance adjustments page 382 To open the Row Guidance panel at the Run screen tap m Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 379 Row Guidance operation 18 Operations Use row sensors To use the sensors 1 Make sure the Autopilot system is engaged Activate the sensors by tapping OO on the Row Guidance panel When active the row guidance sensors will feel the number of strikes against them After a set number of strikes the Row Guidance will determine the average peak displacement of the sensors on each side of the row for the strikes and react to this peak displacement on each side to steer the vehicle until the peak displacements on each sensor are equal Note Row sensors override the set Autopilot guidance line When you turn aro
391. rage dbf Coverage shx Track Graphical files containing a series of Track3D_ lt date time gt shp 3D points with attributes Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf Track3D_ lt date time gt shx Free Form Guidance Graphical files containing paths for Swaths shp free form guidance Swaths shx Swaths dbf Coverage logging file The display creates a coverage logging file when any application coverage is recorded For each coverage polygon the following information is saved to the coverage logging file Data Field Description AppType Application type ID AppliedRate Applied rate reported by the variable rate controller DateClosed Date the polygon was closed GPS_Status Numeric GPS status value Height Height in meters Speed Average GPS ground speed for the polygon in meters per second Status_Txt GPS status description Swath The current swath number when coverage was recorded TimeClosed Time the polygon was closed Version Coverage attribute file version XTE Implement Cross Track Error in meters Track logging file A track logging file is created whenever the event is opened At each point a number of attributes are recorded The units stored in the track attribute file Track3D_ lt date time gt dbf are in metric units 88 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Also see Map settings page 54 Data storage structure
392. rate The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than nitrogen GreenSeeker permits a custom algorithm to be entered which is a table of product values instead of the NDVI value These values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table See Create a custom table page 369 Note The grower consultant must develop these rates Also be aware of the rate range ability of your specific rate controller and nozzles used to achieve these results Field calibration You can use a GreenSeeker hand held to measure the NDVI ofa crop if you know the approximate desired rate for the crop Note You can also measure NDVI using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the GreenSeeker panel or by using the calibration function Delivery system and liquid control As with any variable rate system the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon the delivery system The RT200 interface module is capable of requesting any rate but the actual rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components Most liquid rate control systems control or throttle the pressure of the system to affect flow and application rate When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system it is important to match nozzle sizes to expected delivery rates After the appropriate reference strip readings GDD and selection of crop type are input into RT Commander the application graph can be accessed to show the pr
393. rate You are prompted to maintain the current speed The last sentence appears only if the master switch was on at the time of the warning General system warning The GPS speed has been overridden with the jump start speed You must drive at that speed to maintain the current target application rate Warning typically appears when system drops under 10V Number of nozzles has not been set The valve type plumbing or auxiliary valve setting is incorrect The flow meter calibration number has not been set 442 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 19 Diagnostics Possible Causes Actions Check e Cabling and fuses e Power supply Possible causes Controller is drawing too much current There is an electrical short somewhere Go to the Valve Calibration screen to set the valve type Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Diagnostics Field IQ diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes Actions Check the flow meter calibration Shaft encoder configuration The shaft encoder constant has error not been set Check the Shaft Encoder Constant in the Flow Calibration screen Valve configuration error The valve settings are not valid Check the valve calibration for the selected valve type Unknown Field IQ This message shows if the FM Check firmware versions Report configuration error 1000 integrated display does not this fault to Trimble Support understand the fault code that was
394. rate The Field Q Calibration screen displays 2 Select the first module that you want to calibrate The Planter Calibration screen displays Note If a Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically 3 Complete the settings Setting Explanation Seeds Per Disk The number of seed openings per disk plate Gear Ratio Tap Calculate to determine the gear ratio Allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM The number of revolutions that the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 203 Equipment calibration for Field IQ 9 Field lQ system setup 10 11 12 13 Setting Explanation Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of the material Calculate the Rawson gear ratio from the motor to the metering point of the material Note If the gear ratio is figured incorrectly the system may over or under apply even if it is showing the correct rate on the screen You may also have issues in the drive calibration screen Calibration Constant A calculated value the system determines during calibration To begin leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this value Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration AN WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure
395. rate The Planter Calibration screen displays Note If a Rawson module was configured the correct calibration is selected automatically Setting Explanation Gear Ratio Specifies the actual ratio from the applicaiton rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters To start out leave the value at 1 000 After the calibration test the system may adjust this number Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Ensure the implement is safe to operate Tap Test The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is full the system turns the seed disks one revolution Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch In the Number of Seed Meter Revolutions entry box enter a value and then tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Five to 10 revolutions is recommended Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system t
396. rate plane that is parallel to the design plane The offset if defined by a single measurement which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the FieldLevel Il GPS receiver Line number of the primary blade Speed of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver Height the primary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green Height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the VDOP is higher lower is better Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II GPS receiver Current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 71 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Productive Area Area of Area Features that are designated as productive Radio Signal Strength DCM 300 wireless signal strength S Altitude Current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Blade Height Cu
397. ration ox Name 30 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 2 Display basics Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Main screens Implement configuration switching Configuration Selection implement Configuration New A Implement Configuration Sel Actia Configuration Configuration Plugins Selection Name Sequence Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 31 Main screens 2 Display basics Field Selection screen f da Cas s Salection OK a Field Selection Client Select from list Farm Field ra Event 1 When you want to go to a field to begin work in the Run screen tap A the Home screen 2 Ifthe system vehicle and implement at the Configuration Screen are what you want to use tap OK 3 At the Field Selection screen you can e Choose existing fields you have created in the system e Create a new field as well as the client farm and event associated with it For more information see Field creation selection page 319 32 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Main screens Configuration screen You can access the Configuration screen from the Home or Run screen Home rf N j A Configuration kinana el X Diagnostics Run Save Config _ Switch Config Note Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen To acc
398. ration screen tap Setup Or Calibrate 2 Ifyou have already entered the password during this session tap button and then tap Lock Configuration On the Configuration screen tap Setup or Calibrate The Enter Administration Password screen displays Enter an incorrect password The Wrong Password screen displays Tap Enter Master Password an e w Enter the master password and then tap OK The Change Administration Password screen displays 7 Enter your new administration password in both fields The new administration password is now active 36 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 2 Display basics Optional features plugins Optional features plugins The FM 1000 integrated display has a number of optional features plugins you can install to expand its functionality Most of these features require additional hardware You must Purchase the feature Install any hardware required by the feature Unlock the feature See Unlock features plugins page 43 Activate the feature for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 Cu Bi OM IA Configure the feature Vehicle guidance e Trimble Autopilot automated steering system See Autopilot system page 146 e Trimble EZ Pilot assisted steering system See EZ Pilot assisted steering system page 166 e Trimble EZ Steer assisted steering system See EZ Steer assisted steering system page 172 e RG 100 Row Guidance system Works
399. rator Timeout The amount of time of inactivity before an operator timeout message displays Coverage Log How coverage logging occurs e Manual Coverage logging only occurs when you tap sa e When Engaged Coverage logging occurs when Autopilot steering 148 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system Setting Explanation is engaged by tapping yellow See Engage button page 317 Steering settings for Autopilot system At the Steering tab complete the settings related to steering on the guidance line Vehicle Controller Setup Vehicle Engage Steering Advanced Setting Explanation Nudge Increment The distance the Nudge buttons in the Run screen move to for the vehicle to line up with the guidance line End of Row Warning Dist The distance the vehicle is from the end of a row to trigger the end of row warning AutoSense On or off Note Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device require this setting to be On Valve on Speed e Normal Speed threshold 50 4 m s 1 3 ft s For normal operating speeds e Low Speed threshold gt 0 1 m s 0 3 ft s For vehicles operating and very slow speeds e Ultra Low Speed threshold 50 2 m s 0 7 ft s For vehicles operating and very slow speeds Note The NavController must have firmware version 5 10 or higher to support low and ultralow settings Legacy Sensors For older
400. redentials to use the MapQuest Services or certain aspects of the MapQuest Services You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of your Credentials and for any usage or abuse of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content by anyone using your Credentials 8 2 Usage Data MapQuest s servers record information when you visit MapQuest websites or when applications and or Credentials call or invoke the MapQuest Services This information may include without limitation the URL IP address browser type Credential and access times and dates MapQuest may use this information to promote operate and improve MapQuest services products and properties PROPRIETARY RIGHTS You acknowledge and agree the MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content are works for purposes of copyright law and embody valuable confidential trade secret information of 4 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide MapQuest the development of which required the expenditure of substantial time and money As between MapQuest and You MapQuest retains exclusive ownership of any and all rights title and interest including all intellectual property rights in the MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content and you shall not acquire any rights express or implied in the foregoing by virtue of these Terms of Use other than otherwise expressly set forth For purposes of these Terms of Use the term Trademarks means all trademarks trade names service marks logos domain names
401. rent GPS position fix quality and number of satellites The difference between vehicle heading and path heading Roll Current roll value calculated by the system Direction Current vehicle direction Forward backward or stopped Cross Track Error Numeric value of the offline distance On screen lightbar Visual representation of offline distance Heading Current vehicle heading calculated by the system Speed Current vehicle speed calculated by the system 1PPS Shows whether the 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver is detected Aggressiveness A slider to adjust the aggressiveness of the steering system Nudge Enter the increment of distance you want for nudging Steering tab Section Explanation PWM status Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electro hydraulic valve This is an indication of whether the system is attempting to turn left or right Steering command override Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels With this feature you can force a certain angle of turn and make sure that the system responds as expected Steering angle Required angle The angle that the system is trying to attain Steering angle Where the system calculates the wheels are pointing Enable Reset Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 435 EZ Pilot diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Details tab Section Explanation Diagnostics Vehicle
402. rent design e Fill The volume of material that must be added for the current design e Area The area of the field inside the boundary 4 Tap OK to close the AutoPlane screen and save the design The the system saves the design as the default plane for this field Leveling Before you begin your leveling operation using Field Levelll you may need to e Import designs page 403 e Reload a field page 403 e Re bench page 403 Getting started with leveling The FieldLevel Il system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field You will use the color cut fill map simple on screen adjustments and automatic blade control to perform leveling In addition to the following instructions depending on where you are in your operation you may need to e Reload a field page 403 e Re bench page 403 1 Open a field as normal 2 When your leveling model is set to Multiplane design and the FM 1000 integrated display opens the field the system e Scans the AgGPS Designs e Opens any Multiplane gps control files that are close to your current position and displays a list of these files in the Select Design screen 3 Select the design you want to use and tap OK 4 To enter the leveling panel tap either 5 or ay depending on whether you are using a tandem scraper or dual scraper See Dual scraper controls page 408 or Tandem scraper controls page 409
403. reshapes the ground The Autoplane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate its surface elevations You can accept the AutoPlane calculation and have the system create a best fit design or manually edit settings including e Cut Fill ratio Amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt e South gt North Slope Angle of the slope from North to South e West gt East Slope Angle of the slope from West to East 394 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality e Composite Slope The true angle of the fall of the design In other words the angle of the slope when the two slope angles are combined e Slope Heading The heading direction of the slope when the East West and North South slopes are combined Create save a design After you complete the survey the AutoPlane button displays on the Survey Design panel To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to be moved 1 Tap AutoPlane The AutoPlane screen displays If necessary you can manually adjust the angle of the slope However this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum 2 Complete the settings If necessary you can manually adjust the angle of the slope However this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was
404. riate for your vehicle Drive Settings Turn the master switch on and vary the rates Adjust values if needed Info Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration 4 Select Flow Calibration and then tap OK The Flow Calibration screen displays Anhydrous calibration A WARNING NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin eyes respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly It may cause severe burns to the eyes lungs and skin Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure It is recommended that protective gloves boots slicker and or pants and jacket and chemical splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times A WARNING Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground the implement lift switch must be down Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death To calibrate anhydrous first calibrate the implement lift switch Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require Implement lift switch calibration 1 At the Field IQ Calibration screen select Implement Lift 2 Raise the implement and then tap Next 3 Lower the implement and then tap Next 4 Tap OK to return to the Field IQ Calibration screen Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Gu
405. rictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License 5 0 Moral rights 5 1 Moral rights This section covers moral rights including any rights to be identified as the author of the Database or to object to treatment that would otherwise prejudice the author s honour and reputation or any other derogatory treatment a For jurisdictions allowing waiver of moral rights Licensor waives all moral rights that Licensor may have in the Database to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10 4 b If waiver of moral rights under Section 5 1 a in the relevant jurisdiction is not possible Licensor agrees not to assert any moral rights over the Database and waives all claims in moral rights to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10 4 and c For jurisdictions not allowing waiver or an agreement not to assert moral rights under Section 5 1 a and b the author may retain their moral rights over certain aspects of the Database Please note that some jurisdictions do not allow for the waiver of moral rights and so moral rights may still subsist over the Database in some jurisdictions 6 0 Fair dealing Database exceptions and other rights not affected 6 1 This License does not affect any rights that You or anyone else may independently have under any applicable law to make any use of this Database including without limitation a Exceptions t
406. ring rights b A license of the Database Right and c An agreement in contract between You and the Licensor 2 2 Legal rights covered This License covers the legal rights in the Database including a Copyright Any copyright or neighbouring rights in the Database The copyright licensed includes any individual elements of the Database but does not cover the copyright over the Contents independent of this Database See Section 2 4 for details Copyright law varies between jurisdictions but is likely to cover the Database model or schema which is the structure arrangement and organization of the Database and can also include the Database tables and table indexes the data entry and output sheets and the Field names of Contents stored in the Database b Database Rights Database Rights only extend to the Extraction and Re utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents Database Rights can apply even when there is no copyright over the Database Database Rights can also apply when the Contents are removed from the Database and are elected and arranged in a way that would not infringe any applicable copyright and c Contract This is an agreement between You and the Licensor for access to the Database In return you agree to certain conditions of use on this access as outlined in this License 2 3 Rights not covered a This License does not apply to computer programs used in the making or operation of the Database b
407. rk to be used as the new pivot b Tap Choose Pivot The Choose Pivot screen displays c Select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen d Tap OK The Plane Editor screen displays 7 Select the Primary Slope Cross Slope or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as required Note The cut fill values in the Benchmarks table will update automatically 8 The plane is now defined Tap OK The Run screen displays Note The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field If there is a survey a cut fill map displays as the new design plane Contour mode 1 At the Run screen drive the vehicle to the location where you want to start the first levee 2 Set the master benchmark at this point 3 Set which side of the vehicle is uphill 4 Tap Guide and drive the vehicle forward following the lightbar to keep the vehicle on the same contour a To move to the next levee turn the vehicle around and change the Up Hil direction b To step the blade up or down use the and plus and minus buttons to achieve the required offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade When you drive in Point and Slope mode the FieldLevel II panel displays these controls Button Explanation Coarse Fine Coarse The blade will move by large increments Fine The blade will move by small increments Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment Lowers the blade by t
408. rolled by a PWM valve Servo valve or Rawson drive You can use a planter seed liquid granular seed and granular fertilizer all of which have different setup parameters Multipath error An error caused by the interference of the same signal reaching the receiver by two different paths once via the direct path and once via a reflection A major cause of GPS errors NDVI 478 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 20 Glossary O Normalized Difference Vegetative Index Commonly used to measure plant health and vigor NDVI NIR reflected Red reflected NIR reflected Red reflected NMEA standard An electrical hardware and data standard designed by the National Marine Electronics Association that dictates the content and format of communication between GPS receivers and other devices NMEA messages include data that provides location and accuracy the number of satellites being used the dilution of precision and signal strength NEU Nitrogen Use Efficiency A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant For example an NUE of 6096 means that 6 lbs of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 Ibs applied For more information visit www nue okstate edu NRS Nitrogen Rich Strip An area for determining the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment mineralization etc and importantly this year s expected maximum yield potential and resp
409. roller Setup screen select Automated Steering Deadzone and tap OK The Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays 1 2 5 Tap Next Tap Next in the two screens that display Follow all instructions Tap the Test Right and Test Left buttons to perform the Deadzone calibration As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration it is recommended that you perform the calibration at least three times or until the average deadzone values change by less than about 0 5 To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration you can reposition the vehicle between the phases of the test If the available flat smooth space is extremely limited re align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration To reposition the vehicle a Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin b Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn c Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available d Tap the button to begin the next phase Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase Automated Deadzone error messages Error Explanation Manual Override Detected Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle could be completed Retry Vehicle Moving Too Slow The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration cycle Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Displ
410. rom the control widths in the Hardware tab of width the Field IQ Setup must match Please visit Field IQ setup the application width in the to reconfigure settings Implement Setup A difference of about 0 4 inches is tolerated Application width is This message could appear when different from the control you exit the Field IQ Setup and section width The total of the rate controller Do you want the control widths in the Hardware tab of and section width to be the Field IQ Setup must match automatically adjusted to the application width in the match the application Implement Setup A difference of width about 0 4 inches is tolerated Please select your NH3 unit This messages shows if the application type is anhydrous and you attempt to exit the Field IQ Setup without selecting the Anhydrous Units type Ibs Actual N or Ibs NH3 in the Features tab The total number of rows This message may appear when Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 447 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes Actions assigned to sections XX you exit the Field IQ Setup exceeds the number of The total of the numbers in the rows on the implement XX fields in the Sections tab exceeds Press Continue to exit the the number of rows configured Field IQ Setup or press Edit inthe Implement Setup to edit the row assignments XX implement rows arenot This message may appear when
411. rope CE Declaration of Conformity Version 9 25 Revision A Hereby Trimble Navigation declares that the GPS receivers are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Australia and New Zealand This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications and Media Authority ACMA EMC framework thus satisfying the requirements for C Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand Restriction of Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment RoHS Trimble products in this guide comply in all material respects with DIRECTIVE 2002 95 EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment ROHS Directive and Amendment 2005 618 EC filed under C 2005 3143 with exemptions for lead in solder pursuant to Paragraph 7 of the Annex to the RoHS Directive applied Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE For product recycling instructions and more information please go to www trimble com ev shtml Recycling in Europe To recycle Trimble WEEE Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment products that run on electrical power Call 31 497 53 24 30 and ask for the WEEE Associate Or mail a request for recycling instructions to Trimble Europe BV c o Menlo Worldwide Logistics Meerheide 4
412. row which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height Height the blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green 66 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Status Item Basic system settings Design Slope Dist to Feature Dist to Pause East Engaged Time Event Coverage Area Event Coverage Distance Event Coverage Time Event Name Farm Name Field Area Field Name Free External Storage Explanation When using the Autoslope leveling model this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line Distance to the nearest feature Distance to the pause position Distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin point Length of time that the system has been engaged Area that has been logged during the current event Distance covered while logging during the current event Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current event Name ofthe Glikreit even Name of the current farm Field area within a pivot or headland boundary Name of the current field Amount of free space on the USB drive Free Internal Storage GMT Time GPS Position Spacing GPS Status H Error Heading Heading to Feature
413. rrent calibration The average moisture will be reset to the Version 9 25 Revision A Calibration was unable to be applied to field possibly due to invalid data in field User tapped Reset in a calibration screen User confirmed yield calibration reset User confirmed moisture calibration reset User confirmed temperature calibration reset There are no loads for the current crop type The load data is not valid for calibration usually because the load is too small Optical sensor failed to respond during tare calibration Displayed in load details dialog if there are no loads for the current crop type Loads that were used for the current yield calibration cannot be deleted Loads that were used for the current moisture calibration cannot be deleted Occurs when tapping New Load in the diagnostic screen if no field is open User tapped ok after selecting loads for deletion in Load Details screen The display needs some time to determine whether deletion of the field event would remove a load that was used for calibration Try again later Manual moisture will cause the average to be FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 469 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Warning message Explanation manually entered moisture setting Do you want to reset average moisture and recalculate dry yield Closing this field will cause your current load being recorded to be automatically finished Would
414. rrent height of the secondary blade S CMR Percent Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the secondary blade GPS receiver S Correction Age Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver S Correction Type Correction type used by the secondary blade receiver S Cut Fill Difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary Target Height e When Cut is shown the current ground height is above the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height e When Fill is shown the current ground height is below the target height The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height S Design Height Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach This is the Design Height the Offset When the blade reaches the Target Height the arrows turn green S Distance Traveled Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled for use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode S East Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point S GPS Status GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is currently using S H Error Horizontal error Estimation of the level of precision of the
415. rrides the display and coverage logging is ignored e Off down position The section s assigned to it are commanded to be off This overrides the display and coverage logging is ignored LED status indicators The LED indicators on the section switch box are e Green Unit is powered and is communicating with the display e Yellow Unit is initializing communications with the display e Red Unit is powered but not communicating with the display Material assignment To change materials quickly and easily 1 At the Material Assignment screen tap the material to change A list of available materials displays 2 Select the material you want from the list and tap OK Material assignment Use the Material Assignment option to quickly and easily change materials The location name you set up displays for example Hoppers and the button shows the current material name Tap the button to see a list of the same type of materials To change the material type select the required material from the list and then tap OK Enable sections To enable sections 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 At the Configuration screen tap w Field IQ and then tap Diagnostics Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 353 Field IQ operation 18 Operations 3 Atthe Field IQ Diagnostics screen on the Operations tab tap the section you want to enable Enter values manually To enter values manually 1 Atthe H
416. rty bit is set to space signal condition Data Bits Number of data bits to transmit Stop Bits Number of bits that represent the stop message Used to identify the end of the cropping message when transmitted by the system Options settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Options tab select the setting for New End Load Confirmation Yield sensor moisture sensor calibration To calibrate the yield sensor and moisture sensor use either of these Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 297 Yield sensor moisture sensor calibration 17 Yield Monitoring setup e Single Load Calibration Multi Load Calibration Before starting either procedure keep the following in mind e Usethe same load type for both yield and moisture calibration e To achieve the highest accuracy perform the Multi Load Calibration procedure Calibration steps Loads and Calibration Summary info Summary info 1 P o N o n 298 New Load Summary info Loads and Calibration Verify that all Yield Monitoring setup parameters are correct Yield Sensor Moisture Sereor Calibration Calibration At the Run screen tap EF to open the Yield Monitoring panel Tap Loads and Calibration The Loads and Calibration view of the panel displays Tap either Yield Sensor Calibration Or Moisture Sensor Calibration depending on which calibration you want to perfor
417. rvices or if you set up a Community Account you are agreeing to abide by these Terms of Use and are forming an agreement between yourself and MapQuest Inc MapQuest If you do not want to abide by these Terms of Use then don t use the MapQuest Services LICENSES FROM MAPQUEST TO YOU 2 1 MapQuest Services License MapQuest grants you a non exclusive non assignable non sublicensable revocable limited license to use the MapQuest Services during the Term of these Terms of Use as provided by MapQuest in the manner permitted in these Terms of Use 2 2 MapQuest Content License MapQuest grants you a non exclusive non assignable non sublicensable revocable limited license access use publicly perform and publicly display the MapQuest Content as the MapQuest Content is provided through the MapQuest Services and in the manner permitted by these Terms of Use GENERAL RESTRICTIONS ADDITIONAL LEGAL NOTICE RESERVATION OF RIGHTS 3 1 Restrictions Except as expressly authorized by MapQuest You must not decompile disassemble reverse engineer or otherwise attempt to derive any source code from the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content other than the Open Services interfere or disrupt MapQuest servers or networks or disobey any network access or security requirements policies procedures or regulations of MapQuest including the enabling of any viruses Trojan horses trap doors back doors worms time bombs cancelbots adware sp
418. s 3 Check the signal quality for the WiFi connection 4 View the other vehicles that are on the selected channel Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 463 Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics 1 Atthe Home screen tap A 2 At the Configuration screen tap sf Yield Monitoring and then tap Diagnostics The Yield Monitoring Diagnostics screen displays Status tab The Status tab includes information on the optical and moisture sensors Optical Sensor Item Explanation Noise level Indicates how clean the optical sensor signal is and if the noise level is too high This number should be less than 30 for best performance If larger values are seen check the following e Optical sensor interference e Worn paddles e Optical sensors protruding too far into the chamber e Installation in the wrong location too low on elevator Elevator speed Frequency of paddles typically 15 Hz to 20 Hz e Unusually low numbers Indicate the system is not seeing the paddles This most likely occurs when running empty Inspect the optical sensor installation Unusually high numbers Typically be accompanied by large noise levels Inspect the optical sensor installation Percent Dark The duty cycle This data can be used to determine if you are close to exceeding the capacity of the combine 464 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 19 Di
419. s d Creation of temporary or permanent reproductions by any means and in any form in whole or in part including of any Derivative Databases or as a part of Collective Databases and e Distribution communication display lending making available or performance to the public by any means and in any form in whole or in part including of any Derivative Database or as a part of Collective Databases 3 2 Compulsory license schemes For the avoidance of doubt a Non waivable compulsory license schemes In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme cannot be waived the Licensor reserves the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License b Waivable compulsory license schemes In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme can be waived the Licensor waives the exclusive right 6 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License and c Voluntary license schemes The Licensor waives the right to collect royalties whether individually or in the event that the Licensor is a member of a collecting society that administers voluntary licensing schemes via that society from any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License 3 3 The right to release the D
420. s rights in the Database Directive as amended and as transposed by member states which includes the Extraction and Re utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents as well as any similar rights available in the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10 4 Derivative Database Means a database based upon the Database and includes any translation adaptation arrangement modification or any other alteration of the Database or of a Substantial part of the Contents This includes but is not limited to Extracting or Re utilising the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents in a new Database Extraction Means the permanent or temporary transfer of all ora Substantial part of the Contents to another medium by any means or in any form License Means this license agreement and is both a license of rights such as copyright and Database Rights and an agreement in contract Licensor Means the Person that offers the Database under the terms of this License Person Means a natural or legal person or a body of persons corporate or incorporate Produced Work a work such as an image audiovisual material text or sounds resulting from using the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents via a search or other query from this Database a Derivative Database or this Database as part of a Collective Database Publicly means to Persons other than You or under Your control by either more than 50 o
421. s and makes commercially available and for which it does not charge separately subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products generally If you have purchased the Product from an authorized Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly Trimble may at its option forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final distribution to you Minor Updates Major Upgrades new products or substantially new software releases as identified by Trimble are expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty 2 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to extend the limited warranty period For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply 1 Fix es means an error correction or other update created to fix a previous software version that does not substantially conform to its Trimble specifications 2 Minor Update occurs when enhancements are made to current features in a software program and 3 Major Upgrade occurs when significant new features are added to software or when a new product containing new features replaces the further development of a current product line Trimble reserves the right to determine in its sole discretion what constitutes a Fix Minor Update or Major Upgrade Gson components licensed under the Apache 2 0 License The source is available from http code google com p google gson Google
422. s folder For each prescription that you generate the system stores three prescription files in either of these formats e ESRI shape file format e lt prescription_name gt shp e lt prescription_name gt dbf e lt prescription_name gt shx e gdx file format e lt prescription_name gt gdx Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files If these files are on the USB drive they are ignored when you transfer from the USB to the display Summaries folder The Summaries folder contains files such as 92 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data storage structure e Program log files e PDF summary file PDF summary file When you close a field the display creates a PDF summary file This file is saved to the folder AgGPS Summaries lt client_farm_field_event gt gt Trimble Event Summary _ e tee The Event Summary PDF file may include the following images of the field e Overlap Coverage and any overlaps e Height Vertical height of the GPS position e Applied rate Volume at which the spray boom applied solution e GPS quality e Average XTE coverage layer Degree of implement drift The file also shows information about the e Event e Vehicle setup To view a summary report on a computer Remove the USB drive from the display Insert the USB into an office computer Select the folder AgGPS Su
423. s greater freeplay in one direction than the other causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line To make this adjustment a Engage the on an AB line b Ifthe vehicle is offline to the left increase the freeplay offset to the right FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Pilot assisted steering system c Ifthe vehicle is offline to the right increase the freeplay offset to the left d Enter the parameters and then tap OK The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays Note If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto Low Note The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available To access these options select EZ Pilot Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen 8 Tap OK The Configuration screen displays T3 roll compensation calibration The EZ Pilot system contains sensors that use T3 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump For roll compensation to work correctly the IMD 600 must be calibrated on Ro pE EZ Pilot Steering Calibration 1 At the Configuration screen select G EZ Pilot and then tap Calibrate The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays 2 Select IMD 600 Orientation and tap OK The EZ Pilot Roll Calibration screen displays Note For best accuracy install the IMD 600 a
424. s of blockage sensors e Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with manual rate or prescription e Control existing PWM linear actuators or servo systems e Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed bin level air pressure and implement switches For installation and cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide General setup information Before starting the Field IQ system setup ensure that e All components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement e Field IQ has been activated for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 e The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation such as planting or spraying See Implement setup for Field IQ page 181 For cabling information see the FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see Field IQ operation page 347 Implement setup for Field IQ The implement type defines the set up options for the Field IQ system For example if the material is set to granular fertilizer and the implement is set to sprayer the system will not allow you to enter a gate height setting When running a fertilizer cart set the implement type to air seeder This will allow the user to not have to enter gate dimensions Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 181 Implement setup for Field IQ 9 Field lQ system setup 1 Navigate to the mplement Setup screen 2 On t
425. s setting causes the implement to come online more quickly while lengthening the setting causes the implement to come online more slowly Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 141 Delete an implement 7 Implement setup Overlap When you map a headland you create an inner boundary and an outer boundary At this tab set the Infill Boundary e Select Inner to shut off sections when the implement reaches the inner boundary e Select Outer to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary Switches 1 Atthe switches tab tap Setup 2 At the Add Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen enter the appropriate settings Measurement Explanation Status On Select if you have one or more implement switches tied into your implements control system off Select if you have no implement switches tied into your implements control system Number of Switches Select the number of implement switches that you have tied into your implement control system Minimum Changed Enter the number of implement switches the system should Switches recognize to determine if the implement is lifted Delete an implement To delete an implement 1 At the Configuration Selection screen tap Switch next to the implement 2 Atthe Implement Configuration screen select the appropriate implement from the list 3 Tap Delete 4 When prompted tap Yes to confirm the deletion 142 FM 1000 Integrated Display User G
426. s shown in the installation instructions for the supported platform in which it is being installed Make sure the IMD 600 is installed at right angles to the center line of the vehicle Non orthogonal angles will cause performance degradation From the Orientation list select the orientation of the IMD 600 module and then tap Next 4 Park the vehicle mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the first direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read 5 Turn the vehicle around ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in step 4 and then tap Next The display records the roll offset in the second direction This takes approximately 20 seconds Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read The T3 calibration results display in the Roll Offset section of the screen The roll offset value should be between 0 and 4 6 Tap OK The EZ Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 171 EZ Steer assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup EZ Steer assisted steering system The EZ Steer assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance For cabling information see FM 1000 Integrated Display Cabling Guide For operational information see EZ Steer system operation page 365 EZ Steer Settings Configurat
427. s you have activated for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 If a feature is deactivated the status items associated with it are no longer available The Select Status Items screen has two tabs where you can configure various display options for the status text items Run screen slide out status On the Run Screen tab you can set what items display on the Run screen in the status slide out panel when you tap the edge of the panel The status text items appropriate for the features plugins you are currently using display in the Info Items list 1 Set the upper left status text item a From the Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left 4 Set Item button The information displays in the upper left field 2 Set the upper right status text item a From the Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right Set Item button The information displays in the upper right field 64 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings 3 From the Timeout list select a time This is how long the tab remains on screen before retracting To have the tab extended until you close it manually select Never 4 To add status items to the slide out tab a Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill For example to add an item to the first position on the list tap at the location shown b From the Info Items list tap the item you
428. sate for the delay and the system will turn off after the set number of seconds Overlap Setting Explanation Start Overlap Distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area End Overlap Distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area The higher the number the greater the overlapped area 194 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field lQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation Coverage Switching Percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap The higher Overlap the number the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off Boundary Switching Percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary Overlap The higher the number the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area Rate Control tab At the Rate Control tab adjust the settings Setting Explanation Rate Control Select ON to have the Field IQ system operate a rate control component The system sets the target rate Select OFF for no rate control Section switching only Rate Control Module Tap Setup to configure the rate control module s their location on the Location implement and the width they will control Drive Setup Tap to set up the drive Complete the settings on these tabs e Valve Setup e Feedback Setup e Advanced Version 9 25 Re
429. screen select Lightbar 2 Tap Setup The Lightbar Configuration screen displays 3 Tap VirtualLightbar and tap Setup 4 Complete the settings as appropriate Setting Explanation LED spacing The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar a Tap the appropriate number field b Enter the required values Default 3 cm per LED 1 per LED Display Mode How the LEDs respond to offline distances When Show error is selected the display shows the direction that you need to move in When Show correction is selected the display shows your current distance offline a From the list tap the appropriate option b Enter the virtual lightbar settings then tap ok c At the Lightbars Configuration screen tap oK Default show error chase mode 58 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings External lightbar To set up the external lightbar Or ee ONS iP Setting Tap Lightbar and tap Setup Basic system settings Connect the LB25 lightbar to port B on the back of the FM 1000 integrated display At the Display Setup screen tap Lightbar Tap Setup The Lightbar Configuration screen displays Complete the settings as appropriate Explanation Name Name and serial number of the lightbar Orientation Choose the orientation of the lightbar Brightness Setting for how bright the lightbar displays LED Spacing The distance represented by each LED on the lightb
430. se the MapQuest Services and or the MapQuest Content Please check these Terms of Use including the Additional Legal Requirements periodically for changes Your continued use of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content following the posting of any changes to the Terms of Use constitutes acceptance of those changes TERMINATION MapQuest may terminate these Terms of Use and or the provision of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content at any time for any reason with or without notice PRIVACY POLICY AND END USER TERMS 7 1 Privacy Policy MapQuest s collection and use of personally identifiable information is governed by the AOL Network Privacy Policy available at http about aol com aolnetwork aol_pp 7 2 End User Terms End users shall only be entitled to use the MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content if they accept the then current end user Terms of Use located at http info mapquest com terms of use MapQuest reserves the right to amend and or replace these terms and the form and manner of presentation You must provide a hypertext link at the bottom of each page in your website or application where the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content can be viewed or accessed or within the terms of use of your application or website to the end user terms of use ACCESS AND USAGE DATA 8 1 Credentials MapQuest at its discretion may require you to create an account and obtain an access key and other related credentials collectively C
431. ses more complex surface designs imported from the MultiPlane design software e Plane Flat Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the on board software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope This leveling model uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement However the design heights are corrected to a plane surface to match your old laser leveled fields e Plane Earth Surface Levels the field to a design plane The plane can be configured in the software using benchmarks and slopes or by creating a plane of best fit over a surveyed surface Autoslope It uses a high accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement e Contour Uses the FM 1000 integrated display s on screen lightbar or an LB25 external lightbar to guide the vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same elevation This can be used for levee marking and applications that require guidance to elevations Acceptable warning distance When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside this range for more than three seconds a warning displays Vertical Dilution of Precision A measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal If the VDOP reaches this value a warning message displays AVDOP setting of less than 3 is recommended Tolerance for a cut fill value being considered on grade The On Grade Tolerance is shown as the green co
432. settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate 6 When you have completed the settings tap OK 112 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings RangePoint RTX Trimble RangePoint RTX is a satellite based subscription correction service with pass to pass lt 6 15 cm accuracy and GLONASS compatibility 1 At the Configuration screen tap 3a GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Antenna Selection Select a supported antenna type Corrections Choose RangePoint RTX GPS Output Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages See GPS output settings page 115 On the Frequencies tab enter the settings for Frequency and Baud Rate See Frequencies and baud rate page 114 On the Logging tab if you want to record logs select Record Logs On the Radar Output tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Connector Select Connector D to enable radar output The display can convert GPS speed into an analog frequency that is identical to output from a radar speed sensor Radar Frequency Rate Enter the required rate When you hav
433. single implement Note For a tandem system move the blade up when Auto is disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be swapping between the two For a dual setup with a single implement we recommend that you have the left and right Disengage Raise values set to the same value Tandem dual calibration When working with a tandem dual configuration the valve module must be calibrated for both e FieldLevel Il Relates to the front implement cylinder in a tandem configuration or the left side cylinder of a single implement e Tandem Dual Relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration or the right side cylinder of a single implement Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type 1 At the Configuration screen select 2 ng Tandem Dual and then tap Calibrate 2 Set the vehicle throttle to 100 3 Tap Start The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes 4 To manually calibrate the valve enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap OK Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 277 WM Drain setup 16 Water Management setup WM Drain setup 1 Ifyou have not completed implement setup complete this befor
434. sion 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 159 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Test Offset distance Offset direction Total Total 3 average offset value pr Flag offset method for roll offset 1 Remove any implement from the vehicle The vehicle draw bar must be centered 2 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 3 Reset the Roll Offset value to O zero on the Roll Correction screen See Roll antenna compensation calibration page 158 4 Create an AB Line 5 Start a new pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 6 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag in the ground to mark the vehicle center line for this pass 160 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system 7 Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 8 Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin location very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB
435. sly open If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to re establish the height Re bench When you are leveling you use benchmarks to e Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re calibrate your exact position This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling e Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point Re benching is designed to accommodate differences with RTK base station setup from the last time the field was opened Manual re bench On the Field Levelll panel if you tap either of the Re bench buttons when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark Re benching enables you to synchronize your position with the design you created Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 403 Water Management functionality 18 Operations 1 Tap Re Bench A message displays showing a list of the saved benchmarks within the open field The system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you if multiple benchmarks exist but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use Note To ensure the design is properly aligned to the field return to the exact location of the master benchmark that you marked on the ground for example
436. steering wheel If the setting is too e Low The system will turn the wheel too much and the vehicle will perform S turns e High The system will turn the wheel too little and the vehicle will not hold the line Freeplay Left Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the right of the line Freeplay Right Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the left of the line Motor Speed The maximum rate at which the SAM 200 will operate Online Aggressiveness How aggressively the EZ Pilot system corrects the deviations from the current guidance line A setting that is e Veryhigh Will correct deviations quickly but the vehicle may steer erratically e Verylow Will allow a smoother drive down the swath but the vehicle may go further offline before the deviation is corrected Approach Aggressiveness How quickly the EZ Pilot system steers the vehicle onto the Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 167 EZ Pilot assisted steering system 8 Vehicle guidance setup Setting Explanation current guidance line A setting that is e Veryhigh Steers the vehicle quickly but the steering correction may be too severe e Verylow Steers the vehicle very slowly but the vehicle may overshoot and travel too far down the swath before reaching the guidance line Engage settings for EZ Pilot system At the EZ Pilot Settings screen on the Engage tab you can edit the system s engage and disengage
437. stem setup and calibration to ensure accuracy in applying product When changing material this setting must be updated Capacity Units Select Default Units or Bushels Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied Bin Capacity The amount the tank bin holds when full Note Markings on tank bin may not be accurate Current Volume Current volume of the product in the tank Partial Refill The amount of material that will be added to the bin tank during a partial refill Warning Level Setting that triggers a low bin warning The level at which a warning displays on the screen when your bin tank reaches a set threshold Spinner Pulses Per Revolution Enter the number of magnetic pick up points per revolution of the spinner Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to capacity Partial Refill Tank Bin Refills the tank bin to the Partial Refill amount Row Offset Setup Provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets Row offsets are measured from the Application Offset value entered in the Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard Number of row offsets Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements Row Offset 1 row offset Enter the distance between the Application 190 FM 10
438. swords page 36 At the Implement Configuration screen tap New The New Configuration Name screen displays with an on screen keyboard Enter a name for the new implement and tap OK The Select Active Plugins screen displays Select the optional features plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap OK on DMN FW N H The Implement Setup wizard displays See Edit implement settings page 140 to complete the settings Note The information needed for implement setup depends on the plugins that you selected in the previous step 9 Tap OK Your current configuration now displays in the Configuration screen Select an implement To select an implement that has been configured 1 At the Home screen tap po 2 Atthe Configuration Selection screen tap Switch next to the implement 3 If necessary enter the administrative password See Passwords page 36 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 139 Import an implement 7 Implement setup At the Implement Configuration screen select the implement you want to switch to and then tap OK Note If there is only one available implement it is selected by default The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen Import an implement To import an implement 1 2 7 8 Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB drive Insert the USB drive into the FM 1000 integrated display and then
439. t Time that the implement has been engaged The status of the GPS correction used for the implement Implement horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better Current heading of the implement in degrees from direct north Implement s current latitude Implement Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur more than one hour apart Implement s current longitude RTK network ID of the implement receiver s corrections Distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the implement is to the south of the field origin point Amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement position Distance away from the guidance line Number of satellites the implement receiver is reading Implement pass to pass Cross Track Error XTE when passes occur within less than 15 minutes Current implement speed FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Status Item Basic system settings Impl Steering Angle Explanation Steering angle of the implement Impl Up Vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point a negative number means the implement is
440. t restart the display 54 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Setting Explanation Map orientation Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the vehicle e North Up When you perform a turn the field remains stationary and the vehicle turns j A e Vehicle Up When you perform a turn the field rotates but the vehicle remains pointing up Note To change the map orientation from the Run screen tap the north arrow Color scheme e Default mode For use during the day e Night mode For use at night The night mode color theme uses darker color themes to cause less eye strain in low light conditions Save summaries e On The display creates a saved file for your work e Off The display does not create a saved file for your work Track Logging tab On the Track Logging tab you can configure the display to record the vehicle track at either a set time ora set distance Points along the trck are logged at the greater of the two values either logging time or logging distance To always log a point based on either of the two values set the other value to zero To disable track logging set both values to zero Setting Track logging is Distance O Time 0 Turned off Distance 1 Time 0 Recorded by distance m Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 55 Basic system setti
441. t Explanation on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type e Rear axle on front steering tractors and self propelled sprayers e Front axle on 4 x4 articulated tractors e Center of tracks on tracked tractor Note If you set Application Offset to zero you will not be able to select Drawbar for the Type in the Geometry tab Rows Number of rows that are covered by the implement Left Right Offset This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line It is measured from the center of the vehicle ot the center of the implement or header 4 Onthe Geometry tab a Select the type which controls how the implement is modeled Either Hitch 3 pt or Drawbar Note If Application Offset is set to zero in the Implement Type tab you cannot select Drawbar b Enter the appropriate measurement Some measurements are only available if Implement Monitoring TrueGuide or TrueTractor is active Measurement Explanation Hitch to Ground Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point Contact Point that the implement rotates about For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools Antenna Front Back Measured from the implement working point to the center of the Offset GPS antenna This is used only when an GPS antenna is mounted on the implement When using the TrueG
442. t Increase Height Offset Decrease Height Offset Increase Height Offset Decrease Slope e Slope Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage From the starting point the vehicle leves at a constant slope regardless of direction e Constant Depth Use to collect a live rolling survey of the ground surface This survey is passed in real time to the control system which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance Autopilot or EZ Pilot Run depth is defined by setting the Height Offset value to the desired depth Examples e Fora consistent depth of 4 0 1 22 m adjust the Height Offset to 4 0 1 22m e Fora consistent height of 6 0 15 m above the ground surface adjust the Height Offset to 6 0 15cm This mode requires two RTK enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system One of the RTK enabled receivers e Is not required to be an internal receiver e Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin feature e Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM Drain e Pipe Type Select the type of pipe to be installed e Pipe Size The size of the pipe to be installed Increase the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment Decrease the design slope by the Slope Adjust increment Raise the tile boot or blade by the Slope Adjust increment Lower t
443. t must be greater than zero This appears during anhydrous flow calibration The process requires you to enter the weighed amounts of NH3 at the start and end ofa FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 449 Field IQ diagnostics 19 Diagnostics Message That Displays Explanation Possible Causes Actions run If this warning appears it is likely that you transposed the two amounts No target rate This will appear if you try to flush The flush cannot be when the current target rate is performed until a target zero rate has been set Please select a target rate The calibration cannot be The granular flow calibration completed because the requires you to enter the quantity dispensed is zero amount that was dispensed Press Edit to edit the This message shows if the quantity or Restart to entered amount was zero restart the calibration Calibration Failed The granular calibration failed The flow calibration was because you cancelled the cancelled calibration or an error occurred Calibration Failed The granular flow calibration Check that the shaft turns No flow was detected failed because there were no during calibration pulses reported from the shaft Check the installation and wiring encoder of the shaft encoder Calibration Failed The granular calibration failed No material was dispensed because you entered zero for the actual amount of material dispensed The selected target rate and This shows during granular
444. t the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section The Select Feature screen displays At the top left hand list choose the type of feature Area Line or Point 3 Tap New The Edit Area Line Point Feature screen displays Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature The Enter Area Line Point Feature Name screen displays Enter the name of the feature and tap OK You are returned to the Edit Area Line Point Feature screen Complete the settings for the feature you have added For specifics see e Field area feature settings page 133 e Line feature settings page 134 e Point feature settings page 136 Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen displays again showing the button of the feature you just created Edit a field feature To edit a feature you have placed in your on screen field 1 At the Feature Mapping screen tap one of the four buttons under the Selected Features section The Select Feature screen displays At the top left hand list choose the type of feature Area Line or Point 3 Tap Edit The Edit Area Line Point Feature screen displays To edit the name a Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature The Enter Area Line Point Feature Name screen displays b Enter the name of the feature and tap OK You are returned to the Edit Area Line Point Feature screen Edit the settings for the feature you have added For specifics see e Field area feat
445. t the following settings e Status e Moisture correction e Display of yield with storage moisture e Adjust storage moisture e Display of current moisture Bulk Density setting 1 Turn the HOTKEY dial to the scales icon s a 2 Adjust the crop density by rotating the HOTKEY until the correct value displays on the screen Ka p o id sg ia 12 v O ya O m NOYO 0 o0 isan pa R n basoun awan C4 Note The Ibs bu value must be set before the Weight Measured function can be used Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 301 Third party display instructions 17 Yield Monitoring setup Zero Yield setting 1 Tap BA ans then tap KA 2 Tap BS and then tap EJ 3 Tap OK Zero Angle setting 1 Tap BA ans then tap saf 2 Tap Band then tap A 3 Tap OK Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration 1 Tap BA anc then tap sa YY and then scroll to On 3 Harvest a full grain tank or truck load 4 After the tank or truck is full tap BA ana then tap E 5 Tap and then scroll to Off 6 Weigh the grain tank or truck to get a scale ticket 7 Tap and then tap saf 8 Tap g and then tap Crop yield weighted 9 Scroll to increase or decrease the value until it matches the weight on the scale ticket Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration Activate the AutoPilot system 1 Tap g and then tap Aof 2 Tap and then scroll to on 302 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide V
446. t the unit of measure for the crop type e Bushels acre e Lbs acre e Tons acre e Hundred Weight acre When this is selected the Bushel Weight field is automatically set to 100 lbs e Bushels hectare e Kgs hectare e Tonnes hectare Standard Bushel Enter the weight of a single bushel of crop Weight Storage Moisture Set the cutoff point between a wet crop and a dry crop Set these values depending on what you want the map to look like Moisture Upper Limit Range from 5 40 The working limit of the sensor if a trimble moisture sensor is attached 296 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Map settings Map settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Map Legend tab enter information about the yield and moisture values to display on the Run screen Setting Explanation High Yield Highest expected yield for the current event Low Yield Lowest expected yield for the current event High Moisture Highest expected moisture for the current event Low Moisture Lowest expected moisture for the current event Sensor output settings At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the Serial tab enter what output you want from the sensors Setting Explanation Baud Rate Modulation rate of data transmission in seconds Parity e None No parity bit sent e O Odd parity bit e Event Even parity bit e Mark Parity bit is set to mark signal condition e Space Pa
447. t width 3 rows at 7 5 ft at the same constant speed This provides a calibration curve for Low Medium and High Flows vary throughout the course of Harvest An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows e Load 1 5 768 lbs 4 mph 100 e Load 2 4 547 lbs 4 mph 75 e Load 3 3 834 lbs 4 mph 50 e Load 4 2 764 lbs 4 mph 25 3 At the Yield Sensor Calibration screen for each load a Enter the actual scale weight b Enter the actual test weight average of a minimum of three test weight measurements c Select each load for which the actual weight and test weight will be calibrated d Tap Update Calibration e Tap Apply Calibration 4 Atthe Moisture Sensor Calibration screen for each load a Enter the actual moisture b Select each load for which the actual moisture will be calibrated 5 Tap Update Calibration 6 Tap Apply Calibration Third party display instructions Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup Note When using Yield Monitoring with Claas Quantimeter always set Autopilot Coverage Logging to manual See Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 300 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 17 Yield Monitoring setup Third party display instructions Crop Harvested setting 1 On the Cebis display tap BA anc then tap saf 2 Tap BA anc then select the crop that you are harvesting Moisture Measuring setting 1 Tap BA and then tap saf 2 Tap and then adjus
448. take 1 2 lengths of the boot for the system to fully recognize this offset Continue the actions in Step 2 until you are within a few hundredths of optimal depth Allow the system to drive along the entire section line Ensure that the system continues to be consistent through any transitions that are found in the current section line When you believe the system is running with the highest accuracy possible survey another new section line Allow the system to drive the entire line Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until the system gives a consistent result Note the pitch offset value you came up with and reset the run screen offset back to 0 00 At the Measurements screen enter the determined Pitch Offset value Note Once determined this value should only change once the tip begins to show signs of considerable wear Calibrate the valve WM Drain performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers This process takes approximately 8 10 minutes for each valve 1 5 6 At the Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays Select ye WM Drain and tap Calibrate Select the appropriate valve depth or pitch if applicable At the Depth Valve Calibration screen set the vehicle throttle to 100 and tap Start Note To manually calibrate the valve enter values for manual calibration and tap OK When the procedure is complete tap OK Repeat this procedure for another valve if applic
449. tap OK The Autopilot AutoSense Calibration screen displays 2 From the Location list select the AutoSense position From the Orientation list select the AutoSense orientation 4 Tap ok to confirm selections Steering angle sensor calibration Note Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle If an AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor the Steering Sensor screen does not appear Steering sensor calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement Note Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion Ensure that you e Perform this procedure on a hard level surface that is free of obstructions e Maintain a tractor speed above 1 6 kph 1 mph e Watch the Sensor Angle value e Forasymmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the wheels to full right and full left Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 153 Autopilot system 8 Vehicle guidance setup e To ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight ahead Calibration steps To run the steering sensor calibration 1 At the Vehicle Calibration screen select Manual Override and tap OK The Autopilot Steering Sensor Calibration
450. teer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions Use the lt and gt buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction left or right of the line you are currently engaged on To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for TrueTracker system page 249 Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line Asetting that is e Higher brings the vehicle back online faster but may cause tight oscillations about the line e Lower Brings the vehicle back online more slowly but can avoid overshoot Note The default aggressiveness setting is 100 364 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations EZ Steer system operation EZ Steer system operation A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared To engage the EZ Steer system you must have e Havea field open in the Run screen e Havean existing pattern you are using e The vehicle within the engage distanc
451. tem 3 Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle See Autopilot calibration page 150 Note The subsequent configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed Begin setup Home A Configuration aa Setup Vehicle Controller Setup 1 At the Home screen tap a The Configuration screen displays 2 Select wl Autopilot Vehicle and tap Setup The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays Vehicle settings for Autopilot system Complete the settings in the Vehicle tab Vehicle Controller Setup Vehicle j Engage i Steering Advanced 146 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system Setting Explanation Connector Select the port on the display that the Autopilot system controller is connected to Current Selection Displays the current vehicle profile vdb that is loaded To change this setting see Select a vehicle page 147 Select a vehicle Bie Vehicle Controller Setup Vehicle Engage 1 At the Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select al Autopilot Vehicle and tap Setup The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays 3 Tap Edit The Edit Vehicle screen displays 4 From the Vehicle Profile Location list select the source of the pre configured vehicle profile you want e Autopilot controller The majority of vehicle profiles are stor
452. tem operation At the Run screen tap The EZ Steer panel displays Setting Explanation Nudge The guidance line can move off target due to either e GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system e GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field Use the lt and gt buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction left or right To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for EZ Pilot system page 167 Trim Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions Use the lt and gt buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction left or right of the line you are currently engaged on To set the increment for this setting see Steering settings for EZ Pilot system page 167 Online Aggr Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes Use the and buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line A setting that is e Higher brings the vehicle back online faster but may cause tight oscillations about the line e Lower Brings the vehicle back online more slowly but can avoid overshoot Note The default aggressiveness setting is 100 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 367 GreenSeeker operation 18 Operations GreenSeeker operation The
453. tenance 2 2 2 aaa kaaa 216 Field preparations for nitrogen application a 217 FieldiS tUp 2 naan an cote tec ced eee ede cased dade bie tae in odes oon scadeesevedecsweeda 218 Field preparations for user defined rate eee cccc cee eeeccccccceeeeccceeeees 219 Field calibration 2 2 c cece cece cee c nce cccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 219 Delivery system and liquid control 2 2 2 2 aaa 219 S lect a NOZZE ao ache ns feiss cei hea reese Ofte Dede Pcs Meee Naa 220 11 ISOBUS Setup AA ASi AARE EEEa 221 ISOBUS settings 0000000000000000 cece cece cece cece cece cece anana annn 222 Virtual Terminal setup 2 2 2 2 cece aaa 222 Task Controller setup 22222 aaa 222 GPS output settings lll cece eee cece cece cece cece aonan nonon 223 Equipment setup 2 o coon eee eect eee e O a Ee reaS 224 12 Serial Rate Control setup 0 000000000000 ccc cece a 227 Supported variable rate controllers 2 ccc ccce ce cccc ccc eecccccccececcccceceeeeccecees 228 Variable rate controller setup 2 22 2 2 coco cece cece cece ccc cccccecccceeceeeeeeeteteteteetees 229 Amazone Amatron LL 229 Bogballe Calibrator 22 2 2 ooo eee cece ccc ceccecccccceeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 230 Controller setup 2 2 2 2 ccc aaa 230 Flex Air setup 202 aaa 230 Operation aoaaa 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 ADADDA DIDDL a L
454. terPoint RTX fs page 103 e CenterPoint RTX sc page 105 e CenterPoint RTX ss page 106 e OmniSTAR wide area differential GPS service see OmniSTAR HP XP G2 page 110 e RangePoint RTX page 113 e SBAS Tracks DGPS correction systems using WAAS 98 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 5 Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings AgRemote Interface Note Only advanced users should use the AgRemote interface The FM 1000 integrated display has an on screen AgRemote interface for manually adjusting GPS receiver settings To access the on screen AgRemote interface 1 Atthe Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver and then tap Diagnostics The GPS Status screen displays 2 Tap AgRemote The on screen AgRemote interface displays For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface refer to the AgRemote Software Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www trimble com Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 99 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings Basic correction settings For the basic corrections complete the following steps 1 100 At the Configuration screen tap Be GPS Receiver then tap Setup The GPS Receiver Settings screen displays On the Settings tab from the Corrections list select either e Autonomous e SBAS On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask RTK Bas
455. th stress and vigor VRA Variable Rate Application The rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied based on information supplied to a rate controller Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 481 W 20 Glossary W Wheelbase The distance between the front and rear axles On tracked vehicles the wheelbase is exactly half the length of the track 482 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A
456. th Setup screen displays Complete the settings on this screen and tap OK 336 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Guidance pattern use Setting Explanation Swaths between access paths This value must be equal to or higher than the Swaths in first group setting The next access path will display this number of swaths beyond the first access path and will continue to repeat after this number of swaths The access path will display after this number of swaths including the master line Path width Width of the access path Swaths in first group Enter the number of swaths ABs place in the first group Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group left to right left to right entry box This setting enables you to specify where the master line displays in the first group from left to right Provide Guidance to Select whether guidance will be based on swaths or access paths Switch to the next pattern You can switch from one existing line pattern to another To do so tap Each time you tap the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen Swaths tab The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel Note Freeform cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active Import AB Lines or boundaries Th
457. th offline distance is shown to be O but the selected guidance line is not centered on the current swath on the screen In this case it is recommended to skip temporarily move the guidance line to align with the drifted crop rows The Autopilot system must be disengaged to skip Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 381 Row Guidance operation 18 Operations Row Guidance adjustments On the Row Guidance panel you can adjust guidance using the following controls Control Explanation Nudge Use to correct satellite drift Nudge adjustments are available for autonomous WAAS Omni and RTX Rangepoint corrections This adjustment will move the position of the vehicle in the global cardinal direction perpendicular to the path traveled in the user defined increment When a correction is made heading South on a guidance line to the right the position of the vehicle will be moved to the West When heading back North the correction will still be to the West but left to the direction of travel Trim The vehicle can steer offline as a result of e Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement e Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions Trim adjustment is available for RTK and RTX Centerpoint corrections FS SS SC Trim moves the vehicle perpendicular to the line with reference to the forward direction to the right or left of vehicle forward travel the amount setup by the user For example while
458. th that you drove to automatically generate the position of the other swaths Occasionally the on screen swaths do not accurately indicate where your swaths are For example you may need to skip a swath to drive to the other side of a road To temporarily correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field 4 B 1 At the Run screen tap ay to open the Mapping Guidance panel 2 Tap Skip The Enter the Skip Distance screen displays 3 Complete the settings Setting Tap to Left Shift the line to the left of your view Right Shift the line to the right of your view Value entry boxes Enter the distance you want to skip to the next swath Metric Change to metric values Feet 8 Inches Change to feet and inches Decimal Feet Change to decimal feet Rows Caleulator Open the calculator The swath line moves the required amount 4 Tap OK The Swath Management screen displays The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen Note The skip occurs based on the direction of the vehicle not on the A to B orientation of the line For example if you select Left the line shifts to the left of your view 342 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Coverage logging Coverage logging When you are applying material the coverage button displays on the Run screen The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging
459. the coverage you are applying Indicator Button Explanation mx Indicates coverage logging is off Tap to start logging Logging Off pin Indicates coverage logging is on Tap to stop logging Logging On When the system logs coverage it records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation such as applying fertilizer to a field If you have chosen to log coverage the covered area displays on the Run screen as a pale yellow area that shows e Coverage the first time e Any skips in coverage e Areas you covered twice or three times Coverage logs record more than the applied material See View coverage layers page 343 and Log coverage for varieties page 344 You can begin logging coverage e Manually by tapping a e Automatically if you are using automatic steering and tapping O se Engage settings for Autopilot system page 148 Engage settings for EZ Pilot system page 168 or Engage settings for EZ Steer page 173 If you are applying a variety of materials you can set up coverage to show the varieties See Log coverage for varieties page 344 View coverage layers 1 To see different aspects or layers of coverage on the screen tap A on the lower left side of the screen 2 Select the layer you want to view Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 343 Coverage logging 18 Operations Layer Explanation Overlap General coverage and overlap
460. the implement is safe to operate Tap Test The system asks if you would like to prime the system Tap Yes To to ensure that the seed disk is full the system turns the seed disks one revolution Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on screen turn off the master switch For Number of Seed Meter Revolutions enter a value and tap Start The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration Five to 10 revolutions is recommended Follow the on screen prompts of operating the master switch After the system turns the specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue Select the Limits tab to view a listing of the limits that are set Tap Ok Repeat the previous steps for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration Hydraulic test The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system The Rawson hydraulic test is used to make sure the drive will turn After entering a desired RPM the master switch is turned on and the drive should begin to turn If the drive does not turn check all electrical connections If the motor is plugged in properly it will make a hissing or whining noise 204 FM 100
461. the units used in the prescription file 4 Set the lead time 5 From the When off prescription use list select the target rate for when you are outside the area that is covered by the prescription file See Prescriptions page 354 6 Tap OK to load the prescription file Lead time Lead time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate change Define the lead time in the Select Prescription screen For example a value of 5 0 means that on average it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position of the vehicle The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller giving the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle arrives at the projected position You must choose an appropriate lead time This depends on the e Controller type and configuration e Type of materials being applied e Nature and specifications of the delivery equipment Control outside the prescription area When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file no target rate is available There are three options for controlling the output rate e Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription e Usea default rate e Useazero rate 356 FM 1000 Integrated
462. till fluctuates check the flowmeter may be a cooler or a tank issue If the rate holds in manual the valve needs to be tuned Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting Section Control does not work 1 Check that section control has been completely set up 2 Check that switching type is set up properly Boom valve Vs air clutch 3 Check that auxiliary power and auxiliary I O on the Field IQ cables are connected if present If system is set up properly 1 Runa flow calibration catch test This will force the sections on and confirm that all cabling and connections are correct 2 Operate the system in diagnostics FM 1000 integrated display only Arm sections at bottom of the screen and perform a catch test If system works in diagnostics 1 Check color of sections in the run screen If sections are red there is an issue a Check that system is not outside a boundary open a new field to test b Check that system is not over a previously applied area c Check that system has a fixed GPS position 2 Ifsections are yellow boom valves should be on but no flow is detected 3 Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen Section control timing is off 1 Check that all implement and vehicle measurements are correct Do not guess These measurements are crucial for an accurate application 2 Check that start and end overlaps have not been adjusted to take care of timing issues
463. tion Operator Name Name of the vehicle s operator Operator EPA Vehicle operator s EPA license number For spreading restricted use or state restricted pesticides or herbicides Harvest Year Year the crop will be harvested Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 319 Fields 18 Operations Category Explanation Farm Location Country or region where the farm is located Vehicle Vehicle used in the operation Implement Implement connected to the vehicle Application method Method used such as spraying seeding harvesting and so on Wind speed Average wind speed Wind gust speed Maximum speed of any wind gusts Wind direction Average wind direction Sky conditions Amount of cloud cover Soil conditions Description of the soil s state Soil type Description of the soil type Temperature Current temperature Relative humidity Percentage of humidity Crop Crop in the field Target pests Pests to be eliminated by spraying Custom 1 Additional information you enter Custom 2 Additional information you enter Custom 3 Additional information you enter Custom 4 Additional information you enter Material Material being applied Implement selection 1 Atthe Home screen tap H The Configuration Selection screen displays 2 Next to the existing implement tap Switch to select to a different implement 320 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision
464. tion control module s needed using Tru Count Air Clutches e Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change seed population e Seed Rate control using up to 4 PWM drives to change seed population e Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid nozzles Field IQ section control module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves e Variety tracking Sprayer e Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve e Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles Field 1Q Section Control Module s needed using existing boom shutoff valves or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves Strip till liquid e Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual sections Field IQ Section Control Module s needed using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves e Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives connected to fixed displacement pumps such as CDS John Blue piston pumps to change liquid rate Field IQ Rawson Control Module s needed e Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and flow 180 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field lQ system setup General setup information Application Main functions meter Spreading e Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive Field IQ Rawson Control Module s needed e Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and application rate sensor Air seeder e Section Control of up to 96 row
465. tion line Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled For use with FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode The d Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently using Horizontal error An estimation of the level of precision of the primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions 70 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Status Item Basic system settings P HDOP P Heading P Latitude P Longitude P Network ID P North P Offset P Offset X P Offset Y P Satellites P Section Line Number P Speed P Target Height P Up P VDOP P Vertical Error Estimate Pressure Version 9 25 Revision A Explanation Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky If the satellites are near each other in the sky the HDOP is higher lower is better Current heading of the primary blade in degrees from direct north Primary blade s current latitude Primary blade s current longitude RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver s corrections Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point Sepa
466. tion value after it has been determined in the initial calibration process Note This value is in roll degrees not distance inches cm and so on offline Estimate Steering Angle Bias For long straight passes helps drive the lingering cross track error due to erroneous steering angle measurements to zero Dynamic Approach Angle When enabled Headi Headline e Allows for a steeper approach path to the AB line when further away e Reduces the path angle as the vehicle approaches the line Note This setting does not increase the angle at which the system can be engaged from the line but does increase the approach angle after engagement Steering Slew Limit Controls the maximum sustained rate that the steering will respond e Lower value Steering is smoother and slower Note A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability e Higher value Steering is quicker and more responsive Steering Acceleration Limit Controls the rate at which the EZ Pilot system switches from no steering movement to the full steering slew rate e Lower value Steering is smoother Note A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability Set the value to zero to disable the setting e Higher value Steering is more aggressive EZ Steer system calibration Before you calibrate the vehicle e Ensure that the vehicle s hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature Refer to the vehicle documentation e Ensure that the tire pressure
467. tional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements 1 Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 2 Reset the roll offset value to O zero 3 Start a new field 4 Create a straight AB Line Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 255 Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14 TrueTracker setup 5 Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field To do this start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created When the system is stable engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass 6 Atthe end of the pass turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 7 Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass 8 In the middle of the return pass stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line This ensures there is no cross track error 9 Park the tractor and exit the cab Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and return paths 10 Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance Also note whether the ret
468. to a USB socket on the display Press the power button on the rear of the display to turn on the display Wait for the Home screen to display Tap Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen displays Tap the appropriate hardware on the Hardware list Tap the appropriate feature from the Firmware list Any available firmware upgrade files display in the upper right list Tap the appropriate firmware file The display shows the upgrade progress After the upgrade is complete tap OK The system restarts The component s firmware is now updated Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 213 Upgrade Field IQ system firmware 9 Field IQ system setup 214 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER GreenSeeker setup In this chapter GreenSeeker sensorsshines a calibrated light wave spectrum to measure the returned reflective light spectrum from plants and far AE pA 216 analyzes the data to determine the plants needs for nitrogen GreenSeeker functionality Care and maintenance Field preparations for nitrogen application 2 2c eee eee Field setup Field preparations for user defined rate 219 Delivery system and liquid control Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 215 GreenSeeker functionality 10 GreenSeeker setup GreenSeeker functionality As you travel the field in real time the GreenSeeker RT200 system e Sensors emit light
469. to create a survey are 1 Create benchmarks page 392 2 Survey the field page 393 Create benchmarks 18 Operations Before you can create a survey you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark When you create a benchmark the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field When you are leveling you use benchmarks to e Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re calibrate your exact position This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling e Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled me Field coordinates are calculated from this point Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number B8 392 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Bechmark steps 1 2 3 Place the GPS antenna in a known repeatable location that will not change throughout the leveling of a field Tip Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot Stop the vehicle On the WM Survey tab tap Bench Note If FieldLevel Il is installed you can tap Bench on that instead Both
470. to the Survey Setup screen Tip To view relative offset values on the Run screen set the offsets as status text items on the slide out tab For operational information see Create save a design page 395 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 267 FieldLevel II Leveling 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel Il Leveling The FieldLevel Il system Uses a high accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to measure and control its elevation Defines the three dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground Automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field Includes a color cut fill map simple on screen adjustments and automatic blade control makes leveling easy Supports tandem or dual scraper implements e With atandem system the second scraper is also controlled by GPS You can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers e With a dual system an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper Supports the EZ Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module SIM Requirements The FieldLevel Il system requires FM 1000 integrated display with or without the Autopilot system Platform
471. ttings 22 2 222 cece eccc cece ccc ccecccceeeeeees 130 Assign feature buttons aaa 130 Create a field feature a 131 Edit a field feature aaa 131 Mapping location setting ccc cece cece cece cc cecceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 132 Recording with coverage 2 aaa 132 Field area feature settings 2 2 0 oo aa 133 Line feature settings 2200 0 0 c aaa 134 Boundary feature settings 2 0 0 0 0 00 aaa 134 Point feature settings 0 2 22 2 n cece cn cecececccceecceeeececcceeeeeeeees 136 7 Implement setup aaah s saennccaeedansceensscneaceaeeteienndosaseaapecdactadsecosessesd 137 implement set p cocori sank bb eee eat nob en Na BA ARIA AANGAT AT NAA 138 Create an implement 2 2 0 2 a aka aaa a kaaa 139 Select an implement AA 139 Import an implement 2 2 2 a 140 Edit implement settings aaa 140 Implement Type 2 2 2 2 kaka 140 Measurements 22 200 5222 2245200 eben eee en adh ae tak Pe Sse ee bs See geben STRADA 141 Geometry 2 o eee ccc eee eee eee eee ee eee ee eee cece ee eee eeeeeeeeeee 141 OVEN PAA 142 Switches 002 2 c cence cece cece eee e cece ee eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeteteettttees 142 Delete an implement _ 2 22 22 occ cece ce eee eee e cece cece ceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeees 142 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A Contents 8 Vehicle guidance s
472. ttings and tap OK Setting Explanation CAN A Termination If the either CAN buses do not have a physical terminator enable the CAN B Termination CAN Termination option for that bus e Early hardware revisions of the FM 1000 integrated display will terminate ports Aand B e Later revisions will terminate B or D CAN Driver Strength Enable this setting to control the strength of the edges on the CAN bus Note It is recommended that you set the CAN driver Strength to Full Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 47 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings Data dictionary Aa Ma Data Dictionary Setup For information about data management see e Managing data page 78 e Data Dictionary categories page 94 e Create load a data dictionary page 95 48 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 3 Basic settings Basic system settings Data Files A Configuration H Setup Data Files Display Setup At the Data Files screen you can transfer data See Transfer data page 78 You can access the Data Files screen from the Display Setup screen as well as from the Home screen Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 49 Basic system settings 3 Basic settings EZ Remote Joystick Home B AK cant gt a p N Pa EZ Remote Display Setup Joystick N For installation information see the EZ
473. turn on the display At the Home screen tap ce At the Current Configurations screen tap Setup If necessary enter the Administration password See Passwords page 36 At the Configuration screen select E System and then tap Setup Select Data Files and then tap Manage Select Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap Copy The implements from the FieldManager screen now display in the Implement Configuration screen Edit implement settings At the Implement Setup screen you can change Implement Type Primary task for the current implement Measurements Basic information required for guidance using an automatic steering system Geometry More detailed implement dimensions required both with and without a GPS receiver on the implement Overlap Values required to apply or avoid overlap Switches Settings for switches tied to implement control system Implement Type In the Implement Type tab choose the type of implement you want to set up 140 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 7 Implement setup Edit implement settings Measurements Note The screen is scaled to the swath or application width whichever is larger If any offset is greater than this the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen Note This setting is used for navigation At the Run screen when you tap Skip to adjust the guidance line the guidance line moves to the current location of the ve
474. u want to delete from Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 81 Delete data 4 Data management 82 e The internal memory of the display Tap the id Internal tab e The USB drive Tap the P USB Drive tab To delete a specific item a Inthe lists for Client Farm Field or Event tap the item you want to delete b Tap Delete c To exit the Delete Data Storage screen tap OK To delete all materials To delete all events a Tap Delete All Events b Enter the administration password To delete all files on the display a Tap Delete EVERYTHING b Enter the administration password The system displays a message asking you to confirm the deletion If you want to proceed tap Yes FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 4 Data management Data storage structure Data storage structure The FM 1000 integrated display stores client farm field and event data in a specific structure on the computer and USB drive The first level folder is AgGPS Depending on your system configuration and the operations you perform the top level folders of the structure are e AB Lines folder page 83 e Archives folder page 84 e Autopilot folder page 84 e Data folder page 84 e Data Dictionary folder page 91 e Diagnostics folder page 91 e Prescriptions folder page 92 e Summaries folder page 92 e Task Data folder page 94 AB Lines folder There is one set of boundary an
475. ue is 1 foot and you set your Cut fill color range to 2 feet then the colors will be spread evenly across your cut fill map If you change the cut fill color range to 1 foot the colors will become more focused around the neutral area providing more detail closer to the grade 3 Select the Relative Heights tab and complete the settings By default coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark Setting relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened 266 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 16 Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey Design Setting Explanation Relative Heights Select Enabled from the list By default coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark Setting the relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened Relative X X axis coordinate Relative X Relative Y Y axis coordinate Relative Y Height Offset height Height Offset Force Re bench Whether the system will force you to re bench each time that you reload the field Note If you choose No the RTK base station must be placed in exactly the same position for the field to be correct 4 Tap OK to return
476. uidance lines as normal with the exception of adaptive curves and Free Form lines that are not supported by Vehicle Sync Naming guidance lines To avoid any confusion it is recommended that you take care in naming guidance lines All guidance lines are automatically combined together including lines that vehicles possessed prior to linking If guidance lines have the same name prior to linking for example if both vehicles have a line called AB line 1 Vehicle Sync reviews the lines to determine whether they are the same or different e fthey are exactly the same they are not duplicated e Ifthere is a difference the lines are pooled and labeled with the tractor from which they have come for example for both Tractor Aand Tractor B AB line 1 will be relabelled in all guidance line pools as AB Line 1 Tractor A and AB Line 1 Tractor B Note Vehicle Sync will not shift lines to account for different implement widths The actual line is transferred If you are performing an operation in which all vehicles have the same swath width and use the same guidance line the line on which the other vehicle is engaged becomes dotted as shown for H1 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 389 Vehicle Sync operation 18 Operations Although you can engage on this line an alert will display to inform you that you are engaged on the same line as another vehicle Coverage Your vehicle coverage is colored yellow
477. uide Version 9 25 Revision A CHAPTER Vehicle guidance setup In this chapter Setup for vehicle guidance includes choosing the type of guidance system that your vehicle is configured for Guidance settings 144 Manual guidance 144 Autopilot system 146 EZ Pilot assisted steering system 166 EZ Steer assisted steering system Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 143 Guidance settings 8 Vehicle guidance setup Guidance settings e Manual guidance page 144 For systems without any automatic steering system e Autopilot system page 146 e EZ Pilot assisted steering system page 166 e EZ Steer assisted steering system page 172 All guidance systems require GPS See GPS receiver settings page 98 For operational information see e Autopilot system operation page 359 e EZ Pilot system operation page 362 e EZ Steer system operation page 365 Manual guidance To set up manual guidance complete the settings and complete the GPS receiver settings page 98 mia Manual Guidance Settings 1 Atthe Home screen tap x The Configuration screen displays a 2 Select MW Manual Guidance and then tap Setup The Manual Guidance Settings screen displays 3 In the Vehicle tab complete the settings and tap OK Setting Explanation Vehicle Type Type of vehicle Axle to Antenna Offset The horizontal distance between the axle and the ant
478. uide system minimize the antenna offset position If an antenna offset is required set the left right offset first then limit the offset to the forward distance of 2 m 80 or less Back offsets with the TrueGuide system are not accepted Antenna Left Right Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the Offset GPS antenna This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement When using the TrueGuide system minimize the antenna offset Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 183 Field IQ system setup 9 Field lQ system setup Measurement Explanation positions They should not exceed 1 m or 40 Antenna Height The working height of the GPS antenna on the implement This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement 5 On the Overlap tab choose the correct option for the infill boundary e Outer Uses the field boundary as the infill boundary e Inner When running a Headland setting this moves the boundary to the inside of the last headland pass This allows you to run the inside patterns first before running the headland and then use the inner boundary for section rate shutoff 6 On the Switches tab enable any implement switches that are connected to the Field IQ system Tap Setup The Add Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen displays Setting Explanation Status off No Switches are attached to the Field lIQ system On One or more implem
479. ulation reaches a percentage lower than 100 for longer than the delay setting Seeds When Off This percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off for longer than the delay setting No Seeds When On This percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the delay setting Blockage Sensitivity Alarm When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given When no pulses are sensed for this amount of time the alarm triggers Multiples Threshold When two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing this is considered a double Lowering this number requires seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double Skips Threshold If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing this is considered a Raising this number requires seeds to be further apart to be a skip Averaging Sample Size The number of seeds used to calculate the average Increasing this amount makes the response slower but more stable Misplaced Seeds Threshold If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it is considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality Operation tab Setting Explanation Jump Start Speed The speed to be used when the master switch on the Field IQ system master switch box is put in the jump start position This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable Jump Start Ti
480. und in headlands with the sensor turned on random strikes on stubble cause the system to veer off the set Autopilot guidance line It is recommended that you travel through the headlands with Autopilot only to guide to the proper row After you enter the unharvested crop activate the sensors for row guidance On the Row Guidance panel the sensor button indicator shows the status of the sensors Indicator Button Explanation Row sensors are on but not active Yellow Row sensors are on and active Tap to turn sensors off Green Row guidance sensors are off Tap to turn row guidance sensors on and off while the Autopilot system is engaged The guidance system will now function as a traditional Autopilot system Gray 380 There is an error with the sensors FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Row Guidance operation Shift or skip guidance line You may need to skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line if you operate in a crop that was planted e Without automatic steering e Using WAAS corrections and is being harvested using WAAS guidance In either case satellite drift and or operator guidance can lead to misalignment of the guidance line with the crop Depending on conditions it may be necessary to shift or skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line This will be evident when the sensors guide down the proper row wi
481. ure settings page 133 e Line feature settings page 134 e Point feature settings page 136 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 131 Mapping location setting 6 Field feature mapping setup 6 Tap OK The Feature Mapping screen displays again showing the button of the feature you just edited Mapping location setting As you place features in your on screen field they are placed in relation to the e Center of the boom e Right of the boom e Left of the boom Access these settings at the Feature Mapping screen 1 Atthe Home screen tap A The Configuration screen displays 2 Select 4 System and tap Setup The Display Setup screen displays 3 Select Feature Mapping and tap Setup The Feature Mapping screen displays 4 Complete the settings for the Mapping Location section and tap OK Setting Explanation Point Features Point features should be placed in your on screen field relation to e Boom Center The center of the boom e Boom Right To the right of the boom e Boom Left To the left of the boom Line Area Features Line and area features should be placed in your on screen field relation to e Boom Center The center of the boom e Boom Right To the right of the boom e Boom Left To the left of the boom Recording with coverage You can choose to have line features be recorded when you have enabled coverage 132 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 6
482. urn pass is to the left or the right of the original pass Record the results Note The offset should be consistently to the left or right Test Offset distance Offset direction Total Total 3 average offset value 11 Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times for a total of three test runs Average the results of the three runs Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three Use the table in step 10 to record your results Flag offset method 1 Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m 1320 ft in length 2 Reset the Roll Offset value to O zero on the Roll Correction screen 3 Start a new field 4 Create a straight AB Line 256 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 5 Start a new pass Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable Stop the tractor midway through the pass Confirm that there is no cross track error the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line 6 Park the vehicle and exit the cab Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass 7 Complete the pass Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction 8 Engage automatic steering mode Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the marker flag Confirm that there is
483. urn section control on and off tap the Section Control On Off button Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 373 ISOBUS operation 18 Operations e When section control is off use the Virtual Terminal for section control e When section control is on sections will automatically turn off to limit multiple pass coverage Virtual Terminal operation After you have activated Virtual Terminal the F180 button displays on the Run screen To access the Virtual Terminal screen e From the Diagnostics screen under Configuration e By tapping Ton the Run screen This button displays on the Run screen after you have activated Virtual Terminal Icon s on the left of the screen show the available ECUs The center area and the buttons on the right of the screen change depending on information provided by the ECU Note Virtual Terminal screens and functions vary by platform For more information refer to the equipment manufacturer s operating instructions 374 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Remote Output operation Remote Output operation The FM 1000 integrated display automatically outputs pulses based on the settings in Remote Output settings page 118 as well as Line feature settings page 134 Distance based pulse operation With this option pulses are output based on a specific distance you set up in Remote Output settings page 118 You can use dista
484. urns the specified number of revolutions enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap Continue The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified Tap OK and then either press Test to repeat the calibration or tap OK to continue Tap the Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set for Target Rate 1 Target Rate 2 and Jump Start Tap OK Repeat steps 1 through 10 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field Q Hydraulics test The purpose of the hydraulics test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system 1 Atthe Field IQ Calibration screen tap Hydraulic Test A WARNING Moving parts during this operation Make sure that the implement is safe to operate 2 Tap Next 3 Enter the initial motor RPM The default setting is 300 It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds 4 Tap Start The next screen provides the status of each motor Status Explanation No Error The test was successful Motor Stalled The motors did not have sufficient oil flow ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor For more information refer to the Rawson System Installation Instructions Disconnected The Rawson Control Modu
485. used when the RTK base station was surveyed For more information contact your local reseller Note You must select the correct base datum for your location If you select an incorrect value this will result in incorrect xFill operation On the SecureRTK tab enter the key or keys and an optional description The base station access code provided by your base station service provider After you enter this code the Status and Expiry values change to show the current status of the security feature Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 101 GPS receiver settings 5 Connectivity settings SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a service provider with a RTK base station to generate time based access codes for their supported rovers If SecureRTK is enabled on the base station rovers with authorized access codes can use corrections from that base SecureRTK requires firmware version 1 59 or later on MS5750 GPS receivers and firmware version 4 60 or later on AgRTK AgGPS 442 and Ag GPS 542 base stations Note Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station 5 On the Advanced tab enter the settings Setting Explanation Elevation Mask SNR Mask RTK Base Station Filter Enabled Disabled RTK Base Station CMR ID Can be edited if Filter is enabled Scintillation Filter On or Off 6 On the Logging t
486. using the system in a new installation To do so a Engage on a line b Turn the wheel until Autopilot disengages To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel see Automated Deadzone calibration page 154 Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 361 EZ Pilot system operation 18 Operations EZ Pilot system operation A WARNING Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts If operating under these conditions auto guidance systems can react abruptly To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions disable the auto guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared To engage the EZ Pilot system you must have e Havean open field in the Run screen e Havean existing pattern you are using e Thevehicle within the engage distance set in the Engage tab See Engage settings for EZ Pilot system page 168 The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and in some cases also control the EZ Pilot system When you are using EZ Pilot to automatically steer on the guidance line you can e Tap O yellow on the screen e Press the Engage button on the EZ Remote joystick e Usean external foot or rocker switch Indicator Button Explanation Tap to O The vehicle is close enough to Engage on the guidance line
487. vehicle movement 162 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 8 Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system The instructions for this calibration test include several screens Follow the instructions on each screen Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration 1 Turn off the engine but keep the ignition key in the run position 2 At the Autopilot Calibration screen select Steering Interface Calibration 3 Keep to the suggested time interval and follow the on screen instructions to turn the steering wheel right and left full lock 4 Follow the on screen instructions until Calibration Complete displays on screen Row Guidance Note The Autopilot system with a supported vehicle is required for Row Guidance For the list of supported vehicles please refer to the RG 100 Supported platforms list When Row Guidance has been activated on the FM 1000 integrated display the Autopilot system will follow curved or hillside corn rows that do not exactly match the guidance line Row Guidance setup Before setup make sure you have activated Row Guidance for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 1 Atthe Configuration screen select M Row Guidance and then tap Setup 2 The Row Guidance Configuration screen displays Complete the settings and tap OK Note Verify the measurements are accurate for your vehicle Measurements can differ due to vehicle variations Measure distances with the header at th
488. verage Log Manual Coverage logging starts only after you tap Ja When Engaged Coverage is logged when the Autopilot system is engaged if no other system is controlling logging such as Field IQ or Yield Monitoring This setting can be edited in both the vehicle and implement setup A change in one setup location will show up in the other setup location Two State Engage Off The Engage button engages with one tap e First tap Engages implement and vehicle steering e Second tap Disengages both implement and vehicle steering Implement First The Engage button engages with one tap e First tap Engages the implement steering e Second tap Engages the vehicle steering e Third tap Disengages both implement and vehicle steering Vehicle First The Engage button engages with one tap e First tap Engages the vehicle steering e Second tap Engages the implement steering e Third tap Disengages both implement and vehicle steering 248 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 14 TrueTracker setup Setup process Steering settings for TrueTracker system At the mplement Controller Setup screen s Steering tab complete the settings Setting Explanation Nudge Increment or Set the amount by which the Nudge or Trim buttons move the line back Trim Increment to the correct path or by which the Trim buttons move the vehicle position The guidance line can move off target requiring Nudge as a result of e
489. vision A 5 Connectivity settings Remote Output setup e Divide the distance between the points by 2 In this example 14 2 7 e Convert the speed from mph to inches second 4 mph 4 x 17 6 70 4 inches second e Divide the halved distance between the points by the speeds 7 divided by 70 4 per second 0 999 Lead time in seconds 9 Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points 10 Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another 11 Ifthe gap between the points is unacceptable repeat the calibrations Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 123 Serial Data Input 5 Connectivity settings Serial Data Input Serial Data Input is an optional feature plugin When it is activated the FM 1000 integrated display can receive and log NMEA messages from an external device for example an infra red sensor 1 Install Serial Data Input See Activate features plugins for use page 45 2 Atthe Configuration screen select Serial Data Input and tap Setup The Serial Data Input screen displays 3 Complete the settings and tap OK Setting Explanation Port The port the device is connected to This is usually P5 Serial I O The settings for the port display on the right of the screen Baud rate Parity Data bits Stop bits Prefix The start point of the data you want to collect e To log data from the start of the li
490. vision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 195 Control setup Valve Setup tab 9 Field IQ system setup Setting Explanation Valve Type e Servo 2 wire standard servo valve that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow e Fast Servo 4 wire servo valve motor that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow e PWM 2 wire PWM valve An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor The valve adjusts application rate indirectly e Pump Servo An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor The valve adjusts application rate indirectly e Linear Actuator A valve that creates a linear motion as opposed toa rotary motion e Electric over Hydraulic A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output e Hardi Bypass e Linear actuator e Electric over Hydraulic e Ground drive Plumbing e Inline Valve is in the solution line going to the boom The valve opens Valve Behavior On Sections Closed to increase the application rate e Bypass Valve is in the return to tank line The valve closes to increase the application rate e Close When all sections are off the control valve returns to the closed position e Lockin Last Position When all sections are off the control valve remains in the last position This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster The valve will remain locked in the position it was in when the boom sections
491. want to use Settings 1 Activate FieldLevel Survey Design for use See Activate features plugins for use page 45 2 Atthe Configuration screen select b 4 FieldLevel Survey Design and tap Setup The Survey Setup screen displays Complete the settings Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 265 FieldLevel II Survey Design 16 Water Management setup Setting Explanation Survey Height Offset Represents the difference between the height of the blade when surveying and the height of the blade when moving dirt To measure this value park the implement on a flat surface and raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the ground The Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to avoid the need to re bench between Survey mode and moving dirt Survey Point Density When you create a survey of a field this setting determines the distance between the collected survey mapping points The approximate distances between points are e Coarse 7 8 m 25 ft e Medium 3 m 10 ft e Fine 1 5 m 5 ft Cut fill Color Range Defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the cut fill map The cut fill map displays only after you have surveyed the field and defined a design plane The range is displayed from the highest cut value to the highest fill value For example If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest fill val
492. want to use c Tap lt Set Item 5 To save the configuration tap OK Info screen On the Info Screen tab you can determine which items will be displayed on the Info panel when you tap li The status text items appropriate for the features plugins you are currently using display in the Info Screen list 1 Set the left Info text items a From the Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the left Set Item button c Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you want or the list is full The information displays in the left field 2 Set the right Info text items a From the Info Items list tap the item you want to use b Tap the right 4 Set Item button c Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you require or the list is full The information displays in the right field 3 To save the configuration tap OK Status option list The following list shows the status items you can choose to display on the Run screen The status items available depend on the optional features plugins that are currently activated In the Display Setup screen select Status Items and then tap Setup Status Item Explanation blank Status text item is not shown Along Track Error Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 65 Basic system settings Status Item 3 Basic settings Altitude Applied Rate Area to Empty Auxiliary Valve Available Memory Average Population Avg
493. were closed e Lockin Minimum Used with a PWM type valve The valve will lock into a minimum position that is configured in setup Auxiliary Valve e Master Valve closes when the system is turned off e Dump Valve opens to dump flow to return line when the system is turned off 196 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 9 Field lQ system setup Control setup Setting Explanation Pump Disarming e Enable Select this option if you have a pump disarming switch Switch installed e Disable Select this option if you do not have a pump disarming switch installed Feedback Setup tab Setting Explanation Shaft Encoder Pulses per revolution Constant Gear Ratio Actual ratio of the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter The Gear ratio allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM e The gear Ratio should be calculated from the Encoder to the metering point of the material e Rawson gear ratio should be figured from the motor to the metering point of the material If the gear ratio is figured incorrectly the system may over or under apply even though it is showing the correct rate on the screen You may also have issues in the drive calibration screen Gear Ratio Use the calculator tap Gear Ratio Calculator to determine your gear ratio Seeds Per Disk The
494. with flags see Create benchmarks page 392 and re bench on the master benchmark 2 Select the benchmark to re bench on 3 Tap oK Aconfirmation message displays showing the calculated distance to the selected benchmark Note This calculation may be quite exaggerated if the base was moved a considerable distance away from its previous position 4 Verify this is the benchmark you want if multiple benchmarks exist 5 Tap OK to accept the message The system begins the standard 30 second averaging process to re establish the field relevance to the benchmark you just re benched on Force re bench If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark and have chosen to require Force Rebench see Relative Heights tab page 272 the Create Benchmark button label changes to Re Bench The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re benched Note You must locate the machine exactly over the actual mark on the ground Do not rely on your relative position to the master benchmark if the base station was moved Blade level indicators In the operational view of the Run screen a blade indicator shows the status of the blade related to the On Grade Limit 404 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 18 Operations Water Management functionality Indicator Explanation The blade is above the target height beyond the On Grade Limit The blade is below the tar
495. wnership or by the power to direct their activities such as contracting with an independent consultant Re utilisation means any form of making available to the public all or a Substantial part of the Contents by the distribution of copies by renting by online or other forms of transmission Substantial Means substantial in terms of quantity or quality ora combination of both The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re utilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may amount to the Extraction or Re utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents Use As a verb means doing any act that is restricted by copyrightor Database Rights whether in the original medium or any other and includes without limitation distributing copying publicly performing FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 5 publicly displaying and preparing derivative works of the Database as well as modifying the Database as may be technically necessary to use itin a different mode or format You Means a Person exercising rights under this License who has not previously violated the terms of this License with respect to the Database or who has received express permission from the Licensor to exercise rights under this License despite a previous violation Words in the singular include the plural and vice versa 2 0 What this License covers 2 1 Legal effect of this document This License is a A license of applicable copyright and neighbou
496. y accident lightning or other electrical discharge fresh or salt water immersion or spray outside of Product specifications or v normal wear and tear on consumable parts e g batteries Trimble does not warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product or that software components will operate error free THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN THE PRODUCTS SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION PRODUCTION INSTALLATION OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN IMPLIED WARRANTY THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS SBAS WAAS EGNOS AND MSAS OMNISTAR GPS MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES O
497. y into the sensor to damage the detector Note There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system do not attempt any field repair of a malfunctioning interface module or sensors If you experience operating problems contact your local dealer 216 FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide Version 9 25 Revision A 10 GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for nitrogen application Field preparations for nitrogen application Note The following instructions apply to the most common nitrogen applications Check algorithms for specific instructions For updated specific algorithm instructions visit www GreenSeeker com Before you can use the GreenSeeker applicator to apply nitrogen across a field before or shortly after planting you must establish a nitrogen rich reference strip NRS or calibration area The rest of the field is referred to as the Non Reference Non Ref portion or as the N limited area or farmer practice region The NRS reference strip is used to determine the e Amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment such as mineralization e Current year s expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen An ideal NRS runs the length of the field but must be at least 400 feet long 1 Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field in other words not in high spot or low spot Use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the
498. y of knowing when communication with a Rawson controller is lost Special note on using a Rawson Accu Rate controller The display can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu Rate controller for only one drive at a time Drive A or Drive B To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch 1 To operate both drives set the drive that is not being controlled by the display to Non GPS mode 2 Connect the display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive e To control Drive A connect to COM A e To control Drive B connect to COM B When you use Drive B set the COM port to COM B Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A 3 Set Bit 7 mode to off Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the display Vaderstad Control Station 1 Connect the FM 1000 integrated display to the Vaderstad Control Station a Connect the special adapter cable P N DCA6219 with a crossover serial cable null modem to the Vaderstad program cable Vaderstad P N 428017 b Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station controller 2 Set up the controller a Press the button and hold it down while turning on the controller Note Pressing and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the display b In the Setup screen scroll to GPS and then select No Additional controller setu
499. y the Slope Adjust increment Bench Of Re Bench Tap to create a benchmark or re bench Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height Delete Benchmark Tap to remove any benchmark on the field that you have selected You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it Logging Tap to log coverage This shows on the map where you have been dependent on your implement width A shape file is created with cut fill and height information Version 9 25 Revision A FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 397 Water Management functionality 18 Operations Button Explanation Auto Engages automatic blade height control e Starts the slope calculation e Resets the height e Resets the cut fill Flat Plane Laser and Flat Plane GPS modes When driving in Flat Plane mode these options operate the same e Flat Plane Laser Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system and you want to touch up the field This model results in a mathematically flat surface which means the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth but completely flat e Flat Plane GPS Results in a design with a surface that is curved the same as the surface of the Earth an equipotential surface Note Neither of these models can be used with a laser system The entire FieldLevel Il system only works with GPS The controls on the Leveling panel for these modes are Button Explanation Coarse Fine Coarse The
500. yware or other computer programming routines designed or intended to damage detrimentally interfere with surreptitiously intercept or expropriate any system data or personal information use the MapQuest Services as a means to engage in conduct that reflects poorly upon disparages or devalues MapQuest s reputation or goodwill as determined in MapQuest s sole discretion FM 1000 Integrated Display User Guide 3 use the MapQuest Services other than the Open Services in conjunction with any commercial application not publicly available without charge other than mobile applications for which users pay a fee to download install the application If your application does not fit this criteria and you would like to discuss additional options for using the MapQuest Services please contact info mapquest com use the MapQuest Services other than the Open Services to process or generate data for any third party other than for end users as expressly permitted hereunder use the MapQuest Services with any content or product that falsely expresses or implies that such content or product is sponsored or endorsed by MapQuest use the MapQuest Services in conjunction with a site or application which contains or displays adult content or promotes illegal activities gambling or the sale of tobacco or alcohol to persons under twenty one 21 years of age 3 2 Additional Legal Requirements In addition to the restrictions set forth in Section 3 1 y

FM-1000 Integrated Display User Guide 9.25A

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents